HLP49 A help file for the HP49/50 series calculators April 2011 Bill Markwick

A Few Basics
ABS
ACK/ACKALL
ADD
ALARMS
ALPHA mode
ALOG
AMORT/AMOR
AND
ANIMATE
ANS
APPLY
APPROX mode
ARC
ARCHIVE
ARG
ARRAY-LIST
Arrays/vectors
ARRY/ARRY
ASM
ASN
ASR
Assign( )
ATICK
ATTACH
AUTO
AXES
Backquotes
BAR
BARPLOT
BASE
Batteries
BAUD
BEEP
BESTFIT
Binary Intgrs
BINS
BLANK
BOX
BR
Brackets
BUFLEN
BYTES
CASCFG
CASDIR
CASE
CEIL
CENTR
%CH,%
CHARS
CHR
CKSM (Chk)
CLKADJ
CLLCD
CLOSEIO
CLVAR
CL

CMD
CNRM
COL-
COL+
COL
COL
COLCT
COLLECT
COL

COMB
COMPLEX mode
Complex numbers
CON
COND
CONIC
CONJ
CONLIB
Conn4x basics
CONST
CONT
CONVERT
COPY
CORR
COV
CPX
CR
CR
CRDIR
CRLIB
CROSS
CSWP
Cursor keys
CUSTOM
Custom Enter
CUT
CYLIN
DARCY
DATE/DATE+
DATE
dB
DBUG
DDAYS
DECR
DEF/DEFINE
DELALARM
DELAY
DELKEYS
DEPND
Derivative ()
DET
DETACH
DIAG
DIAG
DIFFEQ
DIR
DISP
DISPXY
DMS (degrees)
DOERR
DOLIST
DOSUBS
DOT
DO-UNTIL
DR
DRAW
DRAW3DMATRIX
DRAX
DTAG
e
E/EEX
EDIT/EDITB
EGV
EGVL
ENDSUB
ENTRY
EQ
EQ
EQLIB
=/== (equals)
EQW
ERASE
ERR0
ERRM
ERRN
EVAL
EXACT mode
EXITED
EXP
EXPAN/EXPAND
EXPFIT
EXPM
EYEPT
FACT
factorial (!)
FANNING
FAST3D
FFT
FILES/FILER
FINANCE
FINDALARM
FINISH
FLAGS/list
FLASHEVAL
FLOOR
FONT series
FOR-NEXT
FOURIER
FP
FREE
FREEZE
FUNCTION
F0
Garbage Collection
GET/GETI
gmol
GOR
GRAD
GRAPH
Graphics menu
GRIDMAP
GROB
GROBADD
GXOR
HALT
HEAD
HEADER series
Helptext (in pgms)
Hidden dir
HIST
HISTOGRAM
HISTPLOT
HMS series
i
IDN
IF-THEN
IFERR
IFFT
IFT
IFTE
IM
INCR (Increment)
INDEP
Infinity ()
INFORM
INPUT
INT
Integers
Integral ()
INV
IOPAR
IP
IR
ISOL
KERRM
KEY
Key Numbers
KEYTIME
KGET
KILL
LABEL
LANGUAGE
LASTARG/LAST
lbmol
LCD series
LIB
LIBEVAL
LIBRARY basics
LIBS
LINE
LINFIT
LININ
LIST series
LNP1
LOCAL
LOGFIT
LQ
LR
LSQ
LU
MANT
MATCH
Matrix Writer
MAX
MAXR
MAX

MCALC
MEAN
MEM
MEMORY basics
MENU
MENUXY
MERGE
MIN
MINEHUNT
MINIFONT
MINIT
MINR
MIN
MITM
MOD
MODE screens
Mode-Flag menu
Mode-FMT menu
Mode-Misc menu
MROOT
MSGBOX
MSLV
MSOLVR
MUSER
n1, n2
NDISP
NDIST
NEG
NEWLINE
NEWOB
NEXT
NXT
NOT
NOVAL
NSUB
NUM
NUM
Numerical/Symbolic
NUM.SLV
NUMX/NUMY
N
OBJ
OFF
Old SYMB menu
ON+ Codes
OPENIO
OR
ORDER
PARAMETRIC
PARITY
PATH
Pauses
PCOEF
PCONTOUR (Ps-)
PCOV
PDIM
%
%T
PERM
PEVAL
PGDIR
PICT/PICTURE
PINIT
PIX series
PKT
Plots
PLOT command
PMAX/PMIN
POLAR
POS
PPAR
PREDV,X,Y
PRINT series
Programming basics
PROMPT
PROOT
PARSURFACE
PRTPAR
PSDEV
PURGE
PUT/PUTI
PVAR
PVARS
PVIEW
PWRFIT
PXC
Q/Q
QR/qr
QUAD
QUOTE
RAND
RANK
RANM
RATIO
RB
RC
RCEQ
RCI/RCIJ
RCL
RCLALARM
RCLF
RCLKEYS
RCLMENU
RCL

RCWS
RD
RDM
RDZ
RE
REAL Mode
Real numbers
RECN
Recovery
RECT
Rect/Polar
RECV
REF
Reflashing ROM
RENAME
REPL
RES
Reset
RESTORE
REVLIST
RI
RKF series
RL/RLB
RND
RNRM
ROMUPLOAD
ROOT
ROW
ROW
ROW+/-
rpm
RSBERR
RREF series
RSD
RSWP
s1,s2
SAME
SBRK
SCALE series
SCATTER/SCATR
SCHUR
SCL

SCONJ
SCROLL
SD card basics
SDEV
SEND
SEQ
SERVER
Shortcut keys
SHOW
SIDENS
Sigma (

SigmaDAT (DAT)

LINE
SigmaPAR (PAR)
Sigma stats
SIGN
SINV
SIZE
SL/SLB
SLOPEFIELD
SNEG
SNRM
SOLVEQN
SOLVING basics
SORT
SPHERE
SR/SRB
SRAD
SRECV
SREPL
SREV
Stack Commands
START
STARTED
STARTEQW
STARTERR
STARTOFF
STARTUP
STAT
STEQ
STO
STOALARM
STO arithmetic
STOF
STOKEYS
STO
STOVX
STREAM
STR series
STWS
SUB
SVD/SVL
SYSEVAL
%T
TABLE
TAG
TAIL
TakeOver
TAYLR
TBLSET
TDELTA
TETRIS
TEXT
Text Editors
Text to Grob
TICK
TICKS
TIME/TIME
TINC
TLINE
TMENU
TOFF
TOOL/EDIT menu
TOT
TPAR
TRACE
TRAN
TRANSFERRING
TRANSIO/XLAT
Translations
TRIG keys
TRN
TRNC
TRUTH
TSTR
TVARS
TVM
TVMBEG
TVMEND
TVMROOT
2D/3D
256 MENU
TYPE
UBASE
UFACT
UNBIND
UNDO
UNIT
Unit basics
USER
UTPC
UTPF
UTPN
UTPT
UVAL
V,V2,V3
VAR
VARS
VER/VERSION
VISIT/VISITB
VPAR
VTYPE
WAIT
WHERE ( | )
WHILE
WIN
WIREFRAME
WSLOG
XCOL
XGET
XLAT
XMIT
XOR
XPON
XPUT
XRECV
XRNG
XROOT
XSEND
XSERV
XVOL
XXRNG
YCOL
Y=
YRNG
YSLICE
YVOL
YYRNG
ZFACT
ZPAR
ZVOL
A Few Basics
First, tips on HLP49, then some HP49/50 commands. HLP49
is for RPN mode on the HP49G, HP49G+ and HP50G. It's
too big for the 48GII and currently there's no version for the
HP48.
CNFIG program (optional)
Allows Restart on Exit, Minifont Index, and/or Port 2 instead
of the SD card. You can press it at any time to display the
current config settings.
See the zip file for ways to transfer the datafiles to port 2. (See link below if you don't have it)
UNINSTALL program
Lets you uninstall any or all of the hidden config flags, Port 2 datafiles, or the HLP49 library. It can't
delete the HLPSD folder on the SD card, which must be removed with a cardreader.
APPENDIX
The Appendix contains cross-references to programs and utilities that are in other entries. The
HP49/50 index will jump to it if you press the Space key in alpha mode, or press RS-down cursor.
The HLP49 library for the HP49/50 series is a free download from hpcalc.org.
INDEX
Symbols:
{ } =/== > (infinity) \ < (not eq.) %CH,%
(pi) [ ] ( ) { } <<>> :: +/- (Assign)

DAT

LINE

PAR
stats
_ | (WHERE) xy (XROOT) APPENDIX
NAVIGATING:
Click on any index or reference link. There's also a scrolling index at the left in Reader.
To return to the Index, click the Index link at the top of any page, or click the up arrow
with the line over it on Reader's toolbar (next to the create-PDF icon).
To return from a link to where you were before, click the Back button (left arrow) on the
upper left of the Reader toolbar (to the right of the page number).
USING THE EXAMPLES
The larger programs use ASCII symbols for HP symbols they begin with the %%HP header. The
program brackets, for instance, will be \<< and \>>. The smaller examples don't have these because it's
faster to type them in. If there's no %%HP header, it's meant to be typed in.
The easiest way is to install HLP49 on your calculator. Programs can be copied and pasted to the stack
by marking with BEGIN and END and then COPY; on the stack, press PASTE ENTER and they're
ready to run. See the previous page for the download link.
To copy into the Emu emulator on the same computer - omit the %%HP header. Copy and
open the emulator - press EDIT>Paste Stack. Run the IN program from the Translations entry.
To copy and transfer files from this PDF, include the header and paste the program into a
textfile (Notepad will do), give it any name, and use the Conn4x transfer program to send it to the
calculator. Symbols will be translated in either text or binary modes.
To use the SD card, omit the %%HP header. Copy the file to the card, and on the calculator,
enter :3:FILENAME RCL (include any extension, but SD card filenames are not case-sensitive). Run
the IN program from the Translations entry. STO with your choice of name.
TERMS FOR KEYS
RS rightshift
LS leftshift
LS+ hold leftshift
RS+ hold rightshift
ON+ hold ON key
IMPORTANT
A plus sign means press and hold the shift key as you press the other key, as in LS+MODE.
RECOMMENDED (strongly)
Set flag 117 to get softkey menus instead of Choose boxes.
INDEX KEYS
The main index can jump to letters or numbers, the same way as CAT.
THE ENTER KEY IN THE INDEX
In the index, pressing ENTER is the same as OK. In an entry, ENTER is the same as ON (exits).
ITEMS NOT COVERED
The GAMMA, PSI, and Psi commands in MTH-NXT-SPECIAL have Help entries in CAT.
Some of the key functions are self-evident and don't have an entry.

SIN, COS, etc
All these are in TRIG keys.
INDEX
KNOWN BUG
Rarely, the CHOOSE command (the main index) will not exit properly and will put 'EXITED' on the
stack if it exists. The header may not be restored. This does not happen enough for proper tracing.
Special thanks to the members of Usenet's comp.sys.hp48 for all the tips and advice, especially John H
Meyers, who is widely quoted in HLP49.
HP49G/49G+/50G
The HP49G is compatible with the HP49G+/50G except that it lacks the SD card and the extra screen
area for the header. The 49G+ and the 50G are functionally identical except for the 50G's added serial
port (the 50G is also powered by the USB cable when it's connected).
The HP48GII is really a subset of the 49G+, but its memory is too small for large programs like
this one.
BASIC SHORTCUT KEYS
For more, see the entry for Shortcut keys (Shifthold).
LS+MODE: Mode softkeys
LS+TOOL: Real/Complex toggle
LS+NXT: last menu
LS+VAR: Home dir
RS+ENTER: Exact/Approx toggle
LS+F1-F6: Plot screens
LS-ALPHA: toggle upper/lower case in alpha mode
CURSOR Shortcuts
For more, see the entry for Cursor keys.
In stack mode:
Right: SWAP levels 1 and 2
Left: PICTURE (graphics)
Up: Interactive stack
Down: EDITB (best editor)
Backspace: DROP Lev 1
NXT: next menu page
LS-NXT: prev. menu page
LS+NXT: prev. menu
LS+VAR: Home dir
LS-down: EDIT (text editor)
THE STACK
The stack has as many levels as available memory will allow. Level 1 is called X, Level 2 is Y, and so
on. Example: the Y^X key returns Level 2 raised to the power of Level 1:
5 3 125 (ie, 5^3)
For manipulating the stack, see the entry for Stack Commands.
INDEX
COMMAND LINE
In stack mode, any new entry will begin at the lower left below the stack. This is the command line,
and it's also an editor - you can make any changes before pressing ENTER to put the entry on the stack
(TOOL has more editing commands).
You can have multiple entries on the command line:
11 "AB" 'CD' 22 ENTER 11
"AB"
'CD'
22
ALPHA mode
The ALPHA mode is locked on with two presses of the ALPHA key (flag -60 clear) or a single press
(flag -60 set). Alpha mode is cancelled if you press ENTER or ON.
Upper/lower case is toggled with LS-ALPHA (in alpha mode). This is cancelled whenever you press
ENTER or ON. (The default is upper case.)
For a single character in upper or lower case, press LS once in alpha mode.
VARS
The term for both the variables in algebraics (A,B,X,Y, etc) and the named, stored object using the STO
command.
Note that varnames are case-sensitive 'x' and 'X' are two different variables. (Note that SD card
filenames are not case-sensitive.)
VX
STOVX stores one or more characters in the VX variable in the Home dir and displays it (them) in the
header. This becomes the solving var for commands such as SOLVEVX or INTVX. The default is 'X'
and can be restored by running CASCFG or 'X' STOVX. See also SOLVING basics.
MATH COMMAND STRUCTURE
In stack mode, commands act directly on the object(s) on the stack or command line. In programming,
command keys insert the command name: SIN

In algebraic expressions (single quotes ' '), the command is entered in algebraic form: 'SIN( )'. It then
waits for you to enter the desired variable between the brackets.
GRAPHICS
Pictures, plots, etc, are called grobs (graphic objects). See Graphics menu, PICT/PICTURE, Plots.
ON+C
IMPORTANT: Reboot (warmstart). Use for exiting diags/format, installing new libraries, etc. See
Reset for more detail. See also ON+ Codes.
MODES
There are several main entry modes, Numeric (flags -2,-3 set) and Symbolic (flags -2, -3 clear).
Symbolic is required whenever there's an unknown var (such as X). "Undefined name" is the usual
error message for the wrong mode. See Numerical/Symbolic modes.
INDEX
There are two main solving modes, Exact (= sign in the header) and Approximate (~ in the header). In
exact mode decimals appear as fractions if Symbolic is set. RS+ENTER toggles these, or you can use
MODE-CAS-Approx. See APPROX mode, EXACT mode.
There are examples below under the Number Type examples.
FLAGS
In the MODE-Flags menu, a flag is clear if there's no checkmark, and set if there is one. System flags
on the stack are always negative (this isn't shown in the MODE flag browser). See also the entry for
FLAGS - list of flags.
STORING AN OBJECT
With the obj on Lev1, enter 'name' STO. If the name exists, you can also press LS-namekey.
To store a library in a port, put the lib on Lev1 and enter the port number, STO. Port numbers
are 0 (HomeDir - RAM), 1 (RAM), 2 (flash), and 3 (SD). See MEMORY basics.

To store any other object in a port, put it on the stack and enter :portnum:name. Example for port2:
Lev2: << your program >>
Lev1: :2:myprog

Note that quote marks are not required after a port number.
RECALLING
If the name of the variable is on the stack, press RCL to put the contents on the stack.
If the name is showing in a menu, press RS-name. RS-name is the same as RCL-name.
To recall from a port:
:portnum:varname

Example: :3:MYVAR RCL recalls 'MYVAR' from the SD card.
WILDCARD
The ampersand & (char 38, alpha-LS-ENTER) can be used to search all ports if you know the
varname:
:&: MYVAR searches ports 0-3
For more on the wildcard, see the entries for MATCH and RCL.
QUOTING
To put an existing name on the stack, press the ' key (single quotes), then type the name or press its
namekey. You can't quote a calculator command or a library name.
If the name doesn't exist, the calculator will add singlequotes. If it does exist, the contents of the var are
recalled.
X ENTER 'X'
INDEX
SYMBOLS/ASCII
See Translations.
EDITOR COMMANDS
See the TOOL/EDIT entry.
PLOT COMMANDS
For plot commands above keys A-F, press leftshift and the key at the same time. Each plot key has its
own entry. See also Plots.
OBJECT TYPES
See the TYPE entry.
SD CARD
See MEMORY basics and SD card basics.
NUMBER TYPE EXAMPLES (See also Brackets)
INTEGERS: 5 123
REALS: 5. 5.1
COMPLEX: (5.,1.)
APPROXIMATE/EXACT MODES:
You can toggle these with RS+ENTER.
EXACT, flags -2,-3 set:
5 Enter 8 / .625
EXACT, flags -2,-3 clear:
5 Enter 8 / 5/8
5/8 NUM .625
APPROX, flags either way:
5. Enter 8. / .625
RESOURCES
The best resource for programs, docs, etc, is Eric Rechlin's amazing hpcalc.org. There are thousands of
free downloads.
The best resource for general advice and troubleshooting is the HP48/49/50 community at Usenet's
comp.sys.hp48. You can get there from Google Groups. See also www.hp.com/calculators/.
HLP49 and its associated files are copyright 2011 by Bill Markwick v6.0 April, 2011
bmark37@hotmail.com
INDEX
ABS
Returns the absolute value of an argument. Program syntax is ABS(n).
n |n|
With a complex number or numeric array, returns the root of the sum of the squares:
(3.,4.) 5.
[ 3. 4. 12. ] 13.
To be sure of getting a numeric result instead of a symbol, use real numbers rather than integers.
Flag 3 should be clear for symbolics. Be sure that flag 119 is clear (Rigorous on). If Rigorous is off,
ABS(X) has no effect on X. (Flag 119 also affects the SIGN command.)
Results are dependent on the settings of COMPLEX mode and APPROX. mode.
Cmplx, Approx:
'X^2' |X^2|

Cmplx, Exact:
'X^2.' '(RE(X^2)^2+IM(X^2)^2)
Real, Exact:
['A' 'B'] '(A^2+B^2)'
Cmplx, Exact:
['A' 'B'] '(ACONJ(A)+B*CONJ(B))'
Real, Approx:
['A' 'B'] '(B*B+A*A)'
Some experimenting is required.
Access: LS-Z,
LS-MTH-NXT-CMPLX,
RS-CMPLX
ACK/ACKALL
ACK acknowledges the oldest past-due alarm. ACKALL acknowledges all past-due alarms.
If flag -43 is clear (the default), unacknowledged repeat alarms are rescheduled.
If flag -44 is clear (default), acknowledged alarms are deleted.
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS-ALRM,
RS+TIME-ALRM
INDEX
ADD
Adds two lists of equal size, element to corresponding element, or adds a number to each element of a
list.
{1 2 3} {2 4 6} {3 6 9}
{1 2 3} 5 {6 7 8}
Note the difference from the plus sign:
{1 2 3} {4 5 6} + {1 2 3 4 5 6}
A shortcut:

+/- - is the same as ADD.
See also AUGMENT in CAT.
Access: LS-MTH-LIST
Alarms
Single or repeating alarms can be set for notification or to run a program. For example, if you find that
the realtime clock is fast by two seconds a day, you can set a daily alarm to adjust it.
Press RS-TIME and select Set Alarm. With Message selected, enter:
-2 CLKADJ "Clock adjusted" OFF
Select Time and enter an alarm time when the calc is unlikelyto be used. Select Date and
enter the next day's date. Select Repeat-CHOOS and select 1. A time period field will appear. Select
CHOOS and Day. Once a day the alarm will adjust the clock and put the confirmation string on the
stack(you can delete the string from the program if you prefer).
For alarms that sound a tone, flags -56 and -57 should be clear to ensure that the beeper is
turned on. The beeper is almost inaudible. See BEEP for a program to make it more noticeable.
The alarms can be checked with Browse Alarms.
Repeating Alarm:
It's possible to specify an alarm repeat time short enough that you can't cancel it. Press and hold ON
and then press 9 to break out of the loop. The softkey alarm commands can be accessed with Tools or
RS+TIME.
See also ACK/ACKALL, STOALARM, RCLALARM, DELALARM, FINDALARM. The alarm
number can be counted with Browse Alarms from RS-TIME.
Access: RS-TIME (msgbox),
RS+TIME (softkeys)
INDEX
ALPHA mode
The alpha mode is locked on with two presses of the ALPHA key (flag -60 clear) or a single press (flag
-60 set). Alpha mode is cancelled if you press ENTER or ON.
Upper/lower case is toggled with LS-ALPHA (in alpha mode). This is cancelled whenever you press
ENTER or ON. (The default is upper case.)
For a single character in upper or lower case, press LS once in alpha mode.
USER mode is turned on with LS-ALPHA (when not in alpha mode).
In the FILER, ALPHA twice turns on the Search mode - the index will jump to any letter of the
alphabet. Another press of ALPHA turns it off. See also ENTRY.
Access: ALPHA key
ALOG
Antilog - the program version of 10^X. Expression syntax is 'ALOG(X)'.
'ALOG(2)' EVAL 100
2 ALOG EVAL 100
Access: LS-EEX
AMORT/AMOR
Amortizes an amount based on the Time Value of Money settings. See TVM for the other required
values.
n principal interest balance

where:
n = # of payments to date
principal = amt paid toward principal
interest = amt of interest paid
balance = amount to pay remaining

Access: RS+7-TVM (softkeys),
LS-9 (INFORM style)
AND
Logical AND of two args. The ones at the left side below can be any non-zero value.
1 1 1.
0 0 0.
1 0 0.
0 1 0.
INDEX
Reals or integers are taken as zero or non-zero:
5.0 0.
5 3 1.
In bitwise calculations with user binary integers, processing is done bit by corresponding bit, so that
# 110001b # 101001b # 100001b is the same as
110001
101001
------
100001
BASE should be in the BIN mode. Leading zeros are not displayed on the stack.
It can be used in an algebraic:
'X>2 AND Y<4'
This will return 1 or 0 when evaluated, depending on the values stored in X and Y.
It can also be used as an operator in UserRPL programs. The syntax is (for example):
IF <test1> <test2> AND THEN <procedure> END
If both test1 and test2 evaluate to non-zero, the procedure is valuated.
The following checks for a string on Lev 2 and an integer on Lev 1:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IF DUP TYPE 28. == ROT DUP
TYPE 2. == ROT AND
THEN SWAP "<program>"
ELSE SWAP
END
\>>
Access: LS-PRG-TEST-NXT,
RS-BASE-NXT-LOGIC
ANIMATE
Displays grobs in sequence. Grobs remain on stack.
L2,etc: grobn ... grob1
L1: number of grobs
INDEX
The above provides a full-screen animation with a fixed display rate that cycles until cancelled. To
change this, use the following list on Level 1 instead:
{ n { # X # Y } d rep }
where n = number of grobs
# X # Y = the upper left
start point in pixels
d = grob duration, seconds
rep = number of repetitions (0 = continuous, maximum one million)
If you use the list, all of the parameters must be present.
See the entry for YSLICE for an example of animating.
0 ANIMATE displays PICT/PICTURE without cursor or menu, the same as {} PVIEW.
Access: LS-PRG-NXT-GROB-NXT
ANS
Same as LASTARG when used from the keyboard. Doesn't give nth argument in RPN. Not a
programmable command in RPN - use LAST or LASTARG/LAST if needed.
arguments from last cmd
The ARG (LASTARG) function must be enabled with LS+Mode-Misc or by clearing flag -55 (the
default is enabled).
(Note that there is a keyboard ARG. This is for angles and is unrelated to LASTARG.)
Accidental Overwrites: if you act before running any other command, you can correct for accidental
use of STO by pressing ANS. Assume that VAR1 containing "Original" was overwritten with
"Overwrite":
ANS "Original" 'VAR1'
STO ANS "Overwrite" 'VAR1'
Drop the unneeded 'VAR1' name and you're back where you began.
Access: LS-ENTER
APPLY
Creates functions. Flags -2, -3 should be clear (symbolic mode).
L2: {symb1 ... symbn} L1: 'name'
{ vars } 'A' 'A(vars)'
{'X' 'Y'} 'F' 'F(X,Y)'
INDEX
For another way of creating functions, see DEF/DEFINE.
Access: 93 MENU (old SYMB)
APPROX. mode
Approximate mode can be toggled with MODE-CAS or RS+ENTER. The header shows a ~ symbol
(Exact mode shows a = symbol). In Approx mode, operations return decimal numbers (Exact returns
rational fractions in symbolic mode). While Exact mode is best for the CAS, Approx is preferred for
complex inputs. See also REAL Mode.
In Approx mode, entered numbers appear on the stack as reals (a decimal point is added).

5 5.
Approximate mode uses numerical results in calculations. Exact mode and CAS produce a symbolic
result in algebraic calculations.
If you're solving a symbolic expression that requires the approximate mode, the calc will usually switch
automatically - it will ask first, and saying no will cancel the operation. Mode switching can be
disabled by setting flag -123.
Access: MODE-CAS-Approx,
RS+ENTER
ARC
Draws arc (or circle) CCW in PICT. Set radian or degree mode as required.
L4: (x,y) (center)
L3: real (radius)
L2: start, deg/rad from horiz
L1: end, deg/rad from horiz
You can also use pixels:
L4: { #m #n } (center)
L3: #r (radius in user binary)
L2: start, deg/rad from horiz
L1: end, deg/rad from horiz
Example: to draw a circle 1.5 in radius with center at (1.,1.) in radian mode:
(1., 1.) 1.5 0 6.28
Press the left cursor to see it. Optional: ERASE before running ARC. Stack graphics do not affect EQ.
INDEX
The same example in pixels:
{ # 75d # 30d } # 15d 0 6.28
Note that 1.5 units (tick marks) is 15 pixels. See also CPX.
Access: LS-PRG-NXT-PICT
ARCHIVE
Creates backup object of Home dir and its subdirs. It does not archive libraries or anything else stored
in port 0 (which is where the Home dir is). It does not affect ports 1, 2 or 3. See MEMORY basics. See
also RESTORE.
Note that flag settings are not archived and the flaglist from RCLF (see also Mode-Flag menu entry)
should be stored in a variable. Key assignments and alarms are archived in the hidden dir.
:port#:name backup stored in port
eg: :2:BAK49
Port 2 (flash memory) is best for storing backups because it isn't affected by power loss. Note that
quotes are not required around the name, and that the lefthand colon does not show on the stack.
If the name already exists, it will say "Object in use". You can delete the original or rename the new
object.

To create and send the backup object via transfer (ARCHIVE uses binary Kermit regardless of
settings):
:IO:name
This sends the backup object via the selected IO method (USB, IR, etc). See TRANSFERRING for
more.
Better IO methods: use the SD card and a reader to transfer the backup obj to a PC, or use the USB port
and HP's Conn4x program. Conn4x has the advantage that it creates a var in the Home dir ('fLaG') that
will restore your flags once you install the Conn4x backup (see RESTORE).
Access: LS-PRG-MEM-NXT
ARG
Returns the polar angle of a complex number (coordinate).
(x,y)
(x, y) y
INDEX
The formula used is:
ATAN(y/x) for x 0
ATAN(y/x)+ for x < 0, RAD
ATAN(y/x)+180 for x < 0, DEG

A single argument x is taken as (x,0). Since this is a constant, ARG always returns 0 for x > 0 and 180
(DEG) or (RAD) for x < 0.
Note that there is another ARG in LS+MODE-MISC - this is a system setting and not a command.
See the entries for Mode-Misc-ARG and LASTARG/LAST.
Access: RS-Z,
LS-MTH-NXT-CMPLX,
CMPLX
ARRAY-LIST
The HP48 and 49/50 can do arrays in the same way as BASIC, with no need for dimensioning. Place
the data in a list:
{ A B C D E F }
and STOre it with any name, such as 'LST'. To retrieve any data, use the format: 'name(element)'
eg, to retrieve the D:
'LST(4)' EVAL 'D'
It's slower than GET/GETI, but may be useful in certain applications.
To retrieve data one element at a time in sequence, the program below can be used:
1 6 FOR X 'LST(X)' EVAL NEXT
To add to the list, use normal list processing; eg, to add a value to the end of list lname:
'lname' RCL value + 'lname' STO
You can also use STO+ (from PRG-MEM-Arith), but the value will be added to the beginning of the
list:
value 'lname' STO+
Access: type in
INDEX
Arrays/vectors
See also RECT and CYLIN for more information on rectangular and polar modes.
ARRAYS
Arrays use square brackets and can be used by themselves, as vectors, or as matrices.
[2 3 4] numeric array/vector
['A' 'B'] symbolic array/vector
[10 45] vector in polar mode
[(1.,2.) (3.,4.)] complex array
[[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 4]] numeric matrix
[[ 'A' 'B' ]
[ 'C' 'D' ]] symbolic matrix

See also Brackets.
Arrays can contain any number of elements. The default is horizontal - vertical arrays can be made with
the Matrix Writer or by setting flag -98. (The MTRW uses the matrix format - flag -98 mainly affects
the display.)
Arrays with the same number of elements can be added and subtracted - processing is vertical, element
by element. Multiplication of arrays requires the DOT and CROSS product commands.
An array and a scalar quantity can use any arithmetic operator except subtraction. To subtract a scalar,
put it in an array with the same number of elements:
[2 3 4] [1 1 1] [1 2 3]
[5 6 7] [0 0 1] [5 6 6]
VECTORS
See also V,V2,V3. Vector tools are in MTH-VECTR. The angle symbol is alpha-RS-6.
Vectors are usually 2D (two elements) or 3D (three elements), sometimes called phasors.
Type Difference
Arrays and vectors appear to be the same and even have the same type number (3). The main
difference is that the vector changes when the angular mode changes:
RECT POLAR (CYLIN)
Array [10. 20.] [10. 20.]
Vector [10. 20.] [22.361 1.107]
Arrays can contain reals or integers (the type number is 28 for integers/symbolics). Vectors convert
integers to reals.
INDEX
3D vectors have another angle symbol (the Z-axis) in spherical mode. They're made with V3:
3.16 2. 32. [3.16 2. 32.]
Note that vectors are always in rectangular mode internally - the polar mode is only on the display:
[5. 53.1301] OBJ 3. 4. {2.}
However, polar coords can be kept by using V in polar mode:
[5. 53.1301] V 5. 53.1301
Note that even in polar mode OBJ returns rectangular coords.
Making Vectors
Arrays can be entered by typing them in or using ARRY, but vectors require one of several methods:
1. Be sure flag -19 is clear for vector output. Enter the elements and press MTH-VECTR-V2 (or
V3 in spherical mode for 3D):
3 5 V2 [3. 5.] (Rect)
3 5 V2 [3. -1.2831] (Polar)
The above is in radian mode.
2. In polar mode, start square brackets, type the first element, the angle symbol (alpha-RS-6 or CHARS
symbol 128) and then the angle:
[] 3 25 ENTER [3. 25.]
The above is in degree mode.
If the angle is greater than 180 degrees or radians, -360 or -2 radians is added:
Deg: [3 250] [3. -110]
Rad: [3 4] [3. -2.2831]
Vector Algebra
The resultant of two vectors can be found by addition or subtraction:
[ 3. 25. ] [ 3. 7. ] + 5.9261 16. ]
A vector and a scalar quantity can use division or multi- plication. For addition or subtraction, put the
scalar in a vector with the same number of elements (see Arrays, above).
The magnitude of the vector in programming can be found with ABS (which is the root of the sum of
the squares).
INDEX
The unit vector is the vector divided by its absolute value:
[x y] DUP ABS / [1 y]
The angle of the vector in programming can be found with
[x y] V SWAP / ATAN
Rotating a Vector
A vector (x,y) can be rotated to (x1,y1) through the angle degrees by:
x1 = x*COS()-y*SIN()
y1 = x*SIN()+y*COS()
Rotation is CCW - for CW, make negative.
The program below automates this:
(x,y) (x1,y1)
(1.,2.) 30 (-.134, 2.232)
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR PUSH DEG RECT SWAP V\-> \-> \Gh x y
\<< 'x*COS(\Gh)-y*SIN(\Gh)' EVAL 'x*SIN(\Gh)+y*COS(\Gh)' EVAL R\->C POP
\>>
THEN POP "[x y] or (x,y),\177\Gh"
END
\>>
(The Greek appears as \Gh and becomes \177.)
Vector Plots
Plotting vectors is simplified if you use the complex form as explained below. The angle symbol is
alpha-RS-6.
If flag -19 is set for complex output from V2, the resulting ordered pairs behave just like the array-
type vectors for simple operations. A drawback is that they won't work with DOT and CROSS
commands. However, they're ideal for plotting, since no conversion to coordinates is needed.
5 45 V2 (5.,45.)
(5.,45.) (0, 0) LINE DRAX
The above is in polar and degree mode. To split a complex vector and retain its polar values, use V,
not OBJ.
INDEX
Vector Plot program
The program below will plot 2D vectors. Input can be polar, rectangular, or a complex-type vector.
[4 30]
[3.4641 2.]
(4.,30.)
For best results, the calculator should be in Degree mode and Polar mode. For radians, adjust the plot
parameters to suit. The above values are for the default plot settings (ZOOM-ZOOMDFLT).
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR PUSH DEG -19. SF CYLIN
DRAX
IF DUP TYPE 3. ==
THEN RECT V\-> R\->C CYLIN
END \-> vec
\<< vec (0.,\<)0.) LINE vec V\->
5. + SWAP .95 * SWAP \->V2 vec
LINE vec V\-> 5. - SWAP .95 *
SWAP \->V2 vec LINE POP PICTURE
\>>
THEN POP "Array,cmplx"
END
\>>
Be sure the plot range suits the size of your vector - use LS+WIN to set H-View and V-View if
necessary.
The arrowheads will change their size and angles slightly depending on the vector angle.
ARRY / ARRY
For vectors, see V,V2,V3, or Arrays/vectors.
ARRY
Splits arrays and matrices into elements and list of size(s). Same as OBJ.
[x y z] x y z {3.}

[[1 2] [3 4]] 1 2 3 4 {2. 2.}
Access: CAT
INDEX
ARRY
Creates array or matrix from elements on stack. Elements can be reals, integers, or symbolics. Arrays
can contain any number of elements. The default is horizontal - vertical arrays can be made with the
Matrix Writer or by setting flag -98. (The MTRW uses the matrix format - flag -98 mainly affects the
display.)
Array:
L2-up: elements
L1: number of elements
'A' 'B' 'C' 'D' 4 [ A B C D ]
Matrix:
L2-up: elements
L1: {m n} where m=rows, n=cols
'A' 'B' 'C' 'D' {2 2} [ [A B] [C D] ]
Complex array:
L2-up: complex numbers
L1: number of elements
(1.,2.) (3.,4.) 2 [ (1.,2.) (3.,4.) ]
Complex matrix:
As above, but Lev1 has a list: {rows cols}.
Access: PRG-TYPE
ASM
The 49/50 series provide a built-in compiler for SysRPL and ML source code, ASM (also called
MASD).
SysRPL basics: Be sure flag -92 is set for the SysRPL mode. The source code should be a string on the
stack, and must have this format:
"::
pgm code (comments)
;
@"
Note that the @ symbol must be on a line by itself and nothing must follow it other than the string's
double quote.
Comments are removed during compiling. You can also add comments by putting an asterisk (times
key) in the left margin.
Run ASM and the source code should compile to a program if there are no program errors. The stack
will show one or more External labels unless you set flag -85 for SysRPL stack display.
INDEX
There is also ASM2 from 257 MENU. It has the advantage of better error trapping and display. See
also 256 MENU.
The above assumes a good knowledge of programming. The Extable library should be installed to
allow naming of the commands. The Emacs programming editor is highly recommended, as is the
SDIAG stack diagram library and the Nosy decompiler (all from hpcalc.org).
Access: 256 MENU, 5 NXTs
ASN
Assigns user functions to keys.
obj keynumber
eg, PURGE 45.1
This assigns the PURGE command to the Backspace key. In USER mode, Backspace becomes
PURGE:
LS-alpha-Bksp same as PURGE
After one use, the assigned key returns to normal (unless you lock USER on - flag -61).
See also the entries for STOKEYS, RCLKEYS, USER, Key Numbers.
You can obtain the keynumber with 0 WAIT, which returns the keynumber of the next keypress.
You can assign a quoted name, a program calling another program, or a full program. Examples:
'pgmname'
pgmname
program
Note that you can't quote an HP command; eg, 'COS' will cause an error. You also can't quote a library
name. Use the program mode for this: COS or HLP49 .
For removing assignments, see DELKEYS. A new assignment will overwrite any existing one without
the need for DELKEYS.
Note that key assignments do not work in the editor or other programs unless the assignment has the
SysRpl command TakeOver. An easy way to do this is the TO? function from the Keyman library
(www.hpcalc.org). See the entry for TakeOver for more detail.
pgmname TO? keynum ASN
Key number is row-col.plane, where plane is the shift number. There is no apparent change to the
program after TO? (set flag -85 if you want to see it).
INDEX
If .01 is added to a shifted key number's plane, the shift key must be held down to obtain the user mode
function.
Example: If the Purge command is assigned to the rightshift P key (44.3), the keynum becomes 44.31
and RS must be held down at the same time as P.
Keyshift Nos:
.1 norm
.2 LS
.3 RS
.4 alpha
.5 alphaLS
.6 alphaRS
Access: LS+MODE-KEYS,
LS-PRG-NXT-MODES-KEYS
ASR
Shift bit right except for MSB.
# 1001b # 1000b
Access: RS-BASE-NXT-BIT
Assign ( )
Assign is not a command, but HLP49's name to assist index searches (the calculator's index doesn't
respond to the right arrow).
For key assigning, see ASN.
See also Programming basics.
Assigns stack objects to local vars in program. Must be followed by program delimiters or algebraic
expression. Vars are cleared on exit from program delimiters or evaluation of algebraic. See also
LOCAL for permanent versus local vars.
Example (see FOR-NEXT for another):
Stack:
Lev 3: 33
Lev 2: 22
Lev 1: 11
INDEX
Program:
<< a b c << program >> >>
OR
<< a b c 'expression in a,b,c' >>
Result:
a=33 b=22 c=11 (ie, Lev 1 is the rightmost var in the assignment sequence)
If the assigning is not followed by an expression or a program, a syntax error results.
Access: RS-zero key,
CHR 141
ATICK
Sets axes tickmark spacing in PPAR, which it creates if needed. Default is 1 unit (10 pixels). Follow
with a redraw or DRAX. To reset the defaults, delete PPAR.
A single real or integer sets both axes to the same value in units.
n
A list with two reals (not integers) allows different X and Y unit values.
{ X. Y. }
A user binary digit sets X and Y ticks at a spacing of n pixels.
#n
A list with two binary digits sets X and Y ticks to different pixel spacing.
{ #X #Y }
User binary digits are easier to use if the base is set to decimal (see BASE).
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
ATTACH
Attaches library to current directory. External libraries are usually auto-attaching, but some built-in
libraries require this command.
libnum
Example: 256
The above attaches menu 256 (the "hacker's toolbox"). It appears in APPS as Development lib. For
more detail, see LIBRARY basics.
INDEX
Some programs (such as OT49) automatically attach lib 256.
The Home dir can have any number of libraries attached, but subdirs can have only one at a time (each
ATTACH overwrites the last).
To make a library's commands available only from one dir, go to the Home dir and run DETACH, then
go to the desired dir and run ATTACH.
This change will be undone by the next reboot unless you put it in STARTUP. See also PATH.
Access: 110 MENU
AUTO
Sets autoscaling for plots - adjusts the axes to display the largest possible plot. Functions also create a
variable in the current dir (default name 'X' - you can safely purge this). No input is required.
If the results aren't suitable, you can either adjust manually with the Zoom features in the graphics
editor, or you can delete PPAR and ZPAR - they'll be regenerated with default values on the next plot
and zoom.
Access: LS+WIN,
81 MENU-NXT,
CAT
AXES
1. Sets coordinates of plot axis intersection - can be used to change the origin. To change only the plot
center, see CENTR. See also PPAR . The change takes place with the next plot.
(x,y)
2. Writes axis labels into PPAR (follow with LABEL).
{ "hlabel" "vlabel" }
The above plus the argument for ATICK (optional) can be combined:
{(x,y) ATICK "hlabel" "vlabel"}
Follow with LABEL. From the graphics editor, it's EDIT-NXT-LABEL.

3. In the LS+2D/3D window, adds axes to the next plot if a white square is showing in the softkey box.
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
INDEX
Backquotes (left quotes)
The backquote pair (``) is from RS+' and allows entry and evaluation of algebraic format expressions in
RPN that would otherwise cause a syntax error.
`CURL([SIN(Z),X+Y,Z^2],[X,Y,Z])` [0 'COS(Z)' 1]

Since the single quotes (' ') will also accept most algebraic formats, this isn't something you'll use a lot,
but it may be useful under certain conditions. Single backquotes are also available from the CHARS
map, character 96.
Access: RS+'
BAR
Sets the plot type to Bar and if necessary, creates

PAR, PPAR.

DAT must contain a vertical, single-

column matrix.
See also Plots and PLOT command for more on general plotting.
A sample barplot: store the following matrix as

DAT (you can use STO

from CAT):
[[ 2.5 ]
[ 2.75 ]
[ 3.9 ]
[ 4.1 ]
[ 5.5 ]
[ 4.23 ]
[ 3.17 ]
[ 2.95 ]]
Press LS+2D/3D and select Bar as the Type. Turn off Axes.
Press LS+WIN and press Auto, Erase, and Draw.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
96 MENU-PLOT,
CAT
BARPLOT
A CAT command that executes a Bar plot (see BAR above).

DAT must contain a vertical, single-var

matrix - the BAR entry provides an example. The plot does not remain on the screen - press
PICTURE (left cursor) to return to it. See the entry for

DAT for more on making

DAT.
INDEX
BASE
A menu that controls the current number base; the default is HEX (hexadecimal). The default base is
selected from HEX, DEC, OCT, or BIN. For changing the base of a number, numbers are entered as
binary integers, with the form
# XB
where X is one or more integers (and/or characters A-F) and B is the desired base: h=HEX, d=DEC,
o=OCT, and b=BIN (it's case-sensitive). The space after the number sign is optional.
If B is omitted, the system uses the current base, which shows in the header. Leading zeros are
not displayed on the stack.
See also AND, OR, XOR.
Example: convert FFF hex to decimal, assuming that the current base is hex.
Enter:
#FFF

# FFFh
Press:
DEC:

# 4095d
The decimal binary integer can be converted to a real with B

R (in BASE menu):

# 4095d B

4095.
Reals or integers are converted to binaries with R

B:
8192

# Nn
where N is numbers (and/or A-F), and n is h, d, o, or b, according to the current base.
In programs, the base can be selected by any one of HEX, DEC, OCT, or BIN. It can also be selected
with flags -11 and -12 (see FLAGS - list of flags).
The default size for binaries is 64 bits (see STWS). If you use binaries a lot, see Custom Enter for a
way to automatically create them.
BASE also includes binary logic operations using bits or bytes - these commands have their own
entries.
Access: RS-3
INDEX
Batteries
Needless to say, the calculator must be off when changing batteries. Removing a battery when it's on
will cause a system reset and/or data loss.
Batteries should be AAA alkaline. The 49G and 49G+ use three cells; the 50G uses four. You can use
the low-cost carbon types, but they won't last very long. You can also use rechargeables (see below).
A capacitor across the batteries protects the memory for several minutes while you change the cells
(one at a time is best - the 3V cell will not protect the time/date).
HP49G+/50G Only
The Port 0 and 1 memory backup battery is a 2032 3V cell. It will not run the calculator. If you remove
it with the main batteries out, ports 0 (the Home dir) and 1 will be cleared. Note that while the 2032
will protect the memory, the realtime clock will stop and buffers will be cleared if the main cells are out
for more than a few minutes. (For more on ports, see MEMORY basics).
Contrary to what HP may say, you can use NiMH rechargeables. In fact, they're highly recommended,
even if they need charging every week or two. And contrary to what you may have heard, there is no
problem with the low-batt indicator. (See hpcalc.org for various battery-monitor programs that show
the remaining charge.) You should have a second set of batteries of any type to protect the memory
while the NiMH set is charging.
You can also use nickel-cadmiums if you have any, but their capacity is much lower than NiMH.
BATTERY LIFE
This is very difficult to determine because the current drain depends on what the calculator is doing.
Intensive all-day use might require charging every two days, while casual use might extend battery life
to weeks or months.
Note: writing to flash memory (port 2) or the SD card (port 3) requires high-current pulses. If the low-
batt indicator is on or about to come on, you will probably be limited to saving to the Home dir (port 0)
or SRAM (port 1). If you can't save at all, power down and change the batteries.
BAUD
On the HP49G, sets the bit-transfer rate, which is stored in IOPAR in the Home dir. The HP49G+/50G
generally does not require this.
Choices on the HP49G are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 15360 bits/sec. The 49G+/50 in USB mode
uses 115200 and in IR mode, the rate is negotiated with the other device.
n

Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU-IOPAR
INDEX
BEEP
Sounds a tone. Flag -56 must be clear.
freq,Hz duration,seconds

Frequency range is 1-15000Hz. Any duration greater than 1200 sec is changed to 1200.
The beeper can be turned on and off with flag -56 or with MODE Beep. The alarm beep is turned on by
clearing flag -57.
The beep is nearly inaudible. You can make it more noticeable by using this program instead of BEEP:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR PUSH -56 CF
DO 500 .5 BEEP 350 .5 BEEP
UNTIL KEY
END DROP POP
THEN POP
END
\>>
Store it with your choice of name. It produces a sound somewhat like a klaxon siren until a key is
pressed. To make it sound for 2 seconds and then stop, remove the commands DO UNTIL KEY END
and change each .5 to a 1 (or other suitable number to adjust the on-time).
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT-NXT
BESTFIT
Lets the linear regression utility choose the best data fit from linear, exponential, log, or power.
Requires the data variable DAT (see also

PAR).
Access: RS-5-Fit Data-Model
Binary Integers (user binaries)
In addition to reals and integers, the HP49/50 has user binaries in one of four bases.
They have the form # XB, where X is any number and B is one of four bases, such as # 32AFh.
They're used for conversions from one base to another, and some commands require them as
input.
See BASE for more information on creating and using binaries.
See also AND, OR, XOR.

INDEX
If you use binaries a lot, see Custom Enter for a way to automatically create them.
Access: type in,
BASE-RB
BINS
Sorts independent column of current statistics variable DAT into (nbins+2) bins.
Xmin Xwidth nbins [[nbin1 ... nbinn]] [nbinl nbinr]
The array on Lev1 shows data points that fall outside the specified range.
Access: STAT-Frequencies,
96 MENU-1VAR
BLANK
Creates blank grob on Lev 1 in pixels.
#nwidth #nheight grob
With older ROMs such as v1.23, the maximum display is #131d by #64d. With newer ROMs such as
v2.09, the maximum is #131d by #80d. Otherwise the blank can be any size.
When using binary pixels, it's more convenient to set the BASE to decimal with RS-3.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
BOX
1. Draws a box in the graphics editor with the mark (times key) and cursor as opposite corners.
Access: EDIT-BOX (in graphics editor)
2. Draws a box in PICT using opposite corners in either pixels or coordinates. Pixel numbering on the
display starts at {#0 #0} for the upper left. For coords this will be (-6.5,4.).
{ #m1 # n1} { #m2 # n2 }
OR
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
The example draws a border around the screen:
(Older ROM such as v1.23)
{ #0d #0d } { #130d #63d }
INDEX
(Newer ROM such as v2.09)
{ #0d #0d } { #130d #79d }
When using binary pixels, it's more convenient to set the BASE to decimal with RS-3.
Optional: ERASE first. Stack graphics do not affect EQ.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT
B R
Converts binary numbers to reals.
# FFh 255.
See also Binary Integers (user binaries), RB.
Access: BASE
Brackets [] () {} <<>>
Also called parentheses or delimiters.
Note that brackets are available only in pairs; eg, putting a bracket around an existing number requires
deleting the halves you don't want: ( )XY( ) (55). Separate brackets are available from CHARS
(eg, characters 40 and and 41) if you don't mind the keystrokes.
[ ] LS-times
(Square brackets) are for arrays, vectors (see Arrays/vectors), and matrices.
Examples:
[2 3 4] numeric array/vector
'A' 'B'] symbolic array/vector
[10 45] vector in polar mode
[(1.,2.) (3.,4.)] complex array
[[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]] numeric matrix
[[ 'A' 'B' ]
[ 'C' 'D' ]] symbolic matrix
Timesavers: The Matrix Writer adds single quotes to symbols. The command line adds square brackets
to a matrix if you enter the first two pairs; ie:
[[1 2] 3 4 5 6] ENTER [[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]
[ 5 6 ]]
INDEX
( ) LS-minus
(Round brackets) are for complex numbers, grouping operations, or plot coordinates. The latter are the
same as a complex number.
(1.,2.) complex number
'(A,B)' symbolic complex
'1+2*(3/4)' = 2.25
'1+2*3/4' = 2.5
Timesaver: the command line adds the comma to numeric complex numbers (but not symbolics), and
integers are converted to reals.
(1 2) ENTER (1.,2.)
Symbolic complex numbers must have the comma typed in and must be enclosed in single quotes, as in
'(X,Y)'.
{ } LS-plus
(Braces or curly brackets) are for lists. Any type of objects can go in a list.
{ 1 2 A B } simple list
{ {1 2} {A B} } list of lists
{ 1 { 2 { 3 }}} nested lists
Timesaver: the Matrix Writer can do a list-of-lists if flag -91 is set. Note: the calculator will add
missing right curly brackets, and not always in the desired place.
For more on lists, see the entry for LIST series.
RS-plus
(Program brackets) Also known as guillemots, these delimit UsrRPL programs. They can be nested as
required. In alpha mode they're entered on one line ( ) and in non-alpha they have a newline
between them. See also Programming basics.
BUFLEN
Returns number of chars in the serial input buffer (255 bytes), plus 0 or 1 to show if an error occurred
or not.
n 0/1
0 - overflow, frame error
1 - no error
Press PRG-NXT-NXT-ERROR-ERRM to see the error message, if any.
Access: 104 MENU-SERIAL
INDEX
BYTES
For any object, returns checksum and size in bytes.
obj #checksum bytes
For the number of elements in an object, see SIZE.
Access: PRG-MEM
CASCFG
A CAS command that is not explained in the manuals, but sets conditions (flags, etc) for the best usage
of the CAS. No input is required.
Unexpected results from CAS commands can often be prevented by running CASCFG first.
Some of the settings it makes: Real mode is set, flags -2,-3 are cleared for symbolic mode, and Modulo
(in CASDIR) is reset to the default value of 13.
It restores VX in the Home dir to the default var 'X' - see STOVX. It also clears flag -124 (CAS-
COMPEVAL). The latter is not well explained, but a wrong setting results in "Non-algebraic" errors.
Access: CAT
CASDIR
A directory in the Home dir, created by the CAS for temporary storage of settings and vars. You rarely
have to access this unless you're manually adding vars to REALASSUME or checking the value in
MODULO.
The contents are:
SYSTEM:
Temp storage of terms used by the CAS. May not be present.
REALASSUME:
Variables in a list that the CAS will take as real numbers in Complex mode. Any can be added. Vars
can be removed manually or by putting them in a list and running UNASSUME (CAT).
Default vars are {X Y t S1 S2}. See also ASSUME in CAT for adding more.
PERIOD:
The value for periodic functions, default 2 .
ENVSTACK:
Temporary storage of flag and path settings. This is where PUSH stores the flags and paths, which are
restored by POP.
INDEX
PRIMIT:
The last expression for which an anti-derivative was found.
CASINFO:
Temporary storage of grobs.
MODULO:
The current modulus, default 13. CASCFG will restore any changes to 13, as will MODE-CAS-
Modulo and then NXT-RESET.

EPS:
Polynomial coefficients smaller than this will be taken as zero by the EPSX0 command in CAT.
Default is 1E-10.
MATRIX:
Temporary storage of a matrix used by the CAS. May not be present.
VX:
Contrary to some of the manuals, the var VX is in the Home dir, not CASDIR. See STOVX.
CASE
Conditional program structure. Since CASE terminates on the first true (non-zero) condition, it's more
concise than a series of IF-THEN tests.
CASE
DUP <test1> THEN <do if =/ 0> END
-
-
DUP <testn> THEN <do if =/ 0> END
<optional - do if no true cond. - similar to ELSE.>
END
Typing aids: when the CASE dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-CASE CASE
THEN
END
END
RS-CASE THEN
END
INDEX
The following example tests for an algebraic, a list, or a real number on Lev1; if other, it puts an error
string on Lev1. The IF conditional ends the program if there's nothing on the stack.
obj "type, typenumber" or "errorstring"
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IF DEPTH THEN
CASE EVAL DUP TYPE 9. ==
THEN "Algebraic,9"
END DUP TYPE 5. ==
THEN "List,5"
END DUP TYPE 0. ==
THEN "Real,0"
END "Not alg,lst,real"
END
END
\>>
See also AND and OR operators.
Access: PRG-BRCH
CEIL
Nearest whole number greater than or equal to the argument. See also FLOOR. Flags -2 and -3 should
be clear for symbolic use.
5.1 6.
'A' CEIL(A)
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
CENTR
Adjusts first two PPAR params to make (x,y) on Lev 1 the new plot center. Origin remains (0,0) (use
AXES to change this). Follow with a redraw.
(x,y)
You can also use a real or integer to move the center along the X-axis; eg, 3 will center the graph at
(3,0).
See also CENTR under ZOOM in the entry for Graphics menu.
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
INDEX
%CH,%
Percentage change from y to x:
y x 100(x-y)/y
30 15 -50.
Percent:
x percent of y:
y x y(x/100)
50 10 5
Access: MTH-REAL
CHARS
BASICS
The CHARS menu displays all characters in the current font from 0 to 255. Each character can be
inserted at the cursor with ECHO1 - for many chars, use ECHO. CHARS also works in the text editor
and other menus. It will not display the minifont. There are minifont editors available from
www.hpcalc.org, but none of them work well.
KEYSTROKES
In some keystroke listings, CHARS uses the ampersand (&) to indicate that the shift key should be held
down while pressing the character key.
NEWLINE CHR
The top two rows (0 to 31) are mostly blank. However, CHR 10 is the Newline (linefeed) char. CHR 13
can be used with Find/Replace to remove Windows/DOS carriage returns from imported text (CRs
show as black squares in the text). Leave the Replace field blank. See the entries for NEWLINE or
TRANSFERRING for more detail.
MODIF
Any character can be changed with MODIF. Cursor to any pixel - the period key toggles it on and off.
SCAN returns to the char map.
Note that both ON and ENTER will exit with your changes intact - there is no abandon key. See next
paragraph.
The modified font will last only until the next warmstart replaces it with the default. To make it
permanent, put the font on the stack with FONT and store it in the Home dir with a unique name.
Add to the STARTUP var (create it if you don't have one):
'fontname' FONT
INDEX
The modified font will be reinstalled at each warmstart. To return to the original font, delete the above
from STARTUP and do an ON+C warmstart (see Reset for more on warmstarts).
SOFTKEYS
If you press RS+CHARS you'll see the softkey menu for character handling (same as PRG-NXT-
CHARS).
SYMBOLS LIST
For a list of symbols and their ASCII equivalents, see the entry for Translations.
Access: RS-CHARS
CHOOSE
The CHOOSE window allows choosing one item from a list of any size. It can do incremental searches
for alphabetic characters or numbers, the same as CAT (and the HLP49 program).
RS up and down cursors jump to the top and bottom of the list. LS up and down keys scroll one screen
at a time.
Note that scrolling a large CHOOSE list (like this program) can make the calculator pause for a
memory cleanup. The pause time seems to vary with the OS version and has never been completely
eliminated. If it's a problem in a program, it can be reduced by forcing a Garbage Collection before
running CHOOSE with # 5F42h SYSEVAL .
Minimum syntax:
"title" (or "" for none)
{ a b etc }
ndefault chosen_item 1. (or just 0. if cancelled)
ndefault (a real, usually 1.) is the list element that will be highlighted when it starts.
The following example shows the most basic operation:
<< "Choose" { A B C } 1. CHOOSE >>
Output will be 'A', 'B', or 'C' and 1., or a 0. if cancelled.
For more objects, each entry should be of the form below
{a { x y z } }
In this format, the name of the choice ("a") is dropped from the output. If the name is a phrase, use
double quotes ("ab cd"). Example:
<< "Choose" { { a { x y z } }
{ b { x1 y1 z1 } } } 1 CHOOSE >>
INDEX
The output for "a", for example, will be { x y z } and 1.

Access: PRG-NXT-IN
CHR
Returns a character from the character map for a real or integer on Lev 1. Its inverse is NUM.
65 "A"
Chrs 32-127 correspond to the usual ASCII map. Chrs 128-255 are special HP symbols - see the
CHARS map . See also Translations, TRANSFERRING.
A linefeed (newline) is chr 10. A carriage return is chr 13. Returns will show in text as a black square.
You can remove these from imported textfiles with Search-Replace by cursoring to chr 13 in the
CHARS map and echoing it to the Find field. Leave Replace blank.
Access: PRG-NXT-CHARS,
RS+CHARS
CKSM
Sets Kermit I/O checksum, default 3. (For object checksums, see BYTES.) Also called Chk in the
Transfer screen. (Xmodem uses checksum rather than CRC - the remote Xmodem will revert to this
after a pause during handshaking.)
n
1 = 1-digit arith
2 = 2-digit arith
3 = 3-digit CRC
Access: APPS-I/O Transfer screen,
104 MENU-IOPAR
CLKADJ
Adds to or subtracts from the realtime clock, where +/-8192 is one second (see also TICKS).
+/-n
For automatic adjustment, see Alarms.
The simple program below sets the clock ahead or behind by the number of seconds (positive or
negative) on Lev1.
8192 * CLKADJ
+/-n
INDEX
For minutes, insert 60 * after the times symbol. For hours, insert 3600 * after the times symbol.
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME-NXT-NXT,
PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME-NXT-NXT
CLLCD
Clears screen (except for softkeys, and on older ROMs of the 49G+, the header) until a keypress. If
used in a program, it can be followed by a command such as 0 FREEZE or n WAIT, where n is the
number of seconds. See also DISP.
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT
CLOSEIO
Closes 49G serial port and clears buffer (so does off-on cycle).
Does not apply to the 49G+, and there is little information on the 50G serial port.
Access: 104 MENU
CLVAR
Clears vars and empty subdirs from current dir. There is no confirm and no undo.
If there's a non-empty subdir, vars are cleared only up to that point.
Access: CAT
CL

Deletes statistics variable

DAT if it exists in the current dir. There is no confirm and no undo.

Access: 96 MENU-DATA
CMD
Displays the last four command line entries. Pressing OK or ENTER sends the selected object to the
command line, and a second ENTER sends it to the stack.
Key commands are not displayed; ie, if you press 2 SIN, only the 2 is kept. Commands that are typed
in are kept.
Lists, programs, etc, that are placed on the stack are not kept unless they are edited; CMD will then
contain the edited version.
INDEX
CMD must be enabled with LS+MODE-MISC-CMD (the default is enabled). You can also use LS-
PRG-NXT-MODES-MISC.
CMD can use up a lot of memory if it contains large objects. To empty it, turn it off and then on
again with LS+MODE-MISC-CMD or LS-PRG-NXT-MODES-MISC-CMD.
The CMD command is not programmable.
Access: LS-HIST
CNRM
Column norm (one-norm) of array.
[x y ...] x+y+...

[(x,y)...] (x^2+y^2)+...
Access: MATRICES-OPER
COL-
Deletes column n of a matrix, returns new matrix and deleted column.
[[matrix]] n [[new]] [col]
Access: MTH-MATRIX-COL
COL+
Inserts column into an array or matrix.
[array] obj pos
[1 2 3] 88 3. [1 2 88 3 ]
If obj is an integer, pos should be a real to prevent integer-to-real conversion.
[[matrix]] [array] pos
[[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]] [ 5 6 ] 3 [[ 1 2 5 ]
[ 3 4 6 ]]
Access: MTH-MATRIX-COL
COL
Transforms matrix rows into separate column vectors, plus number of vectors.
INDEX
[[ 11 12 13 ]
[ 14 15 16 ]
[ 17 18 19 ]] [ 11 14 17 ]
[ 12 15 18 ]
[ 13 16 19 ]
3.
Inverse of COL below.
Access: MTH-MATRIX-COL
COL
Inverse of COL. Converts columns of arrays and number of arrays to a matrix.
arrays n [[matrix]]
[ 11 14 17 ]
[ 12 15 18 ]
[ 13 16 19 ]
3. [[ 11 12 13 ]
[ 14 15 16 ]
[ 17 18 19 ]]
Access: MTH-MATRIX-COL
COLCT
Factorizes polynomial/integer. Same as COLLECT.
'X^2+2*X+1' '(X+1)^2'
72 '2^3*3^2'
72. error
Flags -2 and -3 should be clear.
Access: 93 MENU (old Symb)
COLLECT
Factorizes polynomial/integer. Same as COLCT. Flags -2 and -3 should be clear.
'X^2+2*X+1' '(X+1)^2'
72 '2^3*3^2'
72. error
Access: RS-4 (ALG)
COL

Specifies independent-var and dependent-var cols of statistics variable DAT. Values are used by the
INDEX
plotter, which stores them in

PAR or Scatter and LR plots. See also XCOL, YCOL.

Xcol Ycol
The default is 1 for Xcol and 2 for Ycol.
The format of

PAR is: { indep depen Y-intercept slope }.

Access: CA
COMB
Combination of n items m at a time.
n m Cn,m
6. 3. 20.
Algebraic syntax in programs is 'COMB(n,m)'. In the EQW, enter n, press COMB, then enter m. Press
ENTER to put this on the stack.
On the stack, convert this algebraic to a number with NUM or EVAL.
See also PERM.
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB
COMPLEX mode
The 49/50 has two basic modes for CAS calculations, Real and Complex. Real is the most-used
mode (the annunciator in the header is |R). See also Complex numbers below.
Simple calculations with complex numbers can be done on the stack in Real mode, but complex
calculations using CAS commands often require Complex mode.
The annunciator is .
Modes can be toggled with LS+TOOL, or you can check/uncheck the Complex field in MODE-CAS.
If you're solving a symbolic expression that requires the Complex mode, the calc will usually switch
automatically - it will ask first, and saying no will cancel the operation. If flag -123 is set, auto mode
switching is prevented.
Access: MODE-CAS-Complex,
LS+TOOL
INDEX
Complex numbers
Numerical complex numbers are entered as an ordered pair with the format '(real,imaginary)'. The
calculator will add the required comma and convert to reals:
(1 2) (1.,2.) [Single quotes don't appear on the stack with textbook display]

Symbolic complex numbers must be fully entered as an algebraic expression:
'(X,Y)' (X,Y)
Note that the tic marks are not displayed with the stack in textbook mode. See RE, IM.
For changing symbolics into a complex number in programs, see the entry for i.
Algebraic complex numbers can take one of two forms on the stack, depending on flag -27:
Flag -27 clear:
'(X,Y)' (X,Y)

Flag -27 set:
'(X,Y)' X+Y*i
Numeric complex numbers are not affected by flag -27.
Most complex stack calculations are straightforward:
1.,2.) (2.,3.) * (-4.,7.)
The CAS with complex numbers may perform better in Complex mode. If the calc doesn't switch
modes automatically, toggle this with LS+TOOL or MODE-CAS-Complex.
CON
Creates constant array or matrix with identical elements.
{cols} n [n n n ...]
{rows cols} n [[matrix of n]]
Access: MTH-MATRIX-MAKE
COND
1-norm (col. norm) condition number of a square matrix.
[[sq. matrix]] cond#
Access: MTH-MATRIX-NORM
INDEX
CONIC
Sets the plot type to Conic and creates or modifies PPAR. EQ should contain an expression in two
variables (default X and Y), although single-var will work if they're in the form Y=f(X) (eg, to plot a
straight line, store 'Y=A*X+B', where A and B are optional constants).
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
The following will plot an ellipse. Gaps in the plot can be reduced by increasing the resolution with
LS-WIN-Step (see RES for values - try .05). If only half the plot appears, clear flag -1 to get General
Solutions. If a previous PPAR affects the plot, run ZOOM-ZDFLT.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< '2*X^2+3*Y^2-12' STEQ CONIC ERASE DRAX DRAW PICTURE \>>
Access: 82 MENU
CONJ
Returns conjugate of complex number or array. See also Complex numbers.
Flag -3 should be clear for symbolic arguments.
(1.,2.) (1.,-2.)
'(X,Y)' 'X+Y*-i'
[ (1.,2.) (3.,4.) ] [ (1.,-2.) (3.,-4.) ]
Access: CMPLX,
MTH-NXT-CMPLX-NXT
CONLIB
Displays library of constants. Menu allows selection of SI or English units, or no units. The Value key
replaces the names with numerical values. The STK key writes the selected constant to the stack with
or without units. See the CONST entry for control of constants display of units with user flags 60 and
61.
Access: APPS-Constants lib,
115 MENU CONLIB
INDEX
Conn4x basics
The Conn4x communication program for the PC is shipped with the calculator. The latest version is
usually available from hpcalc.org or the HP website.
The following applies to Version 2.3 Build 2439. (Currently hpcalc.org lists this as v2.2, but the
program says v2.3.)
See also Reflashing ROM, TRANSFERRING, Translations.
Quick start
1. Plug the cable into the calc and computer.
2. Start the calc and press RS-right cursor for the Xmodem server.
3. Start Conn4x.
4. On Conn4x, click the Connect icon (2 red arrows) or File>Connect.
The contents of the Home dir should appear in Conn4x. For some reason, they're sorted alphabet-
ically. If it errors, try unplugging the USB, plugging in again, and starting over. Be sure that you're not
in the Kermit server, RS+right, (which says only "Server" onscreen rather than "Xmodem Server").
The left window is for changing dirs and the right displays the vars.
Objects can be moved or copied between windows or the PC using drag and drop or the Edit menu -
see below.
Note that Conn4x currently cannot access port 1, the flash memory (port 2) or the SD card (port 3).
Quick transfer
Select the desired mode, either binary (icon shows ones and zeros) or text (icon shows A to D). Drag
and drop in either direction.
Transferring
Text (or ASCII) is the best method for files meant to be edited on the PC. The HP symbols will be
automatically converted to their ASCII equivalent and back again. Drag and drop in either direction.
Transfers in Text/ASCII will have a header added:
%%HP: T(3)A(R)F(.);
and the extension .txt on the computer. The .txt extension is removed when the item is transferred back
to the calc.
The header on binaries is 13 chars, beginning HPHP49, and the extension is .hp. Note that Conn4x's
version of Xmodem can do symbolASCII conversions.
INDEX
Above, the Conn4x Main Screen. The Auto connect mode is suitable for all but reflashing the ROM,
which requires the USB Calculator mode. The speed settings are usually automatic.
Screen Captures: set up the calculator screen and connect the cable. Select either the icon or Files>
Capture Calculator Screen. On the calculator, hold ON and briefly press the Up Cursor. Save as BMP
or JPG - BMP is larger, but often has better clarity for line art. Images are B&W, 137 by 86 pixels.
INDEX
Conn4x menus
Connect using:
With the calc connected via USB, the choices are Auto, COM1, and USB Calculator. With the
HP49G's serial connection, the choice is Auto or COM1.
Auto is adequate for most purposes (except reflashing the ROM - see below).
Speed
The HP49G uses 9600, the default for COM1. The USB will set itself to 115200.
Toolbar Icons
The leftmost (two red arrows) is Quick Connect and Disconnect. It assumes that you've started the
Xmodem server on the calc (RS- right cursor).
The camera icon is for screen captures - see below.
The rightmost icon shows either ones and zeros (binary transfer, the default) or A to D (text or ASCII
transfer).
File menu
New Folder
Creates a new dir in the current calc dir.
Backup
Creates a backup of the calc in your choice of computer folder. The default filename is 49_ followed by
the date, with the extension "hpbackup". Only the Home dir is backed up; objects in ports are not
saved.
Restore
Existing backups can be used to restore the calc to a previous state. Note that these backups are not
compatible with the calc's RESTORE command.
Delete
Deletes the selected item. There is no confirm and no undo. You can also press the Delete key.
Rename
Allows renaming the selected item.
Properties
Mostly the item's byte size.
Connect...
Same as the Quick Connect icon except for a menu with details on starting the calc. Changes to
Disconnect when the connection is made, same as the Disconnect icon.
Text/Binary
A duplicate of the toolbar text/binary icon.
INDEX
Edit menu
Cut, Copy, etc
Note that Cut, Copy, Copy as Text and Paste work only within the calc's dirs. They do not use the
computer's clipboard. Use drag and drop for transfers to the computer.
Edit as Text
Opens the selected item in Notepad. The computer's editor can be changed in View>Options.
View menu
The Toolbar, Status, and other options control the look of Conn4x on the screen. The Options menu
controls the translation status - the defaults are ideal. It can also select the desired text editor.
Calculator Command
Opens a small window that can send commands and display the results. Note that it's case sensitive.
Screen captures
The icon showing a camera is for screen shots. Images are B&W, 137 by 86 pixels. See the text under
the screen captures above.
Reflashing the OS (ROM)
Note that with the current version, the "ROM" menu is not active unless you start Conn4x with the
"Connect Using USB Calculator" option.
The new ROM file with the extension .bin must be in the same folder as update.scp. Click on
ROM>Download ROM. Go to and select the appropriate folder. Follow the onscreen instructions that
appear.
Note that an OS update can be lengthy and uses high-current pulses to write to flash memory.
Be sure the batteries are in good condition (the HP50G is powered from the USB cable).
CONST
Defines character(s) as constant or returns value.
Example:
CONST(g) (accel. of gravity)
OR
'g' CONST '9.80665_m/s^2'
The argument for CONST( ) must exist in the Constants library (CONLIB command, APPS-EqnLib-
COLIB, or 115 MENU).
Units can be toggled between SI and English with the CONLIB menu.

User flags 60 and 61 also control unit display (user flags have positive flag numbers.)
60s: English units
60C: SI units
61s: no units
61C: units
INDEX
Units can sometimes cause errors in user programs, especially in the Multiple Equation Solver. The
units can be removed with UVAL:
UVAL(CONST(var))
Access: APPS-EqnLib-COLIB
115 MENU
CONT
Resumes operation after suspension by HALT, PROMPT, etc. Annunciator shows HLT during halts.
Also resumes editing sessions suspended by the editor's HALT. CONT in a program cancels the
program, the same as KILL.
Access: LS-CONT
CONVERT
1. Converts one type of Unit to another - the programmable version of pressing LS and the new unit
key. Units must be from the same category (eg, "LENG") or the error message will be "Inconsistent
Units".
source-units target-units new_target-units
12_cm 1_in 4.724_in
Any numerical value of target-units is discarded.
You can also use the + key, but the numerical value of target- units is not discarded:
12_cm 2_in '6.72440944882_in'
(12_cm is converted to inches and added to 2_in.)
Access: UNITS-TOOLS
2. The CONVERT menu (LS-6) is covered under the individual command entries.
COPY
Some undocumented features (on the 49G, these might apply only to ROM 1.19-6):
Clearing the Clipboard: in the edit mode with nothing selected, press RS-COPY. From the stack:
press RS-PASTE and then RS-COPY. Press ON to clear the command line.
Copy All: press RS-down to go to the end of the file. Press RS-END, RS-COPY (or CUT).
Copying a Stack Level: press the up-arrow (interactive stack), cursor to the desired level (if required)
and press RS-COPY.
INDEX
Copying a Stack Level From a Program: as above, but press HIST instead of the up-arrow.
Access: RS-VAR
CORR
Correlation coefficient of independent and dependent columns of the statistics variable

DAT, which
must exist in the current dir. See also Sigma stats, XCOL, YCOL,
n
Access: 96 MENU-FIT
COV
Sample covariance of independent and dependent columns of statistics variable

DAT. See also

COL

, PCOV, XCOL, YCOL.

n
Access: 96 MENU-FIT
C PX
(Note that on the HP49G+/50G later ROM versions, the graphics area includes the header for a total of
131 by 80 pixels. Older ROMs have 131 by 64 pixels.)
Coordinate to pixel conversion - the inverse of PXC. Default upper left is (-6.5,4) ({#0d #0d}) and
lower right is (6.5,-3.9) ({#130d #79d}) with newer ROMS.
(x,y) {#m #n}
The conversion value depends on the settings in PPAR - coords can be anything you want, but pixel
values are absolute and based on the 131 * 64 or 131 * 80 display size.
Setting the BASE to DEC will simplify pixel values.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT-NXT
CR
Prints buffer contents, if any. Also creates the variable of print parameters PRTPAR in the Home dir.
If the calculator is connected to a terminal or printer, it sends a carriage return with CR.
The MS-DOS carriage return shows in calculator text as a black square. It can be removed by Finding
and Replacing CHR 13 (use the CHARS map to enter CHR 13; leave the Replace field blank).
Access: 104 MENU PRINT
INDEX
C R
Splits complex number or array into reals. See also Complex numbers.
(1.,2.) 1. 2.
[(1.,2.)(3.,4.)] [ 1. 3. ] [ 2. 4. ]
If you prefer an integer output, afterwards you can run RI on numbers or the CAT XQ on arrays.
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT,
MTH-NXT-CMPLX
CRDIR
Creates new subdir in current dir.
'name'

For removing a dir, use the FILES/FILER command or see PGDIR.
Access: PRG-MEM-DIR
CRLIB
Creates a library from a suitable directory. See also LIBRARY basics.

(run from inside dir) library
Note that you must run CRLIB from your directory or the error message will be "Invalid $ROMID".
The library object is then stored in any port:
portnum STO
Example: 2 STO
An ON+C warmstart then installs it (see Reset).

Since HP filenames cannot begin with a number, any libnums will have an L added when stored, as in
L1758.
Before making your own library, it's a good idea to use a library splitter from hpcalc.org to
see how others did it.
INDEX
Basics
To create the dir, enter its name, which can be the same as your program (or not), and press CRDIR
from CAT. Enter the following minimum variables (those marked optional can be omitted):
Main Program
Your main program - UserRPL, SysRPL, or ML. The name of this program is the one that appears in
the RS-LIB program menu (not the libname - see $TITLE below).
Subprograms
Subprograms are optional: your program can call any number of subroutines (or there can be none).
About (optional):
Useful for the version number, date, or other information . A typical way of doing it:
<< "Your text" SCROLL >>
STOre this in the dir as 'About' or other title.
$CONFIG
This contains a small program to attach the lib on startup so it can run from anywhere in the path:
<< libnum ATTACH >>
Choosing A Libnum
Choosing a library number: it's up to you, but HP recommends restricting numbers to the range 769-
1792. Numbers outside this range are for internal use. If there are conflicts with other libs, you can
always renumber it by changing $CONFIG and $ROMID.

$HIDDEN
A list containing the names of variables you don't want to show when you press RS-LIB-libname.
These are usually everything but your program and About (if used).
You can also have any number of other files in the dir - if they aren't listed in $HIDDEN or $VISIBLE,
they'll be ignored.
$VISIBLE
A list containing the names and order of variables you want to show in RS-LIB-libname. The minimum
is usually your main program name and About (if used).
$ROMID
Contains only the libnum, such as 1758. It can be a real or an integer.
$TITLE
A string with the label you want to appear in the listings and the RS-LIB library name, such as
"HLP49 v6.0 AP11".
The program name at the left (HLP49) becomes the main name of the library (not the main program,
which stays the same) in the RS-LIB menu. Since space is limited, limit the string to 14-15 chars.
INDEX
Finally...
You can now run CRLIB. If all goes well, the library will be on the stack and will look like:
Library 1758: HLP4...
Storing
Enter a portnum (0 to 2, 2 recommended) and press STO. Do an ON+C warmstart to attach your library
and you should see it in RS-LIB. Libraries can be stored in port 3 (SD card), but won't run.
Any problems preventing creation will be in the dir, usually one of the config vars. The error messages
should point these out.
Overwriting
If you make further versions of the lib, you'll need to delete the previous version before storing:

:portnum: libname PURGE
OR
:portnum: Llibnum PURGE
In the second one above, libnums in a port will have an L added.
Miscellaneous
To see or run your library's commands, you can also enter libnum MENU.
There are various library tools available from hpcalc.org. These can convert libs back to dirs and vice
versa. OT49+ is a good one. There are also guides detailing more of the available library features.
Note that if you use these tools to convert your lib back to a dir, your subprograms in $HIDDEN will
be renamed to numbers in hex; eg, if you have MYPROG, MYPROG1, and MYPROG2, they'll
become MYPROG, x002, and x003.
Access: CAT,
256 MENU
CROSS
Cross product of two vectors.
[ 'A' 'B' ][ 'C' 'D' ] [ 0 0 'D*A-B*C' ]
[2 2 3] [3 2 4] [2 1 -2]
Numbers can be reals or integers, with the result in the same format.
Access: MTH-VECTR
INDEX
CSWP
Swaps matrix columns i and j.
[[matrix]] i j [[new]]
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-COL
Cursor keys
Arrows represent the cursor keys. A + symbol indicates that the shift key is held down while
pressing the cursor key.
Stack mode:
SWAP (swaps Lev1, Lev2)
PICTURE (displays PICT)
Interactive stack
EDITB
Backspace DROP (deletes Level 1)
RS Xmodem server
RS+ Kermit server
RS not used
RS Interactive stack
RS displays softkey vars
LS SWAP
LS not used
LS not used
LS EDIT
LS+ see Shortcut keys for EDIT versus VISIT
Edit mode:
(See also the entry for TOOL/EDIT for more editing commands.)
RS right end of line
RS left end of line
RS top of file
RS bottom of file
LS right of screen
LS left of screen
LS top of screen (equiv. to Page Up)
LS bottom of screen (equiv. to Page Down)
INDEX
Command (entry) line:
RS right end of entry
RS left end of entry
LS right of screen
LS left of screen
CUSTOM
Displays a user-defined menu. Names of favorite variables are placed in a list and stored with the
reserved name 'CST'. The MENU command can also be used (LS+ MODE-MENU or LS-PRG-NXT-
MODE- MENU). See also STARTEQW for custom commands in the EQW.
{ A B C } 'CST' STO
OR
{ A B C } MENU stores in CST, displays new custom menu
Note that names in a list don't need to be in quotes.
Commands
Commands can also be entered:

{ SIN SQ EVAL }
If a directory does not have a CST, CUSTOM will display any CST higher in the dir tree. Note that any
changes made to these CST variables will be stored in the current dir.
CST Programs
The custom menu can also contain programs that are not stored separately in variables. The program
and its name should be in a sublist.
Example
The following CST displays A and B, which are stored vars, and M, a program within CST that returns
the free memory count:
{ A B { M << MEM >> }}
After this is stored in CST, pressing CUSTOM displays the menu:
A and B operate according to their contents, and M displays the free memory.
INDEX
A B M
Changing Dirs/Paths
To run the program PROG2 from DIR2 and return to DIR1:
{ { PROG2 << { HOME DIR2 } EVAL PROG2 {DIR1} EVAL >> } }
Shifted Keys
CST menus can also have direct, left-shifted and right-shifted functions for each name:
{{ name {<< "prg1">> << "left">> << "right">> } } } 'CST' STO
When CUSTOM is pressed, only name shows. Results:
name - "prg1"
LS-name - "left"
RS-name - "right"
Access: LS-MODE
Custom Enter
Custom Enter, also called "vectored Enter", changes any command line entry to a string on level 1 and
then runs user-written programs ENTER and ENTER if they exist in the path. The Enter key can
then change inputs in whatever way the user programs. A few limitations apply:
1. Flag -63 must be set.
2. User mode must be locked on (annunciator USR showing), either with LS-alpha twice or flag -62.
This means that all user key assignments will be active unless disabled first with DELKEYS (the
keylist from RCLKEYS must be stored in a var).
3. The entry-handling program 'ENTER' must be stored in the path. The program 'ENTER' can be
added for further processing after ENTER completes. ( = alpha-RS-A, = alpha-RS-B)
The following example converts entered numbers into hex binary integers.
Store the program below as ENTER'
<< "#" SWAP + "h" + STR >>
Enter 0 DELKEYS to clear any assigned keys and restore any unassigned keys. Be sure that the BASE
is set to Hex (and be sure to store your key assignments from RCLKEYS).

Turn on Custom Enter and User modes (ie, flags -62 and -63 set).
Entered numbers now become hex integers.
56D # 56Dh
INDEX
To turn this off, clear flags -62 and -63. Put the saved keylist on the stack and press STOKEYS.
Access: type in
CUT
Note that on the HP49G, the Cut and Copy features changed slightly with different ROMs. This is for
v119-6 (or v2.09 on the HP49G+/50G).
To cut a line and append it to the clipboard, cursor to the line without selecting anything and press RS-
CUT.
Note that it does not include linebreaks. A paragraph cut this way pastes as one long line.
Access: RS-STO
CYLIN
Sets cylindrical angular mode (same as Polar in the - note that the POLAR command is a plot type).
Annunciator is RZ. See also RECT, Rect/Polar, SPHERE.
Note that if you're using the MODE-Coord System field, the +/- key will step through the choices faster
than the CHOOS box.
Values are entered as a vector (see Arrays/vectors for vector entry): [x y] or [x y]. In the case of
[x y], it will be converted to polar notation if cylindrical mode is set. The angle symbol is alpha-RS-6.
For example, in Rectangular mode, enter:
(3 4) (3.,4.)
OR
3 4 V2 [3 4]
Enter CYLIN or change to Polar in MODE and see:
(5.,53.1301)
OR
[ 5. 53.1301 ]
The angle symbol is alpha-RS-6 (chr 128). V2 is in MTH-VECTR.
The program below toggles between rectangular and cylindrical (polar) mode. You can store it as RP or
similar or assign it to a key (see ASN):
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -16 FS? IF THEN -16 CF
ELSE -16 SF END \>>
[3. 4.] [5. .9273] (radians)
INDEX
Entering a lot of polar notation is simplified with the program below. Flag -19 should be clear.
<< DEG CYLIN V2 >>
magnitude angle vector
7.5 45 [7.5 45]
Substitute RAD for degrees as required or remove DEG and set it externally.
You can also use the complex number format as vectors (within limits - see Arrays/vectors):
<< DEG -19 SF CYLIN V2 >>
7.5 45 (7.5,45)
See the also the entry for V,V2,V3.
Access: MODE-Coord System,
LS+MODE-ANGLE,
PRG-NXT-MODES-ANGLE,
LS-MTH-VECTR-NXT,
65 MENU
DARCY
Calculates the Darcy fluid friction factor.
xe/D yRe xDarcy
Access: 117 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
DATE/DATE+
DATE returns mm.ddyyyy (flag -42 clear) or dd.mmyyyy (flag -42 set).
DATE+: past/future date, given number of days.
date +/-days newdate
Date should be mm.ddyyyy (flag -42 clear) or dd.mmyyyy (flag -42 set).
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME
INDEX
DATE
Sets new date into system date.
(flag -42 clear) mm.ddyyyy
(flag -42 set) dd.mmyyyy
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME
dB
Decibel, a typing aid for user-defined units.
1.
5.1_ 5.1_dB
Access: 117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
DBUG
Single-steps through program. IFERRs should have the HALT command inserted after each IFERR or
the error section will be executed as one step (remove these when done).
<any parameters> 'pgmname'
OR
<any parameters> << pgm >>
DBUG starts debugging
SST single-steps program
SST includes subroutines
NEXT see next 2 steps (no evaluation)
HALT suspends operation; CONT resumes
KILL abandons Dbug
The stack remains active during debugging - you can alter the results of the steps to see what happens.
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-RUN,
41 MENU
DDAYS
Days between dates, where the date is mm.ddyyyy (flag -42 clear) or dd.mmyyyy (flag -42 set). The
most recent date should be on Lev 1 to avoid negative results.
date1 date2 days
INDEX
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME-NXT
DECR (Decrement)
Subtracts 1 from named var stored in current dir or local var within a program; returns new value. The
var should contain a real or integer.
'name' newval
See also INCR (Increment).
Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH
DEF/DEFINE
Both store the expression on the right side of an equation in the variable specified on the left, or create
a simple solver program from an equation.
Ex. 1: 'X=(a+b)' stores '(a+b)' in 'X'
Ex. 2: given equation of form 'F(X)=SIN(X)^2', creates var 'F' containing program:
<< X 'SIN(X)^2' >>
The F var now returns the sine squared of any number. You can also use the F(n) format:
F(2) EVAL .826821810432
See also APPLY.
Access: DEF key,
CAT (DEFINE)
DELALARM
Deletes specified alarm. The alarm number can be obtained from RS-TIME-Browse alarms.
0 deletes all alarms.
nindex
Access: TIME-ALRM
INDEX
DELAY
The pause in seconds between lines sent to the printer. The default is 0. See also PRTPAR.
n
Access: 104 MENU-PRINT-PRTPA
DELKEYS
Deletes key assignment. 0 DELKEYS deletes all key assignments, and if normal key functions have
been disabled with 'S' in the keylist (see STOKEYS), restores the normal functions to unassigned keys.
See also Key Numbers, ASN.
Key#nn.n
0
'S'
Using DELKEYS with the 'S' option allows locking out all unassigned keys - see STOKEYS.
Access: LS+MODE-KEYS,
PRG-NXT-MODES-KEYS
DEPND
Sets the dependent variable name in plotting. This appears as the last element in the PPAR list. Also
sets the range for TRUTH plots.
The HP48 permitted arrays as well as reals in DEPND; the 49G/G+/50G allow only reals.
Certain HP48 plots might not work on the 49 or 50 if DEPND requires arrays.
name
{name low high}
low high
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
Derivative ( )
Finds derivative of algebraic expression on Level 2 with respect to variable on Level 1.
expr var deriv
'X^3' 'X' 'X^2*3'
In ASCII algebraics, stands for the complete derivative - not only partials. The format is
'name(symb)'. For example, the derivative of X with respect to t is 't(X)'.
INDEX
You can also enter 'X(X)' (on the stack with textbook display this is

X
(X)
).
'X(X^2)' EVAL '2*X'
The second derivative can be expressed as 'X(X(X))'.
'X(X(16*X^2))' EVAL NUM 32.
When writing an equation for the DESOLVE command (LS-S.SLV) for solving ODEs, the syntax for
the first derivative is:
'd1X(t)=expr' 'X(t)'
This is the derivative of X with respect to t. You can use any vars as long as you keep the format
d1Symb(Symb); eg, d1X(X).
The second derivative is:
'd1d1X(t)=expr' 'X(t)'
Note that DESOLVE creates (or overwrites) the var ODETYPE in the current dir. It contains the type
of equation, such as "1st order linear". Note also that the DESOLVE command will overwrite VX with
one of the variables it's using.
After rearranging terms, DESOLVE integrates both sides to solve differential equations.
Example 1: a simple ODE
'd1Y(X)=X' 'Y(X)' 'Y(X)=SQ(X)/2+cC0'
where cC0 is the arbitrary constant.
Example 2: second-order ODE
Textbook format: a=
d
2
s
dt
2
DESOLVE format:
'd1d1s(t)=a' 's(t)' 's(t)=(2*cC0+(2*t*cC1+t^2*a))/2*EXP(0)'
Simplifying and substituting conventional terms for acceleration, velocity, etc, in place of constants:
s=
1
2
at
2
+v
0
t +s
0
where v
0
= initial velocity
s0 = initial height or distance
See also the derivative and DESOLVE sections of the EQW entry.

Access: RS-COS
INDEX
DET
Determinant of square matrix, numerical or symbolic:
[[sq matrix]] n
[[ 'A' 'B' ]
[ 'C' 'D' ]] 'D*A-C*B'

Access: MATRICES-OPER
DETACH
Detaches library from current directory. See also ATTACH.
libnum
To make a library's commands available from only one dir, go to the Home dir and run libnum
DETACH, then go to the desired dir and run libnum ATTACH. This change will be undone by the
next reboot unless you put it in STARTUP (see also PATH).
For another example, see the ATTACH/DETACH section of the LIBRARY basics entry.
Access: 110 MENU
DIAG
Creates a diagonal matrix given an array and the dimension.
[ 1 2 3 ] 3 [[ 1 0 0 ]
[ 0 2 0 ]
[ 0 0 3 ]]
Access: MATRICES-CREAT-NXT
DIAG
Inverse of DIAG splits diagonal matrix into array.
[[ 1 0 0 ]
[ 0 2 0 ]
[ 0 0 3 ]] [ 1 2 3 ]
Access: MATRICES-CREAT
INDEX
DIFFEQ (Plots, Numerical)
1. Sets the plot type to differential equations. For numerical solving, see part 2 below plots.
See Plots for more on general plotting. See also Derivative () for brief details on solving DEs.
The following two examples were adapted from the HP48 User's Guide (better than the HP49 manuals
for basics, and a free download if you search hpcalc.org).
If a previous plot has changed the parameters, delete PPAR.
1. Plot Y' = Y+T for Y(0)=2 over the interval [0,1].
Press LS+2D/3D (Plot Setup window) and enter:
Type: Diff Eq Angle: RAD
F: 'Y+T'
H-Var: 0 V-Var: 1 __Stiff
Indep: 'T'
H-Tick: 1 V-Tick: 1 __Pixels
Press LS+WIN to change to the Plot Window and enter:
H-View: -1 2
V-View: -2 8
Init: 0 Final: 1
Step: Default Tol: .0001
Init-Soln: 2
(Pressing 0 for Step enters the default setting.)
Press ERASE (optional), DRAW.

Values that will be stored in the current dir by the plotter:

Y=6.15477759086
T=1

2. Plotting of stiff diff eqs can be made faster by entering partial derivatives:
Plot Y' = -1000*(Y-SIN(T))+COS(T), Y(0)=1
Press LS+2D/3D for Plot Setup. Enter:
F: '-1000*(Y-SIN(T))+COS(T)'
Angle: RAD
Check the Stiff field for the two partials FY and FT.

INDEX
A note on the partials: the easiest way is storing them before plotting. Put the main expression on the
stack and dupe it with ENTER. Enter 'Y' and press RS- to get the partial. Store this as 'FY'.
Repeat using the var 'T' and store this partial as 'FT'. In the 2D/3D screen, enter the name FY
into FY and the name FT into FT - the stored values will appear in the fields (don't use single
quotes, which will insert the name instead of the value).
Alternative method: enter the main expression into F: of the 2D/3D Diffeq screen. Press RS-COPY.
Check the Stiff field and move the highlight to FY.
Press NXT-CALC for the stack.
Press RS-PASTE and enter 'Y'.
Press RS- for the partial and then OK to return.
The value will transfer to the field.
Repeat for FT using 'T' as the var.
For reference:

FY= -1000
FT= '-1000*-COS(T)-SIN(T)'
Enter:
H-Var:0 V-Var:1
Indep:'T'
H-Tick:10 V-Tick:10
Check the Pixels field
Press LS+WIN for the Plot Window and enter:
H-View: -1 2
V-View: -1 1
Init: 0 Final: 1
Step: Default Tol: .0001
Init-Soln: 1

(Pressing 0 for Step enters the default setting.)
Press ERASE and DRAW. Plot time is typically 45
seconds. (With Stiff unchecked, plot time is over 5
minutes.)
Values stored in current dir:
T: 1.
Y: .841569099036
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
82 MENU
INDEX
2. Numerical Solving. Use RS-NUM.SLV-DIFFEQ. Example: solve the equation from the first plot
above, Y' = Y+T for Y(0)=2 over the interval [0,1]. Enter:
f: 'Y+T'
Indep: T Init: 0 Final: 1
Soln: Y Init: 2 Final: __
Tol: .0001 Step: Dflt __Stiff
Highlight the lower Final and press SOLVE. The full
answer will be on stack Level 1 with the Tolerance on
Level 2. INIT+ will move the new values into the INIT
fields so you can solve from these points.
There is little in the 49/50 manuals about this feature. A much better discussion is in the HP48G
Series User Guide, hpcalc.org.
DIR
Labels a group of variables as a directory. For navigating the dirs, see PATH. The syntax is:
DIR name var1 ... name var
n
END
If you're making a dir manually, the names between DIR and END do not need single quote marks.
Access: CAT
DISP
Displays a string on line n (1 to 7 for 49G+/50G Font 8) until a keypress. Must be followed by x
FREEZE (see the FREEZE entry for values of x - 7 freezes all). It can't write to the menu area.
Example:
<< "string" 2 DISP 7 FREEZE >>
CLLCD can be used first to clear the screen. Any key restores the display. To display for a fixed
number of seconds, replace x FREEZE with s WAIT, where s = seconds.
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT
DISPXY
Similar to DISP, but allows a string in any desired screen location in pixels, plus different font sizes.
Must be followed by FREEZE in the same way as DISP. It can't write to the menu area.
<< "string" {#m #n} size DISPXY x FREEZE >> EVAL
Size: 1 = minifont
2 = current font
x: see FREEZE entry, else use 7
{#m #n}: the upper left corner of the string in pixels
INDEX
Upper left screen is { #0 #0 } - for ROM v1.23, lower right is { #130d #63d }. Later versions such as
v2.09 have a lower right of { #130d #79d }.
Access: 2269 MENU
DMS (degrees, minutes, seconds)
Oddly, the 49/50 series has no direct DMS command, but the HMS command can do the same
thing, though it can be improved.
The program below converts decimal degrees to dd.mmss and also corrects for improper formatting
(such as returning 1.60 degrees instead of 2.0). You can store it as DMS or any name you prefer.
decimal_degrees dd.mmss
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR
IF DUP TYPE 0. ==
THEN DUP IP SWAP
FP 3600. * 0 RND 60.
DUP2 MOD 10000. / 3
ROLLD / IP 100. / + +
IF DUP FP .6 \>=
THEN CEIL
END
END "dd.mmss" \->TAG
THEN "Real\->DMS"
END
\>>
The tag on the result can be removed by pressing EVAL.
To convert back to decimal degrees, use the HMS command in RS-TIME-Tools-NXT (167.02
MENU).
dd.mmss decimal_degrees
An alternative to the above is to store the program below as DMS or similar:
<< HMS >>
ACCESS: Copy, paste
DOERR
User-specified error trip for IFERR (any message displays in MSGBOX - but see STARTERR).
Often used with an IF-THEN statement: IF <condition> THEN 0 DOERR END
INDEX
This will activate IFERR if <condition> is non-zero (and the program is enclosed by IFERR-THEN-
END).
Must be preceded by n, where n = errm# or user string. If none, use "" or 0.
n
"user string"
Can also be used to find an error message if you know the number:
# errnum "error msg"
The format below lets you write your own error message. It can be used anywhere in a program as
often as needed:
IFERR <procedure> THEN "Your msg" DOERR END
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-ERROR
DOLIST
Applies program, command, or function to each element of list on Lev 3. Results are merged with any
other lists (see examples below).
list1 ... listn
number of lists
<< program >> newlist
{ 1 2 3 }
1
<< 2 * >> { 2 4 6 }
{ A B C }
{ D E F }
2
<< 2 * >> { A 'D*2' B 'E*2' C 'F*2' }

See also MAP in CAT.
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
DOSUBS
Applies obj (a program, command, or name) to groups of elements in a list. To put a command on the
stack without evaluation, see LIST series or TAG. Any named var should contain a pgm or cmd.
{list}
group (a real)
obj {list}
INDEX
{ A B C D }
2.
<< SQ >> { A 'SQ(B)' B 'SQ(C)' C 'SQ(D)' }
{ A B C D E }
3.
<< SQ >> { A B 'SQ(C)' B C 'SQ(D)' C D 'SQ(E)' }
In the first above, SQ is applied to every second element of groups of two. In the second example, it's
applied to every third element of groups of three.
The program below was adapted from a post on comp.sys.hp48 by John H Meyers. Given a list of
coefficients and a varname, it returns an algebraic expression.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -3. CF 0. ROT 1. \<< 3. PICK
ENDSUB NSUB - ^ * + \>> DOSUBS
SWAP DROP SIMPLIFY \>>
{ 3. 4. -5. } 'X' '3.*X^2.+4.*X-5.'
The program uses ENDSUB-NSUB (total minus position) for the exponent of each term, which is
always one less than its position. See also ENDSUB, NSUB.

Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
DOT
Dot product of two real, integer or symbolic vectors (arrays).
[1 2] [3 4] 11
[ 'A' 'B' ][ 'C' 'D' ] 'B*D+A*C'
Access: MTH-VECTR
DO-UNTIL
Conditional loop repeats procedure until test1 is non-zero.
DO <procedure> UNTIL <test1> END
If test1 never returns a non-zero value, you can stop the loop with ON (sometimes repeatedly).
Typing aid: when the DO dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-DO DO
UNTIL
END

INDEX
The example below clears the stack of all but the last object:
<< DO DROP UNTIL DEPTH 1 == END >>
Access: PGM-BRCH
D R
Converts degrees to radians. Its inverse is RD.
degrees radians
The formula is deg * (H/180).
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
DRAW
Plots expression or list of exprs in EQ. Use DRAX to draw axes or select AXES key in the LS+2D/3D
window (press ENTER after). It will use the existing plot type in PPAR unless you specify another.
If PPAR doesn't exist, DRAW will create the default, a function in X.
Note that DRAW will merge the new plot with any existing image unless you first use ERASE.
This program can be assigned to a key for convenient plotting:
<< DRAX DRAW PICTURE >>
Optional: add ERASE before DRAX.
Plots: each side of an equation is plotted separately; ie, for 'X^2=5', it will plot X^2 and then 5. 'X^2-5'
is the preferred form.
See the Plots entry for more information.
Access: LS+2D/3D,
81 MENU
DRAW3DMATRIX
Plots a 3D image from a matrix without using the EQ or PPAR vars. It will overwrite PICT.
[[matrix]] vmin vmax
Operation is similar to FAST3D and the plot can be rapidly rotated with the cursor keys. One
difference is that TRACE lacks the coordinate display feature. The following example can be copied
and pasted to the stack to show a typical use:
INDEX
[[ 3 8 8 1 ]
[ 8 4 1 8 ]
[ 2 1 1 5 ]
[ 1 1 5 7 ]] 1 10
The matrix does not remain on the stack. To retrieve it, press UNDO immediately after exiting.
Access: CAT
DRAX
Draws axes in PICT - the program version of the Axes toggle in the LS+2D/3D window. See AXES or
ATICK for labels or tick spacing.
This program can be assigned to a key for convenient plotting of the expression in EQ:
<< DRAX DRAW PICTURE >>
Optional: add ERASE before DRAX.
Access: 81 MENU
DTAG
Removes tag from obj (so does multiplying by 1 and most other operations, such as EVAL). OBJ
removes the tag and keeps it as a string on Lev1.
:tag:obj obj
:tag:obj OBJ obj "tag"
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT
e
Base of natural logs. Returns e (symbolic, flag -3 clear) or 2.1828182846 (numeric, flag -3 set).
Access: alpha LS-E
E/EEX
E is the symbol for exponent notation, 10^n.
2.E15 = 2.*10^15
It's used by the SCI and ENG number formats, the EEX key, (and any number too large or small for
normal display). See the entry for Mode-FMT menu.

INDEX
EEX (Enter Exponent) allows entering very large or small numbers, such as Boltzmann's constant
(1.380658 * 10^-23):
1.380658 EEX 23 +/- 1.380658E-23
It's also useful for entering large numbers such as 1 million:
EEX 6 ENTER 1000000.
Thousands separators for reals are available in fixed modes (see FMT link, above).
Access: EEX key
EDIT/EDITB
Commands for EDIT/EDITB are in the TOOL/EDIT entry.
On the 49G+/50G EDIT and EDITB with later ROM versions such as v2.09 can use the full 12-
line screen; earlier versions such as v1.23 display a blank header.
EDIT opens the text editor for editing most types of objects. If the stack is empty, start a new editing
session with a null (empty) string ("" - see the entry for NOT to automate this).
See also the entries for STARTED and EXITED. EDIT displays a string's double quotes.
To embed double quotes inside a string, precede each with a backslash, alpha-RS-5, char 92. These
display in EDIT but not in EDITB, the stack, or SCROLL.
Access: LS-down cursor (continued below)
EDITB selects the best editor for the object type. Examples:
string, list, pgm: text editors EDIT or EDITB
algebraic: Equation Writer
matrix: Matrix Writer
grob: graphics editor
EDITB doesn't display a string's double quotes and doesn't display the backslash used to embed quote
marks (see EDIT above).
On the 49/50 series, LS+Down is similar to Down (which is EDITB), but can act as VISITB in that it
edits the contents of a named var rather than the varname:
Down LS+Down

name edits name edits content
object edits obj edits obj
Access: down cursor,
TOOL-EDIT (calls EDITB)
INDEX
EGV
Eigenvectors and right eigenvalues for a square matrix.
[[matrix]] [[evectors]]
[evalues]
Access: MATRICES-NXT-EIGEN
EGVL
Eigenvalues for a square matrix.
[[matrix]] [evalues]
Access: MATRICES-NXT-EIGEN
ENDSUB
Total number of sublists or elements in list used by DOSUBS.
{ 22. 33. 44. 55. }
1.
<< ENDSUB NSUB >> DOSUBS { 22. 4. 1. 33. 4. 2. 44. 4. 3. 55. 4. 4. }
In the above simple demonstration, ENDSUB returns 4 (no. of elements) for each element, while
NSUB returns each element's position (1, 2, 3, or 4).
See the entry for DOSUBS for more.
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
ENTRY
Starts the command line below the stack for data entry. It can also change the editor's type of entry as
explained below:
Changes the command line or editor text entry mode to Algebraic (no spaces added), or Program
(spaces added).
Annunciators show only when the header is displayed.
Editor result when inserting a hyphen (minus key) into "AB":
ANNUN. ALPHA SPACES RESULT
Prg off yes "A - B"
Prg on no "A-B"
Alg off no "A-B"
Alg on no "A-B"
INDEX
In ALG mode, command keys take arguments: SIN appears as SIN( ). In PRG mode only the
command name appears.
This also applies inside the editor, although the annunciators don't appear in the header.
Access: RS-ALPHA
EQ
Reserved name for the variable that holds an equation or expression for the plotter or solvers; multiple
equations or expressions should be in a list. EQ is created by the plotter or solvers. There can be an EQ
in each directory.
It will be created when you enter a formula into LS+2D/3D-EQ. See also LS+WIN.
To create it manually:
'expr/eqn' {or list} STEQ
OR
'expr/eqn' {or list} 'EQ' STO
Examples:
'X^2+2*X'
{'A^2-B^2' '2*A^3'}
EQ can be recalled with RCEQ if it exists in the current dir.
Plots: each side of an equation is plotted separately; ie, for 'X^2=5'; it will plot X^2 and then 5. 'X^2-5'
is the preferred form.
See also Plots, STEQ.
Access: LS+2D/3D,
LS+WIN,
STEQ (CAT) or type in
EQ
Returns split equation.
'A+5=B' 'A+5' 'B'
Returns 0 if it errors; otherwise the same as OBJ DROP2. EXLR is similar (CAT).
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT
INDEX
EQLIB Equation Library
The HP48 Equation Library was removed from the HP49G and then
came back as separate libraries in OS v2.09 (available from the 49G+
or 50G sections of www.hp.com/calculators/ or from hpcalc.org). It
should appear in the list when you press APPS.
Installing: (if needed) If it isn't built-in, install by transferring libraries 226 and 227 to the Home dir
(or SD card) and then use FILES to move them to port 1 or 2. Do an ON+C warmstart and "Equation
Library" will appear in the APPS box.
Press this and then EQLIB, EQNLI. You can also enter 114 MENU or use the EQNLIB command
(CAT, program, or typed in).
Basic Operation
At the main menu, you can select SI or English units, or no units. These appear with VARS-NXT.
An annoyance: the QUIT and EXIT keys are where you expect to find OK. Use ENTER to run the
selected item.
SOLV: uses the Multiple Equation Solver. See the SOLVR entry for details. In short, enter a value and
press its unit key. To solve for an unknown, press LS-varname.
EQN/NXEQ: displays the equations. NXEQ appears after EQN if there's more than one equation.
VARS: displays all the vars in the eqn(s). If units were selected at the main menu, the NXT key toggles
them.
PIC: displays a picture if there is one.
STK: sends the eqn list to the stack.
EXIT: returns to previous menu.
PICT Tip: A useful aid: if the selected item has a picture, press PIC and then PICT (which will
appear when any pic is displayed). The pic can be viewed at any time during stack calculations by
pressing the left cursor.
See also SOLVEQN for extracting and solving equations.
Access: APPS-Equation Library, then EQLIB, EQNLI
114 MENU,
EQNLIB command
INDEX
=/== (equals)
The keyboard = is used in equations in the usual way:
'x=5' 'a+b=42'
It's also used as "equate" and makes an equation from two algebraics:
'X' 'Y+2' 'X=Y+2'
Access: RS-W
The double == is used in programming as the usual "equals". IF X 5 == reads "If X equals 5". See
also SAME.
Also used for testing equality:
obj1 obj2 0/1
Access: PROG-TEST,
alpha-RS-W twice
EQW
The Equation Writer makes it easy to enter a complicated algebraic formula. Editing that formula,
however, is often easier with ASCII text (EDIT in EQW or LS-down arrow from the stack).
OPENING:
You can open the EQW directly by pressing its key. You can also use an algebraic, a global name, or a
complex number on Lev 1:
obj EQW HIST ECHO
OR
obj EQW (typed in or CAT)
Note that pressing EQW and typing it in are not the same thing.
If the object is a variable name, pressing EVAL replaces it with its contents.
If the object is on other than Lev 1, HIST allows cursoring to it.
If the command EQW is used in a program, it will open with any valid object on Lev1 (and errors with
Too Few Arguments otherwise).
INDEX
CURSORS:
The right cursor moves to the next step for entering values.
The right cursor applies highlighting to any or all of the expression. The down cursor undoes the
highlighting a step at a time. To apply an operator to the entire expression, highlight all of it with the
right cursor.
CUSTOM COMMANDS:
You can use custom commands in EQW - see STARTEQW. Your choice of commands appears when
you press the CUSTOM key.
UNITS:
Currently (ROM v2.09), the EQW does not support units.
KEY ACTIONS:
Some of the EQW keys behave differently from stack mode:
Y^X inserts superscript in the EQW and the ^ symbol in Edit.

inserts the sigma symbol; for the syntax, see the entry for Sigma (

).
Other math keys insert the corresponding symbols.
INTEGRALS:
inserts the integral sign and the closing d. The sequence is below ( = right cursor):
lower limit upper limit integrand variable of integration
Example: The indefinite integral of X^2:
0 X X^2 X ENTER
EVAL or SIMPLIFY returns 'X^3/3'.
The ASCII form is ' (0,X,X^2,X)' ( (lower, upper, integrand, variable of integration)).
DERIVATIVES:
starts the derivative notation; eg, the derivative of X with respect to t:

t X

t
( X )

In ASCII this will be 't(X)'. You can also enter X(X).
INDEX
DESOLVE: When writing an equation for the DESOLVE command (LS-S.SLV), the syntax for the
first derivative is:
'd1X(t)=expr' 'X(t)'
and the second derivative is:
'd1d1X(t)=expr 'X(t)
Example: 'd1Y(X)=X'
'Y(X)' 'Y(X)=SQ(X)/2+cC0'
where cC0 is the arbitrary constant. DESOLVE integrates both sides to solve ODEs.
See the entry for Derivative ().
COMB/PERM:
For combinations and permutations of the form m things taken n at a time, enter m, press COMB or
PERM (from MTH-PROB), then n. If desired, press the right cursor to highlight the expression and
EVAL or NUM to convert it to a number. If on the stack, convert this algebraic to a number with
EVAL or NUM.
LISTS,ARRAYS,UNITS:
Some functions, such as lists, arrays, and units are currently not supported in the EQW.
CUT/PASTE:
Copy, Cut, and Paste work as usual, though cursor highlighting is used instead of Begin/End.
CURS:
The CURS softkey allows rapid cursoring to any part of the expression; press Enter to return to editing
with that part highlighted. Enter returns to the stack; ON abandons any changes.
To use the EVAL, FACTOR, or SIMPLIFY softkeys, first highlight the desired term(s).
Access: EQW(49G),
RS-EQW(49G+/50G),
Type in (not the same - see above)
ERASE
Erases the graphic in PICT. There is no confirm and no undo.
To save the graphic first, use the graphics editor EDIT-NXT-NXT-PICT to put a copy on the stack.
Access: WIN, LS+2D/3D,
81 MENU,
graphics EDIT-NXT
INDEX
ERR0
Clears error number and error message. Next ERRN returns #0h and next ERRM returns "".
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-ERROR
ERRM
Returns last error message.
"message string"
It can be used anywhere in programs to specify a particular error; use it as many times as needed:
IFERR <procedure> THEN ERRM END
For changing messages to the header or controlling display time, see STARTERR. For writing your
own error message, see DOERR.
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-ERROR
ERRN
Returns number of last error message.
# n
Error numbers are user binaries in the current base. Most of the common ones start at # 201h.
Given the error number, the message can be found with DOERR:
errn "error message"
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-ERROR
EVAL
Evaluates an object.
<< pgm >> runs program
'pgmname' runs program
'globalname' contents of global variable
{a b c} 'a' 'b' 'c'
{1 2 3} 1 2 3
'2*3' 6
INDEX
An algebraic expression whose symbols have stored values (global or local) will have its symbols
replaced by the stored values. If 'x' contains 3 and 'y' contains 2, then
'x+y' 5
Some expressions are simplified:
ABS(-5) 5.
'1/(SQ(X-2)+1)' '1/(X^2-4*X+5)'
Lists will be split into elements in the same way as OBJ but without the number of elements
appearing on the stack. One difference is that programs in a list will run.
Strings, arrays, and numbers are not affected (unless numbers are in algebraic form: '2*3' 6).
EVAL works only on the outside of composite objects; eg, if you eval this program
<< 2 << 3 4 + >> >>
the stack will contain:
2
<< 3 4 + >>
To place a program name on the stack without evaluation, use quotes: 'MYPROG'
To place a command, etc, on the stack without evaluation, you can use lists or tags:
{SIN}
::SIN
::MYPROG
With tags, only a single colon will appear on the stack.
A program with large algebraics to be EVALed may be very slow due to EVAL's CAS extensions.
Using stack operations instead will be faster.
Access: RS-P (49G),
EVAL (49G+/50G)
EXACT mode
Exact and approximate modes are toggled with MODE-CAS or RS+ENTER. The annunciator in the
header is = for Exact and ~ for Approximate.
In Exact mode with Symbolic mode (flags -2,-3 clear), operations result in exact results (such as 5/3). If
flags -2,-3 are set for Numeric mode, results will be approximate decimals (such as 1.6666).
INDEX
Exact/Numeric is a good general-purpose setting for the calc.
In Exact mode, numbers entered from the keyboard appear on the stack as integers (if you don't enter a
decimal fraction). In Approx mode, numbers will be reals with an added decimal point.
While Exact mode is best for the CAS, Approx is preferred for complex inputs.
Approximate mode uses numerical results in calculations. Exact mode and CAS produce a symbolic
result in algebraic calculations.
If you're solving a symbolic expression that requires the approximate mode, the calc will usually switch
automatically - it will ask first, and saying no will cancel the operation. If flag -123 is set, auto mode
switching is prevented.
Access: MODE-CAS,
RS+ENTER
EXITED
If this variable contains a program in the Home dir, it will automatically reset the edit mode as desired
on exit. A typical usage:
<< 2 HEADER -73 CF >>
This restores the header if it's been changed and resets the editor to the current font.
Sometimes this doesn't always work if you exit with ON, depending on the OS version - it sometimes
leaves 'EXITED' on the stack. Press EVAL to run it if this happens.
See also STARTED.
Access: type in
EXP
The algebraic expression equivalent of exponential notation:
'EXP(X)' = e^X
The program << 1 EXP >> returns 2.71828182846 when EVALed.
Access: LS-Q
INDEX
EXPAN/EXPAND
Expands and simplifies algebraic or numeric expressions. For EXPAND, flags -2 and -3 should be
clear for symbolic mode. EXPAN works in either mode.
expr newformat
'(X+1)^2' 'X^2+2*X+1'
Access: ALG,
SYMB-ALG,
93 MENU (EXPAN)
EXPFIT
Stores EXPFIT in

PAR for exponential fitting by LR. Creates

PAR if required.
Access: 96 MENU-

PAR-MODL
EXPM
Returns e^x-1 (ie, (e^x)-1).
x e^x-1
Access: MTH-HYP-NXT,
LS-8
EYEPT
Eyepoint in 3D plots.
x y z
Real numbers that appear in LS+WIN as XE, YE, and ZE and are stored in VPAR (see also the entry
for this). YE must be 1 unit less than Ynear of YVOL.
Access: LS+WIN,
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
FACT
Factorial - same as ! in MTH-PROB.
n n!
Access: CAT
INDEX
factorial (!)
Factorial - same as FACT from CAT. Expression syntax is 'n!'.
n n!
5 120

Access: MTH-NXT-PROB
FANNING
Returns the Fanning fluid friction factor.
Xx/D YRe XFanning
Access: 117 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
FAST3D
Sets plot type in PPAR (spelled Fast3D in LS+2D/3D). EQ should contain an expression in two
variables (typically X and Y). It creates the 3D variable VPAR as required.

The plot can be rotated around the X-axis with the up/down cursor keys and around the Y-axis with the
left-right keys.
If you press TRACE, the cursor can be stepped around the image with the cursor keys while the
coordinates appear in the upper left.
The View Volume and steps can be set with LS+WIN. To return to the defaults, press NXT-RESET-
Reset All.
'2*X^2+Y^2-2' gives an example. Place it on the stack and type STEQ. Type or select FAST3D.
Press LS+2D/3D and DRAW.
See also DRAW3DMATRIX.
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
Access: CAT,
LS+2D/3D-Type
INDEX
FFT
1- or 2-dim. FFT of an array. Number of terms must be a power of 2.
array1 array2
Access: MTH-NXT-FFT
FILES/FILER
Opens the file manager with LS-G or the FILER command (CAT or typed in).
SLOW SD CARD
Note that the filer can take a very long time opening the SD card menu. It depends on the size of the
card and, especially, the number of files. You can speed it up considerably by using a cardreader to
move files into a few folders.
NAVIGATING
The right cursor displays the contents of a highlighted dir or the menu(s) of a highlighted library. The
left cursor steps back to the previous screen (The UPDIR key (LS-VAR) is the same as the left cursor).
The TREE key returns to the Filer's root dir. HPDIRs on the SD card cannot be opened.
SEARCHING
Press the alpha key twice - it will say "Search Mode On". Press one or more alphabet keys. To exit
Search, press the alpha key again. (Flag -60 doesn't affect this.)
CASE SENSITIVITY
Files (varnames) made on the calculator (Home dir and subdirs, ports 0, 1, 2 ) are case sensitive. Files
on the SD card (port 3) are not.
CHDIR
Select the desired dir with the up/down cursor keys and press CHDIR. The filer will exit to that dir.
FORMATTING
Newer ROM versions such as v2.09 have a formatting command for the SD card. Cards less than
32MB are formatted to FAT (actually FAT12 or FAT16). 32MB or larger are formatted to FAT32.
The fastest turn-on and file operations are with the smallest card that suits your needs - 8MB to
32MB recommended (although perhaps hard to find).
MULTIPLE FILES
Multiple files can be selected (or deselected) by pressing ENTER or the +/- key. Movement up or
down will be the same as the last time the cursor was moved.
CURSORS
Besides the obvious up/down, the right cursor displays the contents of the selected dir or port; the left
cursor returns to the previous screen.
INDEX
MEMORY (lack of)
The Filer sometimes returns odd "Insufficient memory" errors when copying to the flash ROM. This is
because the memory is in 128K blocks that need to be defragmented. Free up the required memory in
the Home dirs for the defragger and try again. See the entry for MEMORY basics for more on this.
The following commands are available once a port or dir is selected:
VIEW:
Uses the SCROLL viewer for port objects. It sometimes fails for large objects, especially those on the
SD card, but will return to the filer after a long pause. It might say "Insufficient Memory".
If flag 81 is clear, VIEW will display algebraics with the current font. If it's set, it uses the
minifont.
To view the filenames in the SD card's DIRs, highlight the DIR and press the right cursor. The
left cursor returns. HPDIRs cannot be opened.
EDIT:
This appears only in the Home dir and its subdirs (OS v2.09 or later). EDITB can be used for viewing
objects in Port 2 flash or the SD card, but it will not save changes to these two ports. EDIT/EDITB
may be very slow when run from the filer with large objects.
COPY:
Copies selected object(s) to any other dir or port. Asks for confirmation if the file already exists.
MOVE:
Copies the selected object(s); deletes from the source dir or port. Asks for confirmation if the file
already exists.
RCL:
Copies highlighted object to the stack (so does the RCL key).
EVAL:
Copies highlighted object to the stack (so does the EVAL key). Programs will run.
TREE:
Displays the ports and dirs; ie, returns to the root display.
PURGE:
Deletes objects, dirs. If flag -76 is clear, asks for confirmation. Can do mass purging if files are tagged
with the Enter key. Cannot purge SD card dirs made with a card reader - these are labelled DIR rather
than HPDIR.
RENAME:
Opens an editor to allow renaming a dir or object - Home dirs only. It doesn't work in ports 1-3 (OS
v2.09 or earlier).
NEW:
Allows copying an existing object to a new name, or creating a new, empty dir. With new dirs,
leave the "Object" field empty.
INDEX
ORDER:
Select any or all objects in a directory (not a port) with ENTER in the preferred display order -
ORDER will then rearrange them. Changes to both Filer and the dir's var order remain after exiting -
use SORT (see below) for temporary ordering.
SEND:
Transfers selected object(s) using Kermit and the settings from 104 MENU or APPS-I/O- Transfer. See
also Transferring.
RECV:
Receives transfer using Kermit. Objects are stored in the current dir. See also TRANSFERRING.
HALT:
Returns to the stack. CONT returns to the Filer.
EDITB:
Uses the best editor for the selected object. It often fails for large objects and SD card files, but will
return to the filer after a long pause.
HEADER:
Switches the header display from free memory to the name of the current dir or port. The MODE key
does the same.
LIST:
Toggles the listing of object type and size on and off. The VAR key does the same.
SORT:
Opens a choose box for the type of sort. "INV." means descending order. The sort is only for the current
session - ORDER can make changes permanent if in a dir.
XSEND:
Transfers selected object using Xmodem. Multiple objects can be sent if the receiver is in server mode.
CHDIR:
Changes to the selected dir and exits.
Access: LS-G,
FILER (CAT or typed in)
FINANCE Solver
This computes basic loans, investments and mortgages using an INFORM-style window (for the
softkey version, see TVM).
The variables are:
INDEX
N - # of monthly payments
I%YR - interest in %/year (ie, 4.5% is 4.5, not .045)
PV - present value; principal
PMT - monthly payment
PYR - payments/yr (typ. 12)
FV - future value
PMTs are negative for withdrawals or pmts against a loan; a positive value indicates extra money being
deposited per period.
By default the interest is calculated at the end of the period. To change this, use the Beg/End
field or flag -14. It can also be set from the stack with 79 MENU-BEG.
(All values are stored in the current dir when you exit, and must be deleted manually.)
Example of short-term investment: $18000 is invested for 5 years at 4.5% annual interest. Find the
amount that can be withdrawn monthly to make the future value zero. Find the total gain.
Enter the values. If you need to do any calculating, highlight the desired field and press NXT-CALC.
When you press OK, the Lev1 value is copied to the field. Press NXT again. (Note that CALC wants
reals, not integers, but you can ignore the error message.)
N - 60 (ie, 5*12)
I%YR- 4.5
PV - 18000
PMT - ignore
PYR - 12 (the default)
FV - 0
Highlight PMT and press SOLVE to see the value -335.57 (this is tagged and placed on the stack - if
you press +/-, the tag and minus sign will be removed).
The gain is 335.57*60 = 20134.20.
Using AMOR: a $150,000 mortgage is to be paid off in 25 years at 6%. Find the monthly pmt, and the
status of the mortgage after 5 years.
Enter values as shown above (years should be in months) and solve for PMT - 966.45.
Status: Press AMOR and enter 60 into Payments. Press AMOR to get:
:Principal: -15101.87
:Interest: -42885.26
:Balance: 134898.13
Unfortunately, you can't enter dollar amounts into AMOR to find Payments, but it's easy to try various
Payments to get near the desired value.
Access: LS-9
INDEX
FINDALARM
Returns index of first alarm due after specified date.
mm.ddyyyy n (flag -42 clear)
Access: TIME-TOOLS-ALRM
FINISH
Terminates remote Kermit server.
Access: 104 MENU-SRVR
FLAGS - list of flags
See also RCLF, STOF and Mode-Flag menu entries.
Flag tools: LS+MODE-FLAG or PRG-MODES-FLAG
Flag Toggle
A program that toggles any flag on and off, where -n is the flag number (substitute the number before
running the program):
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -n FS? IF THEN -n CF ELSE
-n SF END \>>
USER FLAGS:
User flags have positive numbers from 1 to 128. Note that flags 60 and 61 are reserved for system use
in controlling constants (see the entry for CONST ). User flags are only for user-set indicators and do
not affect the system. They can be set, cleared and tested like system flags.
RESET:
MODE-NXT-RESET resets the flags to their default state (algebraic mode, etc). To reset the calc to
your preference, store the flaglist from RCLF in a program such as 'MYFLAGS':
<< {flaglist} STOF >>
Since flag states are not stored by ARCHIVE, this can be used after a RESTORE.
PUSH/POP
In programmimg you can alter the flags without affecting the current settings - PUSH stores the flags
and paths; POP restores them. See Programming basics.
INDEX
MAIN FLAGLIST:
Please note that HP information about flags above 64 is often wrong or missing. The definitions below
are as accurate as circumstances allow.
MASD in the flaglist refers to the built-in compiler, called ASM in 256 menu. It can compile either
SysRPL code (flag 92 set) or machine code (flag 92 clear).
Note that some of the system flags do not appear in the MODE-FLAGS browser.
Upper-case C (clear) or S (set) indicates the default setting. Note that the defaults may vary with the
ROM version.
1s: Symbolics yield principal solutions
1C: Symbolics yield general solutions
General solutions return all possible results. In plots, use general solutions if only half a
graphics plot appears.
2s: Symbolic constants eval to numbers
2C: Symbolic constants remain constants if flag -3 is clear
3s: Symbolic args eval to numbers
3C: Symbolic args remain symbolic
User-assigned keys can select Symbolic mode ({-2 -3} CF) or Numeric mode ({-2 -3} SF).
See the entry for Numerical/Symbolic for a single-key flag toggle.
4: Unused
5-10: set binary wordsize from 1 to 64 bits. 5 is bit one (clear= 0, set=1), 10 is bit six. Add one to the
result to get the wordsize (default 64, all flags set). See STWS.
11-12 BASE
11c,12c: DECimal base
11c,12s: BINary base
11s,12c: OCTal base
11S,12S: HEXadecimal base
13: unused
14s: TVM beginning of period
14C: TVM end of period
All system flags are actually negative numbers. Positive numbers are user flags.
INDEX
TVMEND will clear this flag; TVMBEG will set it.
15s: Spherical coord mode
15C: Cylindrical (polar) (if flag -16 set)
16s: Polar coordinate mode
16C: Rectangular coordinate mode
See also RECT, CYLIN.

17S: radians
17c,18C: degrees
17c,18s: grads
Same as RAD, DEG, and GRAD commands.
19s: V2 produces complex number
19C: V2 produces 2D vector
See CYLIN for an example of using V2. See also Arrays/vectors, V,V2,V3
20s: Underflow error
20C: Underflow 0 and sets flag -23 or -24
Underflow means that the calculation returned a negative non-zero result less than -MINR.
21s: Overflow error
21C: Overflow +/- MAXR and sets flag -25
Overflow means that the calculation returned a positive non-zero result greater than MAXR.
22s: Infinite result +/- MAXR and sets flag -26
22C: Infinite result error
23s: Negative underflow if flag -20 is clear
23C: No negative underflow
24s: Positive underflow if flag -20 is clear
24C: No positive underflow
25s: Overflow if flag 21 clear
25C: No overflow
26s: Infinite result if flag -22 is set
26C: No infinite result
The corresponding flag (-23 through -26) is set only if it is not treated as an error.
INDEX
27S: Algebraic complex 'x+yi'
27c: Algebraic complex '(x,y)'
See the entry for i.
28C: Sequential plot of multiple equations
28s: Simultaneous plot of multiple equations
29s: No plot axes
29C: Draw plot axes
Same as the DRAX command.
30: unused
31s: No plot points connected
31C: Connect plot points
32s: Inverse graphics cursor
32C: Graphics cursor always black
33s: Transfer via IR port
33C: Transfer via wire
Leave cleared on HP49G; see flag -78 for HP50G USB.
34s: Print via wire
34C: Print via I/R
Leave set on HP49G; see flag -78
for HP50G USB.
35s: Kermit transmits in binary
35C: Kermit transmits in ASCII
36s: Received files overwrite
36C: Received files change name
Mainly affects Kermit commands.
37s: Double-spaced printing
37C: Single-spaced printing
38s: No linefeed added to print
38C: Linefeed added to print
INDEX
39s: No I/O messages
39C: I/O messages
Mainly affects Kermit commands.
40s: Clock in header
40C: No clock
41s: 24hr clock
41C: 12hr clock
42s: DD.MM.YY date
42C: MM/DD/YY date
43s: Unacknowledged repeat alarms are not rescheduled
43C: Unacknowledged repeat alarms are rescheduled
44s: Acknowledged alarms retained
44C: Acknowledged alarms deleted
45-48: no. of dec. digits in FIX, SCI, ENG modes. 45 is bit 1, 46 is 2, 47 is 4, and 48 is 8. The binary
nibble gives the number of decimal digits, max. 11.
49C,50C: STD mode
49s,50c: FIX
49c,50s: SCI
49s,50s: ENG
51s: Fraction mark is a comma
51C: Fraction mark is a period
52s: Obj displayed on single line
52C: Obj displayed on many lines
Flags -52 and -65 must be clear for textbook display (flag -79). With -52 set, textbook is off.
53s: Show all parentheses
53C: Remove extra parentheses
54s: Small matrix values not set to 0 and DET doesn't round
54C: Small matrix values set to 0 and DET rounds
55s: LASTARG disabled
55C: LASTARG enabled
56s: No beep tone
56C: Beep tone enabled
INDEX
57s: No alarm tone
57C: Alarm tone enabled
58s: Param and var INFO disabled
58C: Param and var INFO enabled
eg, 106 MENU shows a MSGBOX; flag -58 set turns this off.
59s: Show varnames only
59C: Show varnames and contents
60s: One press locks Alpha
60C: Two presses lock Alpha
61s: One press locks User
61C: Two presses lock User
62s: User mode on
62C: User mode off
63s: Custom (vectored) ENTER
63C: Normal ENTER
64s: last GETI or PUTI wraps index to 1
64C: no wrap
65s: Only Level1 is multiline
65C: All levels are multiline
Flags -52 and -65 must be clear for textbook display (flag -79) of all levels - with -65 set only
Lev1 is textbook.
66s: Strings with linefeeds are displayed on a single line
66C: Strings with linefeeds are displayed on multiple lines
67s: Analog clock
67C: Digital clock
The analog clock is nearly unusable since it's only updated every 5 minutes.
68s: command line and editor indent same as previous line
68C: no indent
69s: Full-screen editing
69C: Single-line editing
70s: GROB accepts multiline
70C: GROB accepts single-line
INDEX
71s: Labels, not addresses in ASM
71C: Add addresses to commands in ASM
72C: current font for stack numbers
72s: minifont for stack numbers
Flag -72 also affects the size of the stack level numbers.
For character font size, see flag 80. Flag -72 does not affect algebraics (such as 'X^2') but
affects global names (such as 'X').

73s: Cmd line, Edit uses minifont
73C: Cmd line, Edit uses current font
74s: Left-justified stack
74C: Right-justified stack
75s: Keyclick if flag 56 clear
75C: No keyclick
76s: No Purge confirm in FILES/FILER
76C: Purge confirm in FILES/FILER
There is no confirm for the stack PURGE command.
77: internal use
78s: HP50G only - Serial I/O if flag -34 is set
78C: HP50G only - USB I/O if flag -34 is set
79s: Standard algebraic display
79C: Textbook algebraic display
Flag -52 must be clear for textbook display. Also, flag -65 must be clear for textbook display of
all levels.
80C: current stk font
80s: minifont stk font
The flag browser calls it EQW Stk Font. It only controls the stack character font size - the EQW
font is -82. Doesn't seem to affect global names ('X') or stack level numbers. See also flag -72.
81s: algebraic converted to grob using GROB with n=0 uses the minifont
81C: as above, but uses current font
Flag -81 also controls whether the Filer's VIEW uses the current font (clear) or the minifont
(set) for algebraics.
INDEX
82s: EQW uses minifont
82C: EQW uses current font
The flag browser calls it EQW Edit Font. It only controls the main EQW font - the EQW edit
function uses the current font.
83s: display grobs on stack as "Graphic m times n"
83C: display full grob
84s: MASD screen off
84C: MASD screen during compiling
When clear, may provide useful information during ASM.
85s: SysRPL stack display
85C: normal stack display
Normal stack display shows SysRPL objects only as one or more "External".
86s: program prefix off
86C: program prefix on
For SysRPL purposes. This flag is said to auto-attach 256 menu when set and after an ON+C. It
doesn't seem to be necessary.
87s: recursive stack for embedded composite pointers that are unsupported (not in Extable)
87C: non-recursive stack
For SysRPL purposes. Flag -85 should be set.
88 - not used
89 - not used
90S: CHOOSE boxes use minifont
90c: CHOOSE boxes use current font
91s: Matrix Writer uses list of lists
91C: Matrix Writer uses arrays
92s: MASD SysRPL mode
92C: MASD assembler mode
93 - not used
94s: Result of programs such as MTWR or EQW is not in LASTCMD
94C: Result of programs such as MTWR or EQW is in LASTCMD
LASTCMD is actually the CMD window (LS-HIST).
INDEX
95S: Algebraic mode
95c: RPN mode
96: never fully implemented
97s: Lists are vertical
97C: Lists are horizontal
98s: Vectors are vertical
98C: Vectors are horizontal
99s: CAS verbose mode
99C: CAS quiet mode
Computation info appears in the header area
100s: Step by step on
100C: Step by step off
101: internal use
102s: no GCD calculations
102C: GCD calculations allowed
103s: Complex mode
103C: Real mode
LS+TOOL toggles this
104 internal use
105s: Approximate mode
105C: Exact mode
RS+ENTER toggles this
106s: TSIMP not allowed in SERIES
106C: TSIMP allowed in SERIES
107,108: internal use
109s: Numeric factorize
109C: Symbolic factorize
110s: Large matrices
110C: Normal matrices
111s: No recursive simplification in TSIMP, EXPAND
111C: Recursive simplification in TSIMP, EXPAND
INDEX
112s: i is not simplified
112C: i is simplified to SQRT -1
113s: No linear simplify in CAS integration commands
113C: Linear simplify in CAS integration commands
114s: Polynomials in increasing power order
114C: Polynomials in decreasing power order
115s: Square roots are not simplified
115C: Square roots are simplified (as irrational square)
116s: Sine preferred to cosine in CAS simplifying
116C: Cosine preferred to sine in CAS simplifying
117s: Softkey menus (using function keys)
117C: CHOOSE list menus
118s: INT command not simplified
118C: INT command simplified
This flag has no apparent effect on INT. Both INTVX and RISCH clear it if it's set.
119s: Rigorous mode off (|X| is simplified to X)
119C: Rigorous mode on (|X| is not simplified to X)
This particularly affects ABS and the way the SIGN command will plot. 119 should be clear for
general use.
120c: Silent mode off - prompts before mode changes
120S: Silent mode on - no prompts before mode changes
121,122: internal use
123s: No mode switching
123C: Allow mode switching
124s: No non-algebraic CASCOMPEVAL
124C: Non-algebraic CASCOMPEVAL allowed
There is no information available as to what this flag is for. If accidentally set, it returns "Non
algebraic in expression" when the CAS tries to solve. CASCFG clears it.

125s: Fast sign determination. Also cancels SQRT simplification
125C: Accurate sign determination using Sturm sequences
126s: Row reduction (rrf) done without last column
126C: Row reduction (rrf) done with last column
INDEX
127: unused
128s: all vars are reals
128C: Complex vars allowed
User (positive) flags in use:
60s: CONST uses English units
60C: CONST uses SI units
61s: no CONST units
61C: CONST returned with units
FLASHEVAL
Given a flash ROM address as a hex integer, runs built-in commands. Example:
#47002h I/O transfer window
Since a wrong integer can corrupt memory, doublecheck before using.
FLASHEVALs are not addresses of commands (as are SYSEVALs), but bank and function numbers.
(The Getname command of SDIAG won't find them.)
Access: CAT
FLOOR
Nearest whole number the argument. See also CEIL.
5.1 5.
'A' FLOOR(A)
Flags 2 and 3 should be clear for symbolic use.
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
FONT series
FONT returns current system font.
font_obj
FONT sets a new font as the current system font.
font_obj

Fonts can also be changed with the MODE-DISP window.
Fonts other than the minifont can be also be edited with RS-CHARS-MODIF (if other than the default
Font8, install first with MODE- DISP-FONT). See also CHARS.
INDEX
FONTn returns any one of the system fonts 6,7,8 (except the MINIFONT - see its entry). Put 6, 7, or
8 in place of n.
FONTn font_obj
Font changes are reset to the default Font8 by warmstarts. To make a change permanent, recall the new
font to the stack with FONT and store it with a unique name in the Homedir. Add:
varname FONT
to the program in the var STARTUP in the Home dir, or if it doesn't exist, enter:
<< varname FONT >> 'STARTUP' STO
To undo this, edit or delete the STARTUP var.
Access: CAT,
MODE-DISP
FOR-NEXT
For-next and for-step definite loop. See also START.
start end FOR x <procedure> NEXT
OR
start end FOR x <procedure> stepsize STEP

x is the index var (which can be any other var) and counts from start to end - it can be recalled for use
by the program. If this isn't needed, START is somewhat faster.
The numerical value for STEP can be replaced with the name of a stored value, providing external
control.
Typing aids: when the FOR dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-FOR FOR
NEXT
RS-FOR FOR
STEP
The following example displays multiples of /2 (ie, 90 degrees apart in a plot). For symbolic results,
clear flags -2 and -3; for numeric, set both.
<< .5 2 FOR X X * .5 STEP >>
INDEX
Controlling termination: the loop can be stopped when a condition is met, as shown by this example:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< 10 x loop
\<< 1 x
FOR X
IF X loop >
THEN 0 'x' STO
ELSE X
END
NEXT
\>>
\>>
n n_numerals where n = 1 to 10
The program puts 1 to 10 numbers on the stack. Enter a number and run the program. That number of
numerals will appear. Your value is stored in the 'loop' local var. The program will continue to output X
until your number is reached, and then x (the end value) is set to zero to end the loop.
See also LOCAL and Programming basics for more on using variables.
Access: PRG-BRCH
FOURIER
Nth coefficient of complex Fourier expression. The period T of a T-periodic function should be stored
in the variable PERIOD in CASDIR (the default is 2).
Symb1 n coeff
Access: CALC-DERIV
FP
Returns fractional part of real number. See also IP.
5.1 .1
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT
FREE
An obsolete port-management function from the HP48 command set. Not used on the HP49/50.
INDEX
FREEZE
Freezes an area until a keypress.
n

1 freezes lines 1 and 2 of the header (status area)
2 freezes the stack area and command line
4 freezes the menu area

n can be the sum of any of the above numbers. 0 or 7 will freeze all.
The actions of FREEZE depend on the application - some experimenting is required.
Example with DISP:
<< "string" 2 DISP 3 FREEZE >>
Example with PICT and a menu:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< { list of vars } TMENU { # 0h # 0h } PVIEW 3 FREEZE \>>
PICT should contain a plot or graphic for best results.
To display for a fixed number of seconds, replace x FREEZE with s WAIT, where s = seconds.
See STARTERR for a WAIT example.
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT
FUNCTION
Sets the plot type to Function and if necessary, creates PPAR (the list of plot parameters).
This is also the default if no plot type is specified. EQ should contain an expression that's a function of
one variable, default X. Other variables can be included if they have stored values (constants). It then
plots Y=f(X).
See the entry for Plots for more on f(X) and object types.
A simple example that plots a parabola:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< 'X^2' STEQ FUNCTION ERASE
DRAX DRAW PICTURE \>>
INDEX
If a previous plot has set the wrong parameters, either purge PPAR from the stack or press ZOOM-
ZDFLT from the graphics menu.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
82 MENU
F0
Returns the fraction of total black-body emissive power at temp Xt between wavelengths 0 and Y.
Y Xt Xpower
Access: 117 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
Garbage Collection
The operating system must pause from time to time to clear unused objects from memory. This will
suspend whatever you're doing for a few seconds. The GC improves with each OS upgrade and is no
longer much of a problem. See also Pauses.
If necessary, a GC can be forced with
# 5F42h SYSEVAL (also works on the HP48)
MEM DROP in a program will also force a GC.
GET/GETI
Returns element n from array, matrix ({row col}) or list. GETI also returns index of next element and
does not drop original object.
obj n element (GET)
obj n obj index element (GETI)
{ 22 33 44 55 } 3 GET 44
{ 22 33 44 55 } 3 GETI { 22 33 44 55 } 4. 44
For strings, see SREPL.
Access: PRG-LIST-ELEM
INDEX
gmol
A typing aid for user-defined units.
1_mol
55_ 55_gmol
Access: 117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
GOR
Superimposes one grob on another with no changes to target grob. Opposite GXOR, which inverts
coincident pixels.
targetgrob {#m #n} grob1 newgrob
OR
targetgrob (x,y) grob1 newgrob
{#m #n} (or coords (x,y)) is the upper left corner of grob1.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
GRAD
Sets angle measure to grads - the grad is 1/100 of a right angle. 360 degrees is 400 grads. One degree is
approx. 1.1111 grad.
Access: MODE-Angle Measure
GRAPH
Plots the expression(s) in variables Y1, EQ according to the settings in PPAR. Y1 need not exist (see
Y=) . The axes can be toggled on or off with the softkey in LS+2D/3D.
Creates the variable Y1 as required. Similar to DRAX DRAW (axes will be drawn only if they're
selected in 2D/3D).
Access: LS+F3
Graphics menu
Pictures, plots, etc, are called grobs (graphic objects). See also PICT, Plots. Enter the graphics editor
with the left cursor. If a grob is on the stack, you can edit it by pressing the down cursor (EDITB).
Note that not all plot types have all the following menu items.
INDEX
Shortcut Keys:
* (times key) places a mark at the cursor
- toggles menu off and on
+ toggles coordinate display
ENTER places cursor position coordinates on the stack
ON exits (left-cursor returns)
RS-cursors jump to screen edge
LS-down displays current eqn
LS-left toggles menu/cursor
RS-CLEAR erases screen
Any function key restores the softkey menu
ZOOM Menu:
Note that not all plot types have the zoom function.
ZFACT
Sets V and H zoom factors (4 is the default, and 2 works well).
Also allows centering of the display at the cursor after a zoom.
One way to restore the normal display is to remove the checkmark from ZFACT and press ZDFLT.
BOXZ
Draws zoom box starting with a corner at the cursor position - choose this corner first with the cursor
keys, press BOXZ, choose the other corner, and then press ZOOM
ZIN/ZOUT
Zooms in or out by factors in ZFACT
ZSQR
Redraws with equal V and H tick values (undoes a V or H zoom)
ZDFLT
Redraws with PPAR reset to default values
HZIN/HZOUT
Zoom the horizontal axis in or out by the H-factor in ZFACT
VZIN/VZOUT
Zoom the vertical axis in or out by the V-factor in ZFACT
CENTR
Redraws to place the plot center at the cursor position. The origin remains (0,0)
INDEX
ZAUTO
Zooms and relocates the origin to display the largest image of the current equation
ZDECI
Redraws with the default X-tick value of 1 (0.1 per pixel)
ZINT
Redraws with the X-tick value of 1 per pixel (10 per tick)
ZTRIG
Redraws with the X-tick value of /2 per tick
ZLAST
Redraws with the values of the previous image (stored in ZPAR and PPAR)
(X,Y)
Displays cursor coordinates at the bottom of the screen. Any function key (or the - key) restores the
menu
TRACE
L-R cursors move along function; Up-Dn cursors select other functions, if any
FCN menu: (Function plots only)
Calculated results are also tagged and placed on the stack
ROOT
Jumps to and displays value of root of current equation; for multiple roots, jumps to root closest to
cursor
ISECT
Jumps to X intercept closest to cursor

SLOPE
Returns the slope of the current function at the cursor
AREA
Finds the area under the function between the mark and the cursor. Also writes IERR to the current dir
SHADE
Shades the area under the function between the mark and the cursor
EXTR
Jumps to and displays value of extremum nearest the cursor
F(X)
Finds value of current function for X value of cursor
INDEX
F'
Finds and plots the derivative of the current function and appends it to EQ
TANL
Plots tangent line at the cursor position on the function and displays its equation. If you get an error
message, the cursor probably wasn't exactly on the function - move the cursor to the desired X value
and use TRACE and up-arrow to move it to the plotted line
NXEQ
Displays next equation for multiple equations in EQ
VIEW
Displays current equation in upper left
EDIT menu:
DOT+/-
Turns pixels on or off under the cursor when a white square is showing in the softkey label
LINE
Draws line from mark to cursor
TLINE
As above, but turns off any coincident pixels
BOX
Draws box with opposite corners at mark and cursor
CIRCLE
Draws circle CCW with center at mark and cursor at end of radius
MARK
Sets mark at cursor, same as the * (times) key
+/-
Inverse cursor when white square shows in softkey label
LABEL
Labels axes with default values from PPAR - see AXES and LABEL for user labels
DEL
Deletes area in imaginary box with opposite corners at mark and cursor
ERASE
Erases everything - and there's no Undo. If you press ZOOM-ZLAST it will redraw EQ, but any edits
you made will be lost - see PICT below for saving plots
INDEX
MENU
Turns menu off/on, the same as the - key; any function key also restores it
SUB
Writes a subgrob to the stack, bordered by an imaginary box with the mark and cursor at opposite
corners
REPL
Inserts a subgrob from the stack, with the upper left corner at the cursor
PICT
Writes a copy of the entire screen to the stack as a grob (without the softkey menu - if a menu appears,
it's usually from EDITB; try SCROLL or VIEW in FILES/FILER)
X,Y
Writes cursor coordinates to the stack in the form (x,y), same as the Enter key
GRIDMAP
Sets the plot type to Gridmap and modifies or creates PPAR. EQ should contain a complex expression
in two variables. For example, '(X,Y)' draws a 7 x 9 linear grid with the default settings.
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
The following plots a curved gridmap with default settings.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< RAD { PICT PPAR VPAR } PURGE
GRIDMAP 'SIN((X,Y))' STEQ DRAW
PICTURE \>>
Use LS+WIN to redraw with new values; eg, to decrease the image size slightly, use
X-Left -1.5
X-Right 1.5
Y-Near -1.5
Y-Far 1.5
Detail increases with higher settings of Step Indep and Depnd, but drawing time is longer.
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for free downloading by searching www.hpcalc.org.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type
85 MENU
INDEX
GROB
Converts obj (usually a string or algebraic) to grob (graphic object), where n = 1 (minifont) or 2
(current font).
obj n grob
Algebraics
If n = 0, algebraics will become grobs using the current font if flag 81 is clear, or the minifont if it's set.
HP49/50 manual documentation on flag 81 can be disregarded.
Grob to PICT
To insert the grob into PICT in stack mode, see GOR or GXOR. To insert in graphics mode: the upper
left corner of the grob on Lev1 appears at the cursor position when you press EDIT-NXT- NXT-REPL.
Adding Text to Grob
For axis labels, see LABEL. To add any text to any point on a graphic in PICT, exit the graphic mode
to the stack. Place the text string on the stack, enter 1 for the minifont or 2 for the current font and run
GROB.
Press the left cursor to return to the graphic mode. Move the cursor to where you want the upper left of
the string and press EDIT-NXT-NXT-REPL. It's an imprecise method and some experimenting is
required.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
GROBADD
Merges 2 grobs (stacked vertically - two 131 x 64 = 131 x 128). Grob1 is at the top.
grob1 grob2 grob3
Grob1 will be at the top of Grob3.
Access: CALC-GRAPH
GXOR
Superimposes one grob on another, inverting coincident pixels. Opposite GOR (no changes to target
grob).
targetgrob {#m #n} grob1 newgrob
OR
targetgrob (x,y) grob1 newgrob
{#m #n} (or coords (x,y)) is the upper left corner of grob1.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
INDEX
HALT
Suspends operation when encountered in a program. Suspends editing session and displays stack if
called from Tool menu. Suspends DBUG.
HALT after an IFERR allows Debug to single-step through the program. Press SST to continue past
the halt.
CONT cancels the halt.
See also LOCAL for another usage.
Access: PGM-NXT-NXT-RUN,
Edit mode TOOL-NXT-NXT
HEAD
Returns first element of a string or list. See also TAIL.
"abc" "a"
{ a b c } 'a'
To return any character(s) or element(s), see SUB.
Access: PRG-NXT-CHARS-NXT,
PRG-LIST-ELEM-NXT,
RS+CHARS-NXT
HEADER series
On the HP49G+/50G, the header is a separate screen area, although HEADER still controls the
number of lines displayed.

HEADER returns size of header, where n is the number of lines (0-2).
n
HEADER sets the number of lines displayed (0-2).

n
Access: CAT,
MODE-DISP
INDEX
Helptext (in pgms)
Help text can be inserted into programs in various ways:
1. Comments: although sourcecode comments using @ are removed, you can insert text strings
followed by DROP.
2. IFERR: use the error loop to put a reminder string on the stack (if the program errors without
arguments).
<< IFERR < program > THEN "Helptext" END >>

3. Doubleclick: the following runs a program normally on one click, but puts helptext on the stack if
the name is doubleclicked.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< .3 WAIT KEY
\<< DROP "Helptext"
\>>
\<< "main program"
\>> IFTE
\>>
Some experimenting might be required with the .3 value depending on the calculator or emulator
speed. It works well on the HP49G+/50G.
Hidden dir
The hidden directory in the Home dir is used by the operating system to store the key assignments and
alarms. It's also used by programs to store counters, data, etc. It has a nullname ('') and since it isn't in
the path, its variables can't be recalled from other dirs.
To see it, type
# 3714Ah SYSEVAL (49/50 series only!)
Use caution - the wrong SYSEVAL can corrupt memory. Don't change any system vars - you can add
or delete other vars as in any dir.
Another way is to use a nullname:
"" S~N '' EVAL
See 256 MENU for the S~N (symbolic-name toggle) command.
Since the hidden dir is not in the path, programs in other dirs will not run.
To leave it, press UPDIR.
INDEX
HIST
Allows returning to the stack from within a program to retrieve any object from any level. Select the
desired object and Echo inserts a copy at the cursor.
Use ON or Enter to leave HIST mode if Echo doesn't cancel it.
In stack mode, it will echo any level to the command line, and provides a number of stack commands,
such as Edit, Roll and Keep. (See the entry for Stack Commands - Interactive Stack.)
You can also copy to the clipboard. Cursor to the object and press RS-COPY.
The stack is not available for calculating in HIST. In edit mode use the TOOL menu's HALT for this,
or CALC if it appears in a function's softkey menu.
Access: HIST key
HISTOGRAM
Sets the plot type to Histogram and modifies or creates PPAR, PAR. DAT should contain a one-
column matrix. It displays the number of occurrences vertically and the magnitude according to
horizontal position. See also Plots for more on general plotting.
The following plots a sequence of random numbers between 1 and 10:
Store as DAT (you can use STO from CAT):
[[ 4.5 ]
[ 2.35 ]
[ 2.78 ]
[ 6.61 ]
[ 1.73 ]
[ 7.89 ]
[ 9.01 ]
[ 8.05 ]
[ 1.86 ]
[ .68 ]]
Press LS+2D/3D and select Histogram as the Type.
Press LS+WIN and press Auto, Erase, and Draw.
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for free downloading by searching www.hpcalc.org.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
88 MENU
INDEX
HISTPLOT
A CAT command that executes a HISTOGRAM plot. The variable DAT must exist in the current dir.
The plot does not remain on the screen - press PICTURE (left cursor) to return to it.
HMS series
See also for more on working with degrees.
HMS: decimal hours/degrees to hh.mmss format.
HMS: hh.mmss format to decimal.
HMS+: adds 2 hh.mmss.
HMS: subtracts 2 hh.mmss. The earlier time should be on Lev 1 to avoid negatives.
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS-NXT,
RS+TIME-NXT,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME-NXT
i
Returns the square root of -1.
i (symbolic mode)
(0.,1.) (numeric mode)
Flags -2,-3 set is numeric mode; clear is symbolic. Complex mode should be on (flag -103 set).
To make symbolics into a complex number in programming (flag -27 clear):
'symb1' 'symb2' i * + (symb1,symb2)
'X^2' 'Y' i * + (X^2,Y)
Access: LS-TOOL,
CMPLX
IDN
Creates identity matrix n by n.
n
3 [[ 1 0 0 ]
[ 0 1 0 ]
[ 0 0 1 ]]
Access: MATRICES-CREAT
INDEX
IF-THEN
Starts If-Then or If-Then-Else conditionals.
IF <test> THEN <procedure> END
OR
IF <test> THEN <proc1> ELSE <proc2> END
If test is non-zero, procedure or proc1 is evaluated. If test is 0 and the ELSE clause is present, proc2 is
evaluated. The result of the test is always dropped.
The test can precede the IF command:
<test> IF THEN <proc> END
As long as there's a non-zero number on Lev1, THEN will run the procedure (IF is really only included
for readability).
Typing aids: when the IF dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-IF IF
THEN
END
RS-IF IF
THEN
ELSE
END
The example below finds the number of items on the stack and displays it if 1, or if 0 it displays
"Empty stack".
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< IF DEPTH DUP 0 \=/
THEN R\->I \->STR " Item(s)" +
ELSE DROP "Empty stack"
END \>>
See also AND and OR operators.
See also IFT and IFTE for more compact forms, and FOR-NEXT for an IF-THEN example.
Access: PRG-BRCH
INDEX
IFERR
An error in a program (or section of program) enclosed by IFERR runs procedure; if no error and ELSE
is present, runs proc2.
IFERR <program> THEN <procedure> END
OR
IFERR <program> THEN <procedure> ELSE <proc2> END
Since flag -55 (Save Last Args) affects the return of objects to the stack, it should be clear when using
IFERR.
The error procedure can be as simple or as complex as desired. The minimum is IFERR <pgm>
THEN END, which suppresses error messages.
IFERR is useful for clean exits; ie, removing unwanted objects from the stack after a cancel.
IFERR "" "" INPUT THEN DROP2 END
The above converts any input to a string for further processing. If cancelled, the two null strings are
dropped.
See also Helptext (in pgms) for adding usage reminders to a program.
IFERRs can be nested:
IFERR <pgm section 1> IFERR <pgm section 2> THEN <proc2> END
THEN <proc1> END
When single-stepping a program, DBUG executes IFERRs as a single step. To avoid this, follow each
IFERR with HALT. Remove when done.
Error-handling can be user-invoked - see DOERR.
Access: PGM-NXT-NXT-ERROR-IFERR
IFFT
1- or 2-dim. inverse discrete FFT of an array. Number of terms must be a power of 2.
[array1] [array2]
Access: MTH-NXT-FFT
INDEX
IFT
A compact IF-THEN branching test. Evaluates obj if test is non-zero; otherwise drops both.
test obj result

<< MEM 50000 "OK" IFT >> EVAL

The simple example checks to see if there is at least 50000 bytes of free memory. If so, the string is put
on the stack. If not, there is no output. See also NOT for another use.
There is no algebraic syntax - see IFTE below.
Access: PRG-BRCH-NXT
IFTE
A compact IF-THEN-ELSE branching test. Evaluates obj1 if test is non-zero, else evaluates obj2.
test obj1 obj2 result
Algebraic syntax is:
'IFTE(test,obj1,obj2)'
'IFTE(X>0,X^2,1)'
The example reads "If X is greater than zero, then return X^2, else return one." (Plot it as a Function to
see the effect.)
The example from IFT expanded:
<< MEM 50000 "OK" "<50K memory" IFTE >>
If mem is below 50000, the second string is put on the stack.
See the end of the Helptext (in pgms) for another example.
Access: PRG-BRCH-NXT
IM
Returns imaginary part of complex number. For the real part, see RE.
(1., 2.) 2.
Access: CMPLX,
MTH-NXT-CMPLX
INDEX
INCR (Increment)
Adds 1 to contents of named local or global var; returns new contents. The var should contain a real or
integer. See also DECR (Decrement).
'name' newval

Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH
INDEP
Specifies the independent var for plotting and/or its plot range. See also PPAR, XRNG, WIN.
'name'
{n m}
{'name' n m}
{ 'X' -10 10 }
The LS+2D/3D field can only change the name. The others are stack commands, although you can set
the range with LS+WIN's H-View.
Access: LS+2D/3D,
81 MENU-PPAR
Infinity ()
Returns the + infinity symbol in symbolic mode (flag -3 clear and Exact mode selected) or
9.99999999999E499 in numeric mode (flag -3 set). Set to - with the +/- key (or NEG in program).
See also MAXR. The infinity symbol in the minifont is somewhat strange due to the low res.
Access: LS-0
INFORM
Inform dialog box.
"maintitle" ("" for none)
{ {"fieldtitle1" "helptext"
TYPEs} ...{ etc } }
{format}
{reset values - can be empty}
{default values - can be empty}
{list of values} 1.
Returns 0. if cancelled.
INDEX
Format is { cols tabs }. Columns is the number of fields across. Tabs controls the spacing between
the name and the field, and can be omitted. If you have only one column, the list can be empty.
Note that INFORM allows only four rows in UserRPL.
In reset and default lists, use NOVALs if there are no values and you don't want to leave them empty -
INFORM will often put NOVALS on the stack from empty lists.
Type numbers allow only desired objects to be entered - see the entry for TYPE. Typical use:

{"fieldtitle" "help" 2 5 }
The field now accepts only strings and lists.
Note that there are differences from the HP48. Some Types may behave unexpectedly (eg, Type 28
(integer) is not accepted in the list, although the fields themselves accept integers).
To increase the width of a field, put an empty list after it:
{"title" "help" TYPEs} {}
If you do this, there must be at least two columns in the Format list.
To reset any or all of Inform's field values to those in the Reset list, press NXT, RESET.
Note that the checkmark feature is not available in UsrRPL. It requires a SysRPL system program.
EXAMPLE INFORM
The following shows the basic features. Note that expression's field is full-width and allows both
algebraics and names. The output is the four-element list {11. 22. X 0.} and 1., or 0. if cancelled.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< "INFORM Example" { { "a:" "Enter real for a" 0 } { "b:" "Enter real for b" 0 } {"expr:" "Enter
algebraic" 6 9 }{ } { "Plot?" "Draw Graph? 1=Yes 0=No" 0 } } {2. 2. } { 11. 22. X 0. } { 11. 22. X 0. }
INFORM
\>>
LOOPING INFORM
The program below opens with the vars that were last used. It does this by making an external var
(called LST1) in the current dir. It contains a four-element list. The INFORM section is in a list so the
PUT command can overwrite the default values list with any existing values from LST1.
The actual calculating does nothing but add the inputs. Enter any numbers and press OK. These will be
displayed the next time you run the program.
You can reset the values to zero by deleting LST1, or by pressing NXT-RESET-Reset_all from inside
the program.
INDEX
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR -55. CF IFERR 'LST1' RCL THEN { 0. 0. 0. 0. }
DUP 3. ROLLD SWAP STO
END
{ "CUSTOM DEFAULTS" { {"Var1:" "Enter number for Var1" 0. }
{"Var2:" "Enter number for Var2" 0. }
{"Var3:" "Enter number for Var3" 0. }
{"Var4:" "Enter number for Var4" 0. } }
{ 2. 1. } { 0. 0. 0. 0. } { 0. 0. 0. 0. } INFORM }
SWAP 5. SWAP PUT EVAL
IF
THEN DUP 'LST1' STO EVAL \->
var1 var2 var3 var4 'var1+var2+var3+var4'
"Sum" \->TAG
END
THEN
END
\>>
Access: PRG-NXT-IN
INPUT
Allows user input during program execution; up to four lines of objects can be entered (HP49G) or up
to seven (49G+/50G) if the prompt is omitted.
Multiple objects can be entered on each line by puttimg spaces between them.
Tags and default values in the main string are optional. The output is a string of objects for further
processing.
Minimum syntax is two null (empty) strings:
"" "" INPUT "datastring"
If cancelled with ON, the output is the two null strings. See IFERR for adding the DROP command.
Full syntax:
<< "Prompt" { :Tag: "Defaultvalues"
ALG V {0 0} }
INPUT >>
objects inside a string
The following are options and can be omitted (except Prompt):
Prompt: any string for the user. If none, use a null string ("").
INDEX
Defaultvalues (a string): can be tagged objects, numbers, etc, or the strings and/or tags can be omitted.
There can be up to 4 lines for the 49G, and up to 6/7 for the 49G+/50G.
: if present, turns on alpha mode ( char is alpha-RS-A).
ALG: Algebraic entrytype (see ENTRY for more detail).
V: verify UserRPL syntax in the main string. If this is absent, it can contain anything.
{ 0 0 } is {cursor line,cursor position}. {0 0} or omitting the list puts the cursor at the end of the last
line.
The example below demonstrates an Input program that finds the roots of a linear system when you
press Enter. Values can be changed if you like. Press ON twice to cancel.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< IFERR "Linear Sys Coeffs:" {
":Eq1:1 1
:Eq2:-2 -3
:Const:2 3"
ALG V { 1. 9. } } INPUT OBJ\-> 6.
\->LIST 1. * EVAL 2. \->ARRY 5.
ROLLD { 2. 2. } \->ARRY / "Roots"
\->TAG THEN DROP2
END \>>
Access: PRG-NXT-IN
INT
1. Returns antiderivative of expression for var at n. n can be real or symbolic. It also creates the error
value variable IERR.
expr var n integral
'X^2' 'X' 2 2.6666...
'X^2' 'X' 'X' '1/3*X^3'
Flag -3 should be clear (symbolic mode). Note that as of ROM v2.09, INT can produce odd results for
definite integrals - it also lacks auto mode switching. An example:
Set Exact mode, flag 3 clear
'SIN(X)' 'X' 3.14159265359 1.
INDEX
However, INT returns 2. in Approx mode. It isn't clear whether the integral is measured at a point or
over the interval from zero. It seems to do both depending on the settings.
INT seems to be an add-on command that was never fully implemented. If in doubt, use the full
integral command (RS-TAN), RISCH, or INTVX.
Access: CAT
2. If an integration command returns a result that looks like 'INT(algebraic)', it means that it cannot find
the closed form of the algebraic.
Integers
The 49/50 series has three basic types of numbers: reals, integers and user binary integers. (See Binary
Integers or BASE for more on binaries.)
Integers have no decimal point (unless you enter a decimal fraction, which makes it a real).
A real always has a decimal point: 5., 5.123, etc.
The calc should be in EXACT mode for entering integers. (Exact's annunciator in the header is = and
Approximate's is ~ - RS+ENTER toggles this.)
In Exact and symbolic modes (flags -2,-3 clear), integer operations such as division return rational
fractions. In numeric mode, they return decimal fractions.
In general, reals and integers can be mixed without problems. To convert reals to integers or vice versa,
use RI and IR from LS-CONVERT-REWRITE. Note that reals that have decimal fractions (such
as 5.123) cannot be converted to integers.
You can also convert an integer to a real by multiplying it by 1. or other real number.
However, there are some integer manipulations that will unexpectedly convert integers to reals. If this
happens, the easiest fix is to run the XQ command (from CAT) on the results. This converts reals back
to integers.
To use integer CAS menu commands, enter the INTEGER command (typed in or CAT).
Access: MODE-CAS-Approx,
RS+ENTER
INDEX
Integral ( )
Finds definite or indefinite integral of algebraic expression.
lower upper expr var integral
For definite integrals, it also creates the error value variable IERR in numerical mode (flag -3 set - see
below).
For indefinite integrals, the upper limit should be the same variable as Lev 1.
eg: 0 'X' 'X^2' 'X' 'X^3/3'
If the upper limit is different, the result is:
0 't' 'X^2' 'X' 't^3/3'
Note that it's up to the user to insert any arbitrary constants.
The ASCII form is '(0,X,X^2,X)' (lower, upper, integrand, variable of integration)).
If it returns a result in the form INT(expression), it means that it cannot find the closed form of the
integral.
Note that NUM will create IERR if used to evaluate an integral, either in ASCII or EQW format.
The accuracy can be controlled by the number format (STD, FIX, etc): more digits give better accuracy
but longer times, and vice versa. Some experimentation is required.
See also INTVX, INT, and RISCH in CAT, and EQW-INTEGRALS.
See also the DESOLVE section of the entry for Derivative (). DESOLVE integrates both sides of its
eqn to solve ODEs. It has the added advantage of inserting the arbitrary constant.
Access: RS-TAN
INV
Inverse of object; program version of 1/X.
n 1/n
'name' 1/'name'
[[sq matrix]] 1/[[matrix]]
'INV(X)' EVAL '1/X'
<< 5 INV >> EVAL .2
INDEX
The inverse of a 2x2 matrix is:
[[ A B ]
[ C D ]] [[ D/W -B/W ]
[ -C/W A/W ]]
where W = (D*A-C*B)
Access: 1/X
IOPAR
A variable automatically created in the Home dir with parameters for I/O transfers. (Note that the
HP49G+/50G USB ignores IOPAR.)
The HP49G default is: { 9600 0. 0. 0. 3. 1. }
The HP49G+/50G default is: { 115200. 0. 0. 0. 3. 1. }
Parameters are baud, parity, Recv pacing, Xmit pacing, Kermit checksum, Kermit/printing translation.
There are no controls for pacing (Xon/Xoff flow control) and the feature is not implemented on the
HP49. Better translation is obtained with:
{ 9600 0. 0. 0. 3. 3. } (9600 is 115200 on the 49G+.)
Parameters such as baud, parity, checksum (CKSM) and translate level (TRANSIO/XLAT) are in 104
MENU-IOPAR or APPS-I/O-Transfer. See also TRANSFERRING.
IP
Returns integer part of real number. See also FP.
5.1 5.
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT
I R
Integer to real number conversion. Its inverse is RI.
5 5.
The algebraic expression version is 'IR(X)'.
'X' 'IR(X)'
INDEX
You can also convert integers to reals by multiplying by 1. or other real number.
Access: CONVERT-REWRITE
ISOL
Arranges equation to isolate first occurrence of var.
eq1 var eq2
'X^2+2*X+Y^2=25' 'X' { 'X=-(1+\v/-(Y^2-26))'
'X=-(1-\v/-(Y^2-26))' }
Not quite the same as the HP48, which allows only one occurrence.
See also the entries for n1, n2 and s1,s2.
Access: S.SLV,
93 MENU (old SYMB)
KERRM
Returns text of last Kermit error packet.
Access: 104 MENU
KEY
Detects keypress during program execution, returns keynumber, 1; otherwise returns 0. See also Key
Numbers.
keypress rc.p 1.
no keypress 0.
rc.p - see Key Numbers
Pressing KEY in stack mode does nothing but put 0 on the stack.
Typical use:

<< DO 400 1 BEEP UNTIL KEY END >>
Sounds tone until keypress; returns keynumber. Operation is not precise with older ROM versions.
See also Helptext, section 3 for another KEY example.
Access: PRG-NXT-IN
INDEX
Key Numbers
Key numbers are row-col.plane, where plane is a shift number. A typical example: LS-STO is 32.2.
Shift Nos:
.1 norm (unshifted)
.2 LS
.3 RS
.4 alpha
.5 alphaLS
.6 alphaRS
Counting the row/col numbers is straightforward except for the four cursor keys. Unshifted, these are:
25.1
34.1 36.1
35.1
To find a keynumber, run
<< 0 WAIT >>
and press the desired key(s).
If .01 is added to a shifted key number, the shift key must be held down to obtain the user mode
function.
Example: If the Purge command is assigned to the rightshift P key (44.3), the keynum becomes 44.31
and RS must be held down at the same time as P.
See also ASN, DELKEYS, STOKEYS, TakeOver, USER.
KEYTIME
Sets a time delay after a keystroke to eliminate contact bouncing (ie, multiple entries per keypress).
Older OSs for the HP49G+ used hardware debouncing. Keytime was restored to v2.09 for the
HP49G+/50G.
KEYTIME returns key delay setting in ticks (see TICKS).
KEYTIME sets new value (max. 4096).
Keytime should be set to the lowest number that prevents key bouncing . Try 250 as a start.
Access: CAT
INDEX
KGET
Gets file(s) from remote Kermit server.
'name'
{list of names}

Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU-SRVR
KILL
Cancels DBUG, all halts, and any program calling it (including any calling main program in the path).

Because of its aggressive action, it should be considered a last resort in programming an exit.
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-RUN
LABEL
Labels axes with current range and vars from PPAR. (For the text editor's LABEL, see the entry for
TOOL/EDIT menu. For labelling a matrix, see Matrix Writer.)
For user-defined labels:
{ "hlabel" "vlabel" } AXES LABEL
Access: Graphics menu-EDIT,
81 MENU
LANGUAGE
Languages apply only to error messages (and on the 49G+/50, the Filer labels). This may be extended
in future OS upgrades.
Language returns n, the current setting.
Language sets new value, 0-2.
0 - English
1 - French
2 - Spanish
Access: CAT
INDEX
LASTARG/LAST
Returns arguments used by last command. In RPN, same as ANS on the keyboard. Can be abbreviated
to LAST.
Note that LASTARG must be enabled by the ARG key in LS+MODE-MISC (the default is enabled) or
by clearing flag -55. See the entry for Mode-Misc menu. (Note that there is a keyboard ARG - this is
for angles, not LASTARG.)
LASTARG (flag -55) affects commands such as RCL if a var doesn't exist; the varname is dropped if
LASTARG is off.
LASTARG should be enabled in programs using IFERR.
Access: LS-ENTER,
PGM-NXT-NXT-ERROR
lbmol
A typing aid for user-defined units.
453.59237_gmol
55_ 55_gmol
Access: 117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
LCD series
LCD captures the stack display to a Lev 1 grob.
LCD sends a grob (such as one in a program or on Lev 1) to the display; it must be followed by 7
FREEZE.
To preserve the current softkey menu or to capture screens such as the Eq Writer, use CAT LCD.
To capture the main screen of the FILER, run:
<< FILER LCD >>
Exit from the Filer and the grob will be on Level 1. To capture directories, you have to store
<< LCD >>
in the desired dir. In the Filer, cursor to this and press EVAL. There doesn't seem to be a way
to avoid having the LCD program show in the menu, unless you set up Conn4x and do a screen shot
with ON+up-cursor.
INDEX
To send a Lev1 grob to the graphics editor, enter PICT STO. You can also capture screens with
Conn4x.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB-NXT
LIB
(Note that LIB does not apply to the HP49G+/50G SD card.)
Displays (a) a softkey menu of installed libraries, and (b) directory-like displays of ports 0-2.
Note that the Home dir does not display in port 0, although that's where it is (ie, objects stored in Home
dirs subtract from port 0 memory).
To put a library on the stack, press LIB and then NXT until you see the ports, 0 to 2. Press the port key,
find the libnum, and press RS-libnum.
Libraries on the stack display as

Library 1758: HLP4...
or similar.
Access: RS-2
LIBEVAL
A binary integer with LIBEVAL calls built-in library routines:
# A300Eh softkey listing
OR
# B4001h Numeric Solver
Since a wrong integer can corrupt memory, doublecheck before using LIBEVAL. The integers are not
the same for the 48 and 49 - cross-references are available from the Entry Points section of hpcalc.org.
Access: CAT
LIBRARY basics
Libraries are groups of related programs (a directory) in a single object, using UserRPL, SysRPL
and/or ML.
See CRLIB for details on making your own library, and LIB for accessing libraries.
INDEX
HP48 and 49G+/50G
HP48 Libs are not compatible with the 49/50 because of differences in memory locations. HP49G+ and
HP50G libs are compatible with each other unless a 50G library accesses the serial port (which the
49G+ doesn't have).
49G
All 49G libs will run on the 49/50 series.
Libs for the 49G+/50G will usually run on the 49G unless the lib accesses the SD card or the
49G+/50G ARM processor (the 49G uses a Saturn).
The 49G also has a 131 by 64 pixel screen (the 49G+/50G series uses 131 by 80).
HP48GII
The HP48GII is a subset of the 49G+/50G but has memory fixed at 128K (port 0 only, and recent
models have 256K). Libraries must be installed in port 0 and will subtract from the Home dir's free
memory.
Note that library numbers stored on the 49/50 have an L added (eg, 1758 becomes L1758 in the Filer).
You can recall (or purge) a library from ports 1 or 2 without the L:
:2: 1758 RCL library
but it's required for the SD card (port 3):
:3: L1758 RCL library

Storing Only
If you're only storing a lib in a port and don't want it to run, use 1 LIST on it first (large libraries
may cause insufficient-memory errors), or on the 49G+/50G, store it on the SD card.
Transfer/Installation:
Quick Method:
Transfer from the PC - the library will be in the current dir. Use the FILES/FILER (LS-FILES) to
move it to port 1 or 2, and then do an ON+C warmstart - see Reset for more on ON+C.
For the HP48GII, or if you get low-memory errors, use the full method below.
On the 49G+/50G, you can also use a card reader to transfer the lib into the SD card. Use the Filer to
move it to the desired port and do an ON+C warmstart - see Reset for more detail about ON+C.
Full Method:
1. Transfer the library from the PC into the Home dir using HP's Conn4x comm program in binary
mode (the default).
INDEX
2. Put the library on the stack with RS-name and enter the port number as 0, 1, or 2 (2 is best - see
below).
3. Press STO. If you get an insufficient-memory error, purge the library from the dir (so that it's now
only on the stack) and press STO again.
If you still get memory errors, see MEMORY basics.
4. To attach the library and have its name display in RS-LIB, do a warmstart with ON+C - see Reset for
more on warmstarts.

5. You can now delete the lib from the Home dir if you haven't already done so. You can use PURGE
or the Filer.
Almost all libs are auto-attaching and will run from any dir. A possible exception to auto-attach is the
internal lib 256. If you type 256 MENU and see it, it's attached. If not, type 256 ATTACH first.
ATTACH/DETACH
To make a library's commandsavailable only from one dir:
Assume you want the CAL calendar library (lib # 879) to run only in your DAYTIMER dir. (ATTACH
and DETACH are in 110 MENU as well as CAT.)
Substitute whatever dir you want for the fictional DAYTIMER.
From the Home dir: 879 DETACH
From the DAYTIMER dir: 879 ATTACH
Typing CAL from any dir but DAYTIMER or its subdirs will result only in 'CAL' on the stack.

This change will be undone by the next reboot unless you put it in STARTUP. You would add this to
the program:
HOME 879 DETACH DAYTIMER 879 ATTACH
If STARTUP doesn't exist yet, enter from the Home dir:
<< HOME 879 DETACH DAYTIMER 879 ATTACH >> 'STARTUP' STO
Other Information:
- port 2 (flash) is the usual port for libs. Storing in 0 will reduce the memory available for the Home
dirs. Port 1 (RAM) is fast, but not as safe as port 2 (which is non-volatile ROM).
- port 3 (49G+/50 only) is the SD card. Libraries can be stored there but won't run. Note that library
numbers stored on the SD card have an L added (eg, 1758 becomes L1758).
INDEX
- libs are not self-modifying and can't even be read without special tools (OT49+ from hpcalc is good).
- any lib or lib command can be assigned to a key.
- to see or run a library's commands, you can also enter <libnum> MENU.
- if a defective lib causes continuous rebooting, do an ON+C, then quickly hold down the Backspace
key (the left arrow to the right of SYMB) to prevent libs from attaching. Then remove the offending lib
with the Filer. Getting this to work is a matter of the timing of the BKSP press. Several tries might be
required.
- if you have copies of the same lib in different ports, only the lib with the lowest portnum will run.
This means you can have a safety copy in port 2 and a working copy in faster port 1.

LIBS
Returns list of libraries in ports 0, 1, and 2.
{ title libnum portnum ... }
Access: 110 MENU
LINE
1. In stack mode, draws a line in PICT using either coordinates or pixels.
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
OR
{#m1 #n1} {#m2 #n2}
If a drawing already exists, coincident pixels are left on. To turn them off, use TLINE.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT
2. In graphics mode, draws a line from a mark (times key) to the cursor.
Access: Graphics-EDIT
LINFIT
Stores LINFIT into PAR so that LR uses linear curve fitting. Creates PAR as required.
Access: 96 MENU-PAR-MODL
INDEX
LININ
Tests whether an algebraic is linear for a given var.
'algebraic' 'var' 0/1
'X^2+5*Y' 'Y' 1.
Access: PRG-TEST-NXT-NXT-NXT
LIST series
List-handling commands are in LS-PRG-LIST and LS-MTH-LIST. All their commands have their own
help entries.
Basic Lists:
Elements can be any type of object, or a mix. Using LIST: ob1 ob2 ... obn n {ob1,
etc} See also GET, PUT, SUB, REPL.
Single quotes are not displayed inside lists:
'AB' 'CD' 2 LIST { AB CD }
They're redisplayed when the list is split:
{ AB CD } OBJ 'AB' 'CD' 2
OBJ is in PRG-TYPE.

Adding Elements:
{a b c} x + {a b c x}
OR
x {a b c} + {x a b c}
See also AUGMENT in CAT.
Removing Elements
Edit the list with the text editor, or in a program, use LIST to separate the elements, drop the
unwanted ones, and then reassemble them with LIST. See also HEAD, TAIL.
Adding Lists, Numbers:
To add two lists of equal size element to element or add a number to each element, use ADD (see its
entry).
To add two lists end to end, use the plus key:
{a b} {c d} + {a b c d}
INDEX
LIST
Creates list from elements, size.
'a' 'b' 'c' 3 {a b c}
Access: PRG-LIST
PRG-TYPE
LIST
Splits list into elements, size. Same as OBJ.
{a b c} 'a' 'b' 'c' 3
Access: CAT
EVAL:
will also split the list into elements without the size, but programs are evaluated, which might cause
unexpected results. Lists containing programs should be split with OBJ (in PRG-TYPE) or LIST
(CAT).
Command Entry:
In programming, a list allows stack entry of commands that would otherwise error. See TAG for
another method.
{SIN} OBJ SIN 1.
{SIN} EVAL error
The following three are in MTH-LIST:
LIST
First differences - ie,
{ A B C D } { 'B-A' 'C-B' 'D-C' }
LIST
Sum of elements.
LIST
Product of elements.
LNP1
Returns ln(x+1).
x ln(x+1)
Access: MTH-HYP-NXT,
LS-8
INDEX
LOCAL
The LOCAL command creates local vars (see the definition below) that remain in memory for use by
other programs. They're somewhat different from the compiled variable of the HP48 (which also
works on the 49/50 series).
'A=55' same
OR
{'A=55' 'B=65'} same
To test:
'A' EVAL 55
OR
{ A B } EVAL 55 65
The left-arrow is chr 142, available only via the CHARS map.
Once the vars have been created by LOCAL, STO and RCL work as usual. It's possible that LOCAL
will interfere with UNDO. If so, UNDO can be restored by pressing LS+MODE-MISC and turning
STK off, then on again - note that this may clear the local variables.
To remove:
A warmstart (Reset) or UNBIND (which didn't always work on the 49G, but the 49G+ seems stable,
though you might have to turn off UNDO with LS+MODE-MISC- STK).
A way around the oddities of LOCAL and UNBIND is to use the right-arrow assign method:
<< obj varname << HALT >> >>
The variable will be in memory until CONT, KILL or a warmstart. However, the HLT annunciator will
be on in the header.
Access: CAT
Definition: local variables are usually created by programs and are cleared when the program exits.
eg: << V1 V2 I << program2 >> >>
V1, V2, and I remain in memory for calculating until program2 terminates.
The opposite is the global variable, which is stored in a dir with STO. Global vars are never cleared
until purged by the user.
obj 'varname' obj stored in current dir
INDEX
LOGFIT
Stores LOGFIT into PAR so that LR uses logarithmic curve fitting. Creates PAR as required.
Access: 96 MENU-PAR-MODL
LQ
LQ factorization of matrix.
[[matrix]]a [[matrix]]l
[[matrix]]q
[[matrix]]p
Access: MATRICES-FACT
LR
Uses the data in DAT to return the Y intercept (b) and the slope (m) of the linear regression line.
b m
The type of fit is linear by default (LINFIT) and can be changed by entering LOGFIT, EXPFIT,
PWRFIT, or BESTFIT from STAT-Fit-data or 96 MENU-PAR-MODL. This is stored in PAR (see
below or its entry).
For detail on entering data, see SCATTER/SCATR or STAT, Fit Data section.
To obtain a plot and the LR equation written into the EQ var, use LS+2D/3D to draw a Scatter plot,
then press STATL. STAT-Fit-data will also give the equation, plus the correlation and covariance.
The LINE command will also return the equation of the regression line.
The plotter takes column 1 as X values and column 2 as Y values. To change this, see XCOL or
YCOL.
The format of PAR is: { indep depen y-int slope }.
Access: 96 MENU-FIT
LSQ
Minimum norm least squares solution to linear system where A x X = B.
[array]B [[matrix]]A [array]X
Use when a system is over-determined (more equations than variables).
INDEX
Access: MTH-MATR,
MATRICES-OPER-NXT,
RS+7-SYS (78 MENU)
LU
LU decomposition of square matrix.
[[matrix]]A [[matrix]]L
[[matrix]]U
[[matrix]]P
Access: MATRICES-FACT
MANT
Returns mantissa of argument that's using E notation.
5.E312 5.
For other exponent notation, returns the E equivalent mantissa:
'13^16' 6.65416609183
since 13^16 = 6.65416609183E17. See also XPON.
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT
MATCH
Replaces a symbol or pattern in an expression. MATCH works bottom-up; MATCH top-down. It also
returns 1. if there was a successful match and 0. if not.
expr { old new } newexpr n
'X^2+Y' {'X' 'A'} 'A^2+Y' 1.
It can match only one variable - see the WHERE ( | ) command for multiples.
It can also be used for numeric solving:
'X^2+5' {X 3} 3^2+5 1.
Drop the 1 and EVAL or NUM will return 14.
Wildcard:
You can also use the ampersand & (char 38, alpha-LS-ENTER) to match all occurrences. For example,
&Z means "match anything" and SIN(&Z) means "all occurrences of sines" (the Z var can be any
character):
INDEX
'TAN(X)^2' {&A 'COS(X)^2'} 'COS(X)^2' 1.
'SIN(X)+SIN(Y)' {'SIN(&Z)' 'COS(W)'} 'COS(W)+COS(W)' 1.
For another use of the wildcard, see RCL. See also SUBST in CAT.
The two MATCH commands are hard to find in CAT because they begin with arrows - they're
the 8th and 9th items from the end of CAT.
Access: 93 MENU (old SYMB)
Matrix Writer
Note: if the MTRW menu is overwritten, TOOL restores it.
To start with an existing matrix, put it on Lev 1 and select EDITB (down-cursor).
When you start a new matrix, the cursor moves to the right (or down, depending on GO). After you
enter the first row, move the cursor manually - it will be automatic for the rest.
EDIT current cell
VEC sets 1-row matrix to vector
WID increases col width
WID reduces col width
GO cursor proceeds right
GO cursor proceeds down
+ROW inserts row of zeros at cursor, except last row (press zero, ENTER)
-ROW deletes row at cursor
+COL inserts col of zeros at cursor
-COL deletes col at cursor
STK current cell to stack
GOTO prompts for row, col
DEL fills selected cell or highlighted range with zero
A range of cells can be selected with Begin and End keys. The entry line allows entering an entire line
(across or down, depending on the GO setting):
1 2 3 ENTER ENTER [ 1 2 3 ]
To enter a value from any stack level, use HIST-ECHO.
The Matrix Writer can use a list-of-lists if you set flag 91.
Labelling a Matrix: from a comp.sys.hp48 post by John H Meyers - you can add labels by using a list-
of-lists. The program below is an example:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< PUSH -91. SF { { "" "Pull" "Push" } { "Mon" 210. 155. } { "Tue" 213. 131. } } EDITB POP \>>
Access: LS-MTRW
INDEX
MAX
Returns greater of 2 inputs.
5 3 5
Inputs can be real or integers. Algebraic form is 'MAX(x,y)'. See also MIN.
Access: MTH-REAL
MAXR
The largest number possible on the calculator. Returns 9.99999999999E499 (numeric mode, flags -2,-3
set) or 'MAXR' (symbolic mode, flags -2,-3 clear).
See also Infinity, MINR.
Access: MTH-NXT-CONST-NXT
MAX
Finds the maximum value in the column(s) in the current statistics variable DAT.
n (single column)
[ array ] (multiple columns)
The Maximum function in STAT-Single-Var returns only the maximum for the selected column.
Access: STAT-Single-var,
96 MENU-1VAR
MCALC
Assigns 'name' (or list of names or all MES vars) as var for the Multiple Equation Solver (MSOLVR)
rather than user-defined (see MUSER, its opposite, for more details).

'name(s)' must be in Mpar, which must be in the current dir (see MINIT).
'name'
{list of names}
"ALL"
In the MES, you can select the var by pressing the single-quote key and then the var key.
When a variable is not user-defined, the MES can change its value during calculations. The
var's softkey will return to white.
Access: MES screen-NXT-NXT,
116 MENU
INDEX
MEAN
Arithmetic mean of the column(s) in the current statistics variable

DAT.
n (single column)
[ array ] (multiple columns)
STAT-Single-Var returns only the mean for the selected column.
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR,
STAT-Single-Var
MEM
Free memory available in Port 0, (ie, the Home dir) in bytes. MEM DROP MEM is more accurate since
MEM forces a garbage collection to remove unused objects from memory.
n
Use PVARS for ports 0-2. The FILES/FILER command will display free memory in port 3 (SD card).
Access: PRG-MEM
MEMORY basics
See also STO, RCL, PURGE, FILES/FILER, PVARS, and Recovery. For memory backups, see
ARCHIVE and RESTORE.
For information on choosing a port for a library, see below, and also LIBRARY basics. For storing in
ports 1-3, see the entries for STO and SD card basics. A short summary of the SD card follows the
Port 2 section below.
Programs and Libraries
In general, UserRPL programs (the ones inside << >> delimeters) run best from the Home dir and its
subdirs (port 0). They can also be run from a port using RS-LIB or :portnum:progname EVAL.
Libraries will run from ports 0, 1 or 2. Choosing a port is described below.
Low Memory
If you get low memory errors (eg, when trying to save a file), it's usually because the flash memory
needs more room in the Home dir for defragmenting files. A warmstart (ON+C) will clear various
buffers and free some memory.
Or, try pressing LS+MODE-MISC and then turning off STK, ARG and CMD. This will provide some
extra memory; the features can be turned on again afterwards.
You can also use the Filer to move unneeded files from the Home dir to another port.
See also Pauses.
INDEX
Low Battery
Writing to flash memory (port 2) or the SD card (port 3) requires high-current pulses. If the low-batt
indicator is on or about to come on, you will probably be limited to saving to the Home dir (port 0) or
SRAM (port 1) as described below. If you can't save at all, power down and replace the batteries.
Viewing Ports
The FILES command (LS-APPS) is the best way to view the contents of the ports. Using the stack, n
PVARS returns a list of the port contents, where n is 0, 1, or 2 (it will not access Port 3, the SD card).
Not counting the SD card on the 49G+/50G, memory is divided into three ports:
PORT 0 (IRAM in Filer)
256K of SRAM (about 240K is available to the user). Contains the Home dir and its subdirs. Can
contain libraries, but they subtract from Home dir's free memory. Cleared or corrupted by programming
crashes or power loss. Cleared by pressing ON+A+F-NO. MEM returns the amount of free space.
MEM DROP MEM is more accurate because it forces a Garbage Collection.
Path
Programs (and RCL) will operate if called from a lower dir. All programs in the HOME dir can be run
from any dir - see PATH. Library commands will run from any dir. This can be changed - see
LIBRARY basics. Note that anything recalled from a higher dir is saved to the current dir.
Maximum Memory
The 240K in port 0 that's available to the user is the maximum workspace. Because of segmented
memory, objects to be saved in flash memory must be less than 128K.
For maximum available user memory, temporarily turn off Laststack (STK), Lastarg (ARG) and CMD
with LS+Mode-Misc. Restore these as needed. You can also temporarily move Home dir vars to the SD
card (port 3).
PORT 1 (ERAM in Filer)
256K of SRAM (127K on HP49G+/50G). For libraries or storage - it's faster than flash ROM for
libraries (although not much, since the ARM processor is fast). Usually safe from crashes, but cleared
by power loss. Not affected by ON+A+F. The 49G+ and 50G have a smaller port 1 because the Saturn
processor emulator uses half this memory space.


PORT 2 (FLASH in Filer)
2M of flash ROM, 1M for the OS, 1M for user storage (~ 700K on the HP49G+/50G - the OS uses
part of this). For libraries or storage. Storing and retrieval is slower than RAM. Usually safe from
crashes. Not affected by ON+A+F or power loss.
Backup objects should be stored here or on the HP49G+/50G SD card - see ARCHIVE.
If you're only storing a lib in a port and don't want it to run, use STR or LIST on it first (both are
in PRG-TYPE), or use the SD card (port 3).
INDEX
Insufficient Memory
This error message might occur when you try to save to flash memory (port 2) even when it's not full.
This is because the flash is in 128K blocks that need to be defragmented. The defragger moves files in
and out of port 0 (the Home dir) to do this. If you get this error message, free up space in the Home dir
and try again. See Maximum Memory above.
PORT 3: SD Card
(49G+/50G only - see also SD card basics)
Formatting the card
Formatting erases all existing data on the card.
Note: there is much conflicting information about the SD card, esp. formatting. If in doubt, format on
the calculator. It will format cards less than 32K using FAT16 (FAT in Windows). 32K or larger cards
will be formatted to FAT32.
Note that FAT16 is required if you want to reflash the ROM from the SD card - see Reflashing ROM.
Older ROMs (v1.23,etc): If the card isn't formatted, press ON+D and then 9 (Format). Follow the
onscreen instructions.
Newer ROMs (v2.09,etc): The Filer opening screen has an easy Format command.
SD Card Quick Review
Note that as late as v2.09, the HP4G+/50G has poor SD handling. You can't purge dirs (folders) made
with a PC. A card reader is essential for anything but basics.
The Filer can open folders (directories) marked DIR when you press the right cursor. It can't open
folders made on the calc and marked HPDIR, but it can delete them.
The Filer can be very slow at displaying the SD card listings if you have a lot of files. You can
speed it up considerably by using a cardreader to move files into a few folders.
Long Filenames
In older OS versions, long filenames will be truncated to ABCDEF~1 in the File Manager display. For
best readability, use the DOS convention of 8-and-3: FILENAME.EXT. V2.09 of the OS will accept
long filenames in the Filer (FILES key). Press VAR for maximum display width.
SD STORING
obj :3:varname
OR
obj :3:{dirname varname}
OR
obj :3:"dirname/varname"
(Use the third format for vars made with a card reader)
Note that library numbers stored on the 49/50 have an L added (eg, 1758 becomes L1758).
INDEX
Storing in a Port
Port numbers are 0 (RAM), 1 (RAM), 2 (flash), and 3 (SD). Port 2 is best for libraries and general
storage.
Put the obj on Lev1 and enter
:portnum: objname
(for example, :2: MYPROG) and press STO.
Another way is to enter:
'name', port number, TAG STO
Example: store the program MYPROG on Lev1 in flash ROM:
'MYPROG' ENTER 2 TAG STO
(TAG is in PRG-TYPE)
If the object is to go in an existing directory, enter
:portnum: { dirname objname }
OR
:portnum: "dirname/objname"
If the object already exists in the port, it will say "Object in Use".
If you already have the :portnum:name on Lev1, press ENTER to duplicate it, press PURGE, and then
STO. Otherwise:
To delete an existing obj, use the Filer, or enter

:portnum:objname
and press PURGE (in PRG-MEM).
Example: to delete MYPROG from flash memory:
:2:MYPROG PURGE
No quotes are needed around the objname. For objects inside a stored dir, use
:portnum:{ dirname objectname }
OR
:portnum: "dirname/objectname"
INDEX
An Oddity
If you enter :portnum:{name}, you can RCL this object but you can't use STO because it's expecting a
directory inside the list.
SD RCL
:3:varname obj
OR
:3:"dirname/varname" obj
OR
:3:{dirname varname} obj
There can be false results if the var doesn't exist in the specified dir - see the RCL entry.
SD PURGE
:3:varname
OR
:3:"dirname/varname"
OR
:3:{dirname varname}
(Note that dirs made with a card reader cannot be deleted on the calculator.) The SD card is mainly for
mass storage. Libraries will not run. Programs can be evaluated under some conditions, such as:
<< :3:MYPROG EVAL >> EVAL
SD General
OS versions as late as 2.09 can't create true DOS-type directories on the SD card - use a card reader
instead. The dirs made on the calculator will be called HPDIR by the Filer.
The Filer's features do not work well with SD files. Expect memory and Undefined Name error
messages on many vars.
Vars moved back and forth between Home and the SD appear unchanged, but if you copy them to a PC
with a card reader, they're binaries beginning with HPHP49, the same as a binary transfer. See the
entries for TRANSFERRING and Translations .
If you want readability when copying a UsrRPL program to a PC using the SD card, make it into a
string before copying it to the SD (LS-PRG-TYPE, then STR). Use ASCII transfer mode.
Names
Note that stored library numbers have an L added (eg, 1758 becomes L1758). This is because HP
doesn't allow names to begin with a number.
INDEX
MEMORY viewer
(49G only)
From the HP49 FAQ, hpcalc.org, condensed for HLP49:
Access the memory viewer with On+D, then A. This starts you at address 40000. The left and right
cursor keys move by one nibble (00001), the up and down keys by sixteen (00010), the add and
subtract by 01000, and the multiply and divide by 10000.
The ON key exits (and reboots). The 0-9 and A-F keys do not modify memory, but select which bank of
the flash memory is visible from 40000 - 7ffff.
MENU
For n, displays corresponding softkey menu. (If any menu is already displayed, RCLMENU will return
its number for you.) See also WAIT for displaying any menu in a program. See also TMENU.
n
Some useful values of n:
0 Last menu
1 CST menu
2 Same as pressing VAR
93 Old HP48 SYMB menu
145, 1792 All branching programming commands
2050 All commands
If the menu number has a decimal part, such as 2.01, it indicates the softkey page number.
To see or run a library's commands, enter <libnum> MENU.
Creating CST
MENU can also create var CST, the custom menu, from a list of desired vars (see the entry for
CUSTOM):
{ varnames, etc } new CST stored in current dir
Access: LS+MODE-MENU,
PRG-NXT-MODES-MENU
MENUXY
Displays the softkey menus of 141 CAS commands, 0 to 140.
y x
INDEX
y = which of the 141 begins the menus (0 gives the first, EXPAND)
x = the number of the last command displayed, 0-140
Example: 0 11 starts at the beginning and displays 12 commands, which is two softkey pages. 0 140
displays all 24 pages, EXPAND to VER.
Access: CAT
MERGE
An obsolete port-management function from the HP48 command set. Not used on the HP49/50.
MIN
Returns lesser of 2 inputs. See also MAX.
5 3 3
Inputs can be real or integers. Algebraic form is 'MIN(x,y)'.
Access: MTH-REAL
MINEHUNT
The Minehunt game seems to come and go, depending on the OS version.
If you create a variable called 'Nmines' with a negative number in it, Minehunt will reveal that many
mines. This seems pointless.
If you want to save the game and continue later, press STO. The game will be stored in a variable
named MHpar. If you want to begin a new game instead, delete MHpar.
Access: 117 MENU
MINIFONT
Minifont returns the current minifont.
fontobj
Minifont sets the font used as the minifont.
fontobj
INDEX
The calc has no facility for editing the minifont. Minifont editors are available from hpcalc.org (and
some mini characters don't display properly). None of them are particularly good.

Font changes are reset to the default by warmstarts. To make a change permanent, store the new font
with a unique name in the Home dir. Put:
varname MINIFONT
in the var STARTUP in the Home dir. To undo this, edit STARTUP.
Access: CAT
MINIT
Initializes Multiple Equation Solver (MSOLVR); creates Mpar data variable.
Syntax is:
{list of eqs} STEQ MINIT MSOLVR
See also MITM, MUSER and MROOT.
Access: 116 MENU
MINR
In numeric mode, flags -2,-3 set, returns 1.E-499, the smallest number > 0. In symbolic mode, flags
-2,-3 clear, returns 'MINR'.
See also MAXR.
Access: MTH-NXT-CONST-NXT
MIN
Finds the minimum value in the column(s) in the current statistics variable

DAT.
n (single column)
[ array ] (multiple columns)
The Minimum function in STAT-Single-Var returns only the minimum for the selected column.
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR,
STAT-Single-Var
INDEX
MITM
Changes Multiple Equation Solver title and var order. Mpar must exist - see MSOLVR or MINIT. In
program, place after MINIT and before MSOLVR. The full syntax is:
{eqn list} STEQ MINIT "title" {list of vars} MITM MSOLVR
If there's no title, use a null string ("").
Note that the title bar might only flash for a short time (it depends on the OS version). If so, follow
MSOLVR with 2 FREEZE. It will disappear with the first keystroke.
Access: 116 MENU
MOD
Returns remainder where x mod y = x-(y floor(x/y)).
x y x mod y
7 3 1.
Access: MTH-REAL
MODE screens
Note that in the MODE displays, the +/- key cycles through the choices in fields, and may be faster
than the CHOOS box.
More detail on flags is in FLAGS - list of flags. Stack commands have their own entries.
MAIN SCREEN
NAME Pgm/Stk Version
Operating Mode Flag -95
Number Format LS+MODE-FMT Note 1
Angle Measure DEG, RAD, GRAD
Coord. System RECT, CYLIN, SPHERE
Beep Flag -56
Key click Flag -75
Last Stack LS+MODE-MISC-STK Note 2

Note 1. See also flags 45-50 in the FLAGS entry. Decimal places for formats other than STD are
entered into the small field that opens to the right, or use CHOOS.
Note 2. Last Stack enables or disables the UNDO function, which can use a lot of memory with large
objects.
INDEX
CAS MODES
NAME Pgm/Stk Version
Indep. Var. STOVX
Modulo See CASDIR
Numeric Flag -3
Approx. Flag -105, RS+ENTER
Complex Flag -103, LS+TOOL
Verbose Flag -99 Note 3
Step-by-step Flag -100 Note 3
Incr. Power Flag -114
Rigorous Flag -119 Note 4
Simp non-rat. Flag -111
Note 3. Verbose and SBS display very small amounts of calculating information in the header.
Note 4. Rigorous can be left on for most calculating. See Flag -119 in FLAGS.

DISPLAY MODES
NAME Pgm/Stk Version
Font Fonts 6-8 Note 5
Edit Flag -73 Note 6
Indent Flag -68
Stack Flag -72 Note 7
Textbook Flag -79 Note 8
EQW (minif.) Flag -82
Sm. Stk Disp Flag -80 Note 9
Header lines HEADER (see HEADER series)
Clock Flag -40
Analog Flag -67 Note 10
Note 5. Allows fonts 6-8. The browser allows manual searches for fonts but doesn't load them.
Note 6. Usage is not clear, since all edit modes are full-screen.
Note 7. Minifont stack except for arrays, lists, etc. See Note 9. For full stack minifont, set both Stack
and Small Stack Disp.
Note 8. Flag -52 must be clear for textbook display. Also, flag -65 must be clear for textbook display of
all levels.
Note 9. Minifont stack for all objects other than text or numbers. The help line says EQW, which is
incorrect, as is the flag browser.
Note 10. Analog clock updates only every 5 min.
INDEX
Mode-Flag menu
The Mode-Flag menu is for controlling the flag settings. For the meaning of the flags, see the FLAGS -
list of flags entry.
The softkey version is accessed with LS+MODE-FLAG or PRG-MODES-FLAG. Commands apply to
both system flags (negative flag number) and user flags (positive flag number).
There are 128 system flags (negative) and 128 user flags (positive). Except for 60 and 61 (which
control the CONST command), user flags have no function other than user-set indicators.
Archiving Flags:
Since flags are not archived by the ARCHIVE command, it's a good idea to store the flaglist from
RCLF (see below) in a var. Flags can then be restored with STOF. The HP Conn4x comm program
makes a variable containing flags ('fLaG') and stores it in the Home dir. When run, it restores the flag
settings and deletes itself.
Flag Toggle:
A program that toggles any flag on and off, where -nn is the flag number (for user flags, omit the
minus sign):
<< -nn FS? IF THEN -nn CF ELSE -nn SF END >>
SF:
Sets flag: n
Use a list for setting multiple flags. Example: { -2 -3 -105 } SF
Flags that are set have a checkmark in the flag browser (MODE-Flags).
CF:
Clears flag: n
Use a list for clearing multiple
flags. Example: { -2 -3 -105 } CF
Flags that are clear have no checkmark in the flag browser (MODE-Flags).
FS?:
Tests for set flag: n 0/1
FC?:
As above for clear flag
FS?C:
Returns 1 if flag is set, then clears flag, else returns 0
FC?C:
As above for clear flag
INDEX
STOF:
Stores list of flag settings {see RCLF below}
RCLF:
Recalls list of flags with four binary integers:
{ # system 1-64
# user 1-64
# system 65-128
# user 65-128 }
The binary integer format depends on the setting of BASE.
RESET:
Resets all flags to the HP default (algebraic mode, etc). Note that the defaults vary with the ROM
version and may not agree with those in FLAGS - list of flags.
PUSH/POP
You can set and clear flags in a program without affecting the current settings. PUSH stores the flags
and paths in the ENVSTACK var (see CASDIR), and POP will restore them:
<< PUSH your_program POP >>
Push and Pop are in CAT.
Mode-FMT menu
The softkey version of Format is accessed with LS+MODE or PRG-NXT-MODES-FMT. Most
features are available via the MODE window (and certain system flags).
Features such as STD are enabled when the softkey menu box is showing a white square.
For number formats, internal accuracy is maintained in all formats; to reduce the precision of a number,
use the RND or TRNC commands. Note that E (exponent) notation is powers of 10; ie, E2=10^2.
STD:
Displays numbers in standard mode (maximum decimal places, no thousands separator).
FIX:
Displays with decimals fixed to n places; reals have thousands separator.
4 3,141.5927
SCI:
Displays with E (exponent) notation and n decimal places.
4 3.1416E0
INDEX
ENG:
Displays with E (exponent) engineering notation with E in multiples of three and n decimal places (the
E and exponent count as places).
4 314.16E3
FM,:
Sets comma instead of decimal point as fraction mark, same as flag -51.
ML:
Displays multiline objects with many lines instead of one; maximum 7 with header and font 8
(49G+/50G); same as flag -52.
Note that single-line display (flag -52 set) turns off the textbook mode, even if it's checked in
MODE-DISP.
Mode-Misc menu
The softkey version is accessed with LS+MODE-MISC or PRG-NXT-MODES-MISC. Most features
are also available via the MODE window or system flags. Features are enabled when the softkey menu
box is showing a white square.
BEEP:
Toggles the normal beep on
and off, same as flag -56
CLK:
Enables clock display in the header, same as flag -40
SYM:
Enables symbolic mode instead of numeric, same as flag -3
The following four commands can take up a lot of memory when large objects are kept. They
can be turned off to free up memory if required. Empty by turning them off and then on again.
STK:
Saves last stack (ie, enables UNDO).
ARG:
Saves last arguments, same as flag -55; args are returned with the ANS key or LASTARG command -
note that there is a keyboard ARG for angles.
ARG/LASTARG (flag -55) affects RCL if a var doesn't exist; see the end of the RCL entry. Flag -55
should be clear when a program uses IFERR.
CMD:
Saves last four command line entries (displayed with CMD key - see the help entry for this)
INFO:
Enables display of the Info variable in certain dialog boxes
INDEX
MROOT
Uses Multiple Equation Solver to solve for one or more variables using the equations in EQ. This lets
you solve from the stack without running MSOLVR. Mpar and the variables must exist in the current
dir - see MSOLVR, MINIT.
MROOT then solves for var(s):
'varname' result
{varnames} {list of results}
The result(s) will also be stored in the corresponding var(s).
MROOT is best used after the MES has created Mpar and the vars. If you want to do it manually, store
the list of equations in EQ and store the known values in their vars (MROOT will create the
unknowns). Run MINIT to create Mpar.
Put the name of an unknown on the stack and run MROOT.
When using MROOT, it may say "Too many unknowns" even though all needed values exist. Reassign
a list of these values with MUSER.
Note that the MES commands do not apply to single equations - there must be a list with at least two in
EQ. (You can put two copies of an equation in a list in EQ - that will work.)
See also MCALC.
Access: 116 MENU
MSGBOX
Displays string in message box. Maximum 15 chars by 6 lines with Font 8 (23 chars with minifont
stack - flag -72 set).
"string"
Error messages use the message box - to change them to the header HP48 style and adjust the time that
they're on, see the entry for STARTERR.
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT
MSLV
The Multivariate Solver can solve for multiple equations. It's best suited to CAS expressions -
MSOLVR is faster and more convenient for most uses.
INDEX
The RPN format is:
[ 'eqn1' 'eqn2'... ]
[ vars to solve for ]
[ initial guesses ] [ solutions ]
Note that MSLV switches to Approximate, radian, and symbolic modes. The closer the initial guesses
to the answer, the faster it converges to the result.
A simple example:
[ 'I*R=6' 'I^2*R=12' ]
[ 'I' 'R' ]
[ 2 4 ] [2. 3.]
The CAT Help example in RPN:
[ 'SIN(X)+Y' 'X+SIN(Y)=1' ]
[ 'X' 'Y' ]
[ 0 0 ] [ 1.8238 -.9681 ]
Access: NUM.SLV-MSLV
MSOLVR
Multiple Equation Solver. A list with 2 equations must be in EQ. MINIT must be run to create the
Mpar data variable.
{list of eqs} STEQ MINIT MSOLVR inverse menu of EQ vars
Enter known values and press the appropriate softkey to store (not LS-varkey). Solve for unknown
with LS-varkey. RS-varkey recalls value as usual.
Using ALL:
ALL - undefines all variables so you can start over. Dark keys
return to white.
LS-ALL - solves for all unknowns.
RS-ALL - returns an info screen with the last results.
MUSER, MCALC - see their entries.
Units can sometimes cause errors in user programs, especially with constants in the equation solvers.
Units can be removed with UVAL:
UVAL(CONST(var))
INDEX
MSOLVR is not meant for single equations. In this case store the eqn in EQ and use one of the
following:
1. Use RS-7 (NUM.SLV) and its Solve equation option, or:
2. Use 30 MENU, which is the softkey version of NUM.SLV and works much like MSOLVR, or:
3. Duplicate the equation with ENTER, put the two copies in a list, store it in EQ, and run MINIT
MSOLVR.
#3 has the advantage that the key labels become dark when a value is stored.
See also MITM, MUSER and MROOT. See also SOLVEQN for a similar solver for the equations in
the Equation Library, and SOLVING basics for Clean Solver, easier to use than 30 MENU.
Access: 116 MENU
MUSER
Specifies a name (or list of names or all MES vars) as user-defined var(s) for the Multiple Equation
Solver (MSOLVR). 'name(s)' must be in Mpar, which must be in the current dir (see MINIT).
'name'
{list of names}
"ALL"
In the MES, you can select the var by pressing the single-quote key and then the var key.
When a variable becomes user- defined, the MES will not change its value during calculations unless
you solve for it directly. The var's softkey will turn dark. To undo this and return the var to normal
MES usage, use MCALC as above. The var's softkey will turn to white.
When using ,MROOT it may say "Too many unknowns" even though all needed values exist. Reassign
these values with MUSER as above.
The following example shows how to use MUSER to insert optional user values into the MES in case
you need them. The program solves for frequency, velocity, or wavelength (Gl). The velocity of light is
included in two vars, SI m/s (VSI) and English ft/s (VEng) values. These two vars will be dark
because they contain a value.
To use it, enter two of F, V and Gl and use the leftshift to solve for the third. To use the velocity of
light, use the rightshift to put the desired value on the stack, then press V to store it as an MES value.
INDEX
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< 299792458. 'VSI' STO
983571056.43 'VEng' STO
{ 'F=V/\Gl' 'VEng=983571056.43'
'VSI=299792458.' } STEQ MINIT
{ VEng VSI } MUSER MSOLVR \>>
Note that VSI and VEng appear twice - once for storing and again in the list so that MUSER can find
them. To exit, press the VAR key. Stored values must be deleted manually.
Access: MES screen-NXT (as reqd),
116 MENU
n1, n2
In results from ISOL and QUAD solutions, the variable n1 represents an arbitrary integer 0, 1, 2,
etc. Additional arbitrary integers are represented by n2, n3, etc.
If flag -1 is set, then ISOL and QUAD return principal solutions, in which case the arbitrary integer is
always zero.
See also s1,s2.
NDISP
Number of lines over which a program is displayed on the stack. Default and maximum is 5 for the
HP49G and 7 for the HP49G+/50 (for Font 8, header 2).
n
Access: CAT
NDIST
Normal probability distribution at x based on MEAN m and variance v. Statistical matrix DAT must
exist - see STAT-Single variable.
m v x n
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB-NXT
NEG
Changes sign; program version of the +/- key.
n -n
-n n
INDEX
Note that the +/- key will also toggle checkmarks on and off in dialog boxes.
Access: +/-,
MTH-NXT-CMPLX-NXT,
CMPLX
NEWLINE
The newline command is a linefeed only - CHR 10. The symbol is in files.
If you import text from a PC, the newline is usually CR/LF - CHR 13 and CHR 10. The carriage
returns show as a black square in the text editors.
One way to remove the squares is Find/Replace in the text editor. Use CHARS to enter CHR 13 into
Find; leave Replace blank.
To automate this, see the IN/OUT programs in the Translations entry.
Access: RS-period
NEWOB
Changes existing object into new object.
obj with name new unnamed obj (with same content)
Creates a new copy of an object in memory so that the original can be deleted; creates a separate copy
of an object in a composite such as a list so the composite can be deleted.
Flag -55 should be set so the copy is not saved in Lastarg.
Access: PRG-MEM
NEXT
NEXT in the editor's TOOL-SEARCH FIND/REPL menu finds the next occurrence of the
Find/Replace entry. See the entry for TOOL menus.
It's also used in definite structures FOR-NEXT and START-NEXT - it begins the next loop. It can be
replaced by:
stepsize STEP
for fractional increments in loop values.
Access: PRG-BRCH
INDEX
NXT
NXT displays the next six softkeys (if there are more).
LS-NXT displays the previous six softkeys.
LS+NXT displays the previous menu.
Access: NXT key
NOT
Returns ones complement or logical inverse; makes non-zero zero and makes zero into 1. The one in
the left of the table below represents any non-zero value.
1 0.
0 1.
Reals or integers are taken as zero or non-zero:
5 0.
0 1.
In bitwise calculations with user binary integers, each bit is inverted:
# 1010101010b # 101010101b
Note that NOT works with the current binary wordsize - the above is reset with STWS to 10 bits from
the default 64. Leading zeros are not displayed on the stack, so the result has 9 bits.
The following lets the editor start whether the stack is empty or not. If DEPTH returns zero, NOT
makes it a one and IFT puts a null (empty) string on the stack. Store it as ED or EDT or similar, or
assign it to a key (see ASN).
<< DEPTH NOT "" IFT EDIT >>
Access: PRG-TEST-NXT,
BASE-NXT-LOGIC
NOVAL
Placeholder for empty fields in dialog boxes, positions in lists, etc. Can be placed on the stack; its
TYPE is 19 (command).
Access: PRG-NXT-IN
INDEX
NSUB
Access to sub-list or element position during program iteration using DOSUBS.
{ 22. 33. 44. 55. }
1.
<< ENDSUB NSUB >> DOSUBS
{ 22. 4. 1. 33. 4. 2. 44. 4. 3. 55. 4. 4. }

In the above simple demo, ENDSUB returns 4 (no. of elements) for each element, while NSUB returns
each element's position (1, 2, 3, or 4).

Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
NUM
Returns character code number of char (or first char in string). Its inverse is CHR.
"A" 65.
"ABC" 65.
Chrs 32-127 correspond to the usual ASCII map. Chrs 128-255 are special HP symbols - see the
CHARS map (RS-CAT on HP49G, RS-EVAL on HP49G+).
Access: PRG-NXT-CHARS,
RS+CHARS
NUM
Converts symbolic expression to decimal equivalent, or converts rational number to decimal
approximation.
'(X=1,10,X^2)' 385.

3.14159...
5/9 .555555555556
If you have an equation on the stack, NUM may say "Undefined variable". Remove the variable and
the equals sign to make an expression. EQ from PRG-TYPE-NXT does this easily:
'X=2*9' "Undefined var"
'X=2*9' EQ 'X' '2*9'
'2*9' NUM 18.
Note that if NUM is used to evaluate certain expressions (such as integrals), it may reset numerical
mode (flag -3 set). With integrals, it may create the IERR error variable in the current dir.
Access: RS-ENTER
INDEX
Numerical/Symbolic modes
These are controlled by flags -2 and -3 (MODE-FLAGS).
Flag -2
Clear:
Constant symbol
Set:
Constant number
Flag -3:
Clear:
Function symbolic
Set:
Function numeric
If you try to solve an algebraic and get "Undefined Variable", the calculator is likely in numeric mode.
Clear flags -2 and -3 for symbolic mode.
If you try to use numeric operators and get incomplete results (such as fractions when you divide), the
calculator is likely in symbolic mode. Set flags -2 and -3 for numeric mode.
One way to automate this is to assign simple programs to keys:
<< { -2 -3 } SF >> (numeric)
<< { -2 -3 } CF >> (symbolic)
You can also toggle the modes with a single assigned key:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -2 FS?
IF
THEN -2 CF "Symbolic"
ELSE -2 SF "Numeric"
END -3 FS?
IF
THEN -3 CF
ELSE -3 SF
END
\>>
The two indicator strings are optional and can be removed.

Access: MODE-CAS-Numeric
MODE-FLAGS
INDEX
NUM.SLV
Numerical solvers of various types using dialog boxes. More information is in entries as shown below:
FUNCTION ENTRY
1. Solve eqn SOLVING basics
2. Solve diff eq DIFFEQ (part 2)
3. Solve poly ---
4. Solve lin sys ---
5. Solve finance FINANCE Solver
6. MSLV MSLV
Choose the desired type and enter the known values. You can also store an eqn in EQ - it will appear in
the Solve Equation solver's "Eq:" field. Also - anything you enter in this field is stored back to EQ.
Results are also stored in vars with the same name as the variables used in the eqn.
In Solve Equation, the EXPR= key on the EQ field places both sides of the eqn on the stack once
solving is done.
If a matrix or array is required, press LS-MTRW from the appropriate field and create the object - it
will appear in the solver's field when you press ENTER.
If the obj is on the stack, press NXT-CALC-OK to send it to the selected field in the solver.

When STS (Status?) is selected, it's supposed to replace system messages with CAS information
during calculations.
You can also press CALC to return to the stack if you need to calculate values. Press OK to return and
insert the value into the selected field.
Units can sometimes cause problems in solvers. If so, remove them first with UVAL.
Access: RS-7
NUMX/NUMY
Number of X or Y steps in 3D perspective plots and special-purpose plots like SLOPEFIELD. They're
stored as elements 14 and 15 in VPAR. Called Step Indep, Depnd in LS+WIN.
nx
ny
Access: LS+WIN,
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
INDEX
N
Number of rows in current statistics variable DAT.
n
Access: STAT-Summary,
96 MENU-SUMS
OBJ
Separates object into elements. Any added number or list is size or dimensions (rows,cols).
(x,y) x y
{x y} x y 2
(2.,3.) 2. 3.
[5 6] 5 6 {2}
[[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]] 1 2 3 4 {2 2}
'X-Y=10' 'X-Y' 10 2. =
'(X,Y)' 'X' Y*i 2. +
"ABC" 'ABC'
'ABC' N/A
'4*5' 4 5 2. *
"ABC5" 'ABC5'
"5ABC" 5 'ABC'
<< pgm >> N/A
The example for "5ABC" shows that varnames cannot begin with numbers. For a way around this, see
the S~N command in the entry for 256 MENU.

Access: PRG-TYPE
RS+CHARS-NXT
OFF
Turns the calculator off. Useful in alarm programs that turn the calculator on.
The calculator also turns itself off after 5 minutes without a keystroke; this feature is disabled if a
program is running.
There is no loss of any data when the calculator is turned off, either manually or automatically; just
turn it on again.
For controlling the auto-shutoff, see TOFF, STARTOFF.
Access: PRG-NXT-NXT-RUN-NXT (pgm)
RS-ON (direct)
INDEX
Old SYMB menu
This is from the HP48 command set and is often still useful on the 49/50 series. It contains the
commands COLCT, EXPAN, ISOL, QUAD, SHOW, TAYLR, MATCH, MATCH, Q, QH,
WHERE ( | ), APPLY, QUOTE. Each of these has its own entry.
Access: 93 MENU
ON+ Codes
Hold ON while pressing other key(s).
F1+F6 memory clear (port 0 only - see MEMORY basics)
F2 cancel unreleased keys
F3 warmstart/reboot (see below)
F4 interactive tests, SD format
F5 continuous test (ON+F3 exits)
F6 the F4 test plus IR,EMI (49G+/50G)
Up-curs screen dump to I/O
9 cancels repeating alarm
+ or - contrast adjust
The ON+C (F3) reboot or warmstart cancels any program that's running and clears the stack. It also
clears any buffers such as Undo, CMD, and Lastarg. It does not affect the main memory or stored vars.
It's required for completing the installation of new libraries and for exiting diagnostics. It can
be used at any time to restart the OS if it appears to have been corrupted by a crash or unstable
program. See Reset for more detail.
The ON+F4 (ON+D) diagnostic screen also returns a more complete OS number than the
VER/VERSION command, and includes the build number.
ON+F2+F3+F4 is said to restart the calculator in RPN mode with menu 256 attached. This probably
doesn't get used much.
See also Shortcut keys, Recovery.
OPENIO
Opens the serial port (HP49G only) using the parameters in the variable IOPAR.
Access: CAT
INDEX
OR
Logical OR operator for two arguments. The ones at the left below can be any non-zero value. BASE
should be in the BIN mode. Leading zeros are not displayed on the stack.
1 1 1.
1 0 1.
0 1 1.
0 0 0.
Reals or integers are taken as zero or non-zero:
5 0 1.
5 3 1.
0 0 0.
In bitwise calculations with user binary integers, processing is done bit by corresponding bit, so that
# 110001b # 101001b # 111001b is the same as
110001
101001
------
111001
It can be used in an algebraic:
'X>2 OR Y<4'
This will return 1 or 0 when evaluated, depending on the values stored in X and Y.
It can also be used as an operator in programs. One syntax is below. If either test1 or test2 evaluates to
non-zero, the procedure is evaluated.
IF <test1> <test2> OR THEN <procedure> END
The following checks for a real or an integer on level 1:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IF DUP TYPE 0. == SWAP
DUP TYPE 28. == ROT OR
THEN "<program>"
END
\>>
Access: PGM-TEST-NXT,
BASE-NXT-LOGIC
INDEX
ORDER
Reorders vars in a directory.
{edited list from VARS cmd}
You can process the list with various commands, such as SORT for alphabetical order. Use with
caution, since ORDER will delete vars with missing names.
You can also use ORDER by itself with an appropriate list. This sequence puts the dirs first in
alphabetical order (a dir is type number 15). For descending order, insert REVLIST after SORT.
15 TVARS SORT ORDER
You can also use ORDER from the Filer - see the FILES/FILER entry.
Access: PRG-MEM-DIR-NXT
PARAMETRIC
Sets the plot type to Parametric and creates PPAR if required. See also Plots or PLOT command for
more on general plotting. The expression in EQ should be complex in form:
'3*SIN(3*X)+i*2*SIN(4*X)'
OR
'(3*SIN(3*X),2*SIN(4*X))'
Either of the above draws the same Lissajous figure. If a previous plot has set the wrong display
parameters, either purge PPAR using the stack or press ZOOM-ZDFLT from the graphics menu.
Access: 82 MENU
PARITY
On the HP49G, sets IOPAR to the desired parity. The default is none. Note that IOPAR is ignored by
the 49G+/50G USB, and the IR uses the default 0 (none).
n
n Parity

0 none
1 odd
2 even
3 mark
4 space
Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU-IOPAR
INDEX
PATH
The PATH command returns the path to the current dir.
{ path }
A list with a new path changes to a new dir when evaluated. The path has the form:
{ HOME dir } to dir
OR
{ HOME dir1 dir2 } to dir2
DIRNAME
You can also use only Dirname ENTER if moving sideways but not down (see below).
UPDIR
The UPDIR command steps up one dir in the path. If you're in HOME-dir1-dir2, it steps to HOME-
dir1.
Access is LS-VAR, 2050.06 MENU, or typed in.
Note that LS+UPDIR returns to HOME from anywhere (see also Shortcut keys).
PUSH-POP
PATH is best used in programs. To change dirs easily, use the softkeys as noted below, or select using
the Filer and press CHDIR.
PUSH and POP save and restore the current paths (and flags) - see the entry for Programming.
RUNNING A PROGRAM
Running a program that's in another dir:
{dirname pgmname} EVAL
OR
{dir1 dir2 ... pgmname} EVAL
RECALLING
Recalling an object that's in another dir:
{dirname objname} RCL
OR
{dir1 dir2 ... objname} RCL
Programs (and RCL - but see the caution in RCL's entry) will operate if called from a lower dir. All
programs in the HOME dir can be run from any dir.
{ newpath } EVAL change to newdir
INDEX
NAVIGATING THE TREE
You can change to another dir by typing its name, but only if it's on the same level or above. In the tree
below, if you're in A you can move across by typing B or C, but to get to D you have to enter C, then D.
From D, you can go to A, B, C, or HOME by entering a single name.

HOME
|
ABC
|
D
In these examples, the PATH command is not required.
From A to C: C
From A to D: { C D } EVAL
From D to A: A
In the 2nd example, { C D } EVAL can be replaced in a program by C D. Either format can be used as
long as the commands are evaluated when placed on the stack.

Access: PRG-MEM-DIR
Pauses
The 49/50 series are noted for slight pauses that suspend operation for a few seconds. This is caused by
the GC or garbage collection (the removal of unneeded objects from memory). It improves with each
OS upgrade, but has never been completely eliminated.
Pauses during operations such as saving to the stack can be caused by a low memory condition. See
Memory basics for ways to clear more memory. You can also move some unneeded vars from the
Home dir to a port using the Filer.
If the HLP49 index (which uses CHOOSE) coincides with a Garbage Collection, the program can
pause. This effect was much reduced with v5.0, which forces a GC when the program starts.
PCOEF
Returns coefficients of a polynomial, given the roots. Its inverse is PROOT.
[roots] [coeff]
[ -1. -1. ] [ 1. 2. 1. ]

To change coefficients to a symbolic polynomial, see PEVAL.
Access: ARITH-POLY-NXT-NXT
RS+7-POLY (77 MENU)
INDEX
PCONTOUR (Ps-Contour)
Sets the plot type to Ps-Contour and modifies or creates PPAR. The plot is a lattice of line segments,
each tangent to a contour of F(X,Y)=constant.
Note that the command PCONTOUR is called Ps-Contour in the Plot Type fields.
See also Plots or PLOT for more on general plotting.
Example: Plot the surface contour of '(X^2.-1.)/(Y^2.-1.)'.
Press LS+2D/3D and enter:
Type: Ps-Contour Angle: RAD
EQ: '(X^2.-1.)/(Y^2.-1.)'
Indep: 'X' Depnd: 'Y'
Press LS+WIN and enter:
X-Left: -2. X-Right: 2.
Y-Near: -2. Y-Far: 2.
Step Indep:16. Depnd: 16.
Press Erase and Draw. The plot will be very slow ( > 5min).
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
85 MENU
PCOV
Population covariance of independent and dependent columns of statistics variable DAT, which must
exist in the current dir. See also COV, , XCOL, YCOL.
n
Access: 96 MENU-FIT
PDIM
Replaces PICT with blank of specified dimensions.
(xmin,ymin) (xmax,ymax)
OR
{#mmin #nmin} {#mmax #nmax}
Example: (-3,-2) (3,2) screen with upper left of (-3,2) and lower right of (3,-2)
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT
INDEX
%
x percent of y. See also %CH,%.
y x y(x/100)
50 10 5
Access: MTH-REAL
%T
Percentage of total on Lev 2 represented by Lev 1.
x y 100y/x
50 5 10. (Flag -3 set)
50 5 '1/10*100'(Flag -3 clr)
Access: MTH-REAL
PERM
Permutations of n things m at a time.
n m Pn,m
6. 3. 120.
Algebraic syntax is 'PERM(n,m)'; in the EQW, enter n, press PERM, then m. On the stack, convert
the algebraic to a number with NUM or EVAL.
See also COMB.
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB
PEVAL
Array of coefficients to symbolic polynomial.
[coeffs] var expr
[1 1 -1] 'X' '-1+(1+X)*X'
SIMPLIFY returns 'X^2+X-1'
See also DOSUBS, or AXQ in CAT.
Access: RS+7-POLY (77 MENU),
CAT
INDEX
PGDIR
Purges named dir and its vars, plus any subdirs. There's no confirm and no undo. It does not work with
dirs on the 49G+/50G SD card - use :3:dirname PURGE, the FILES/FILER, or a card reader. (See the
entry for SD card basics for more on SD syntax).
'name'
As of ROM v2.09, dirs made with a card reader cannot be deleted on the calculator.)
Access: PRG-MEM-DIR
PICT/PICTURE
PICT is the reserved name for the grob (graphics object) that PICTURE displays and is used by plot
and graphics functions. The softkey PICT is a typing aid. See PICTURE below for more. See also
Graphics menu for editing commands.
To put a grob in the graphics editor, STO it with the name PICT. Press the left cursor. If a grob is on
the stack, you can display it in the editor by pressing the down cursor (EDITB), but it will not
overwrite the existing PICT.
To put the graphics editor grob on the stack, use PICT RCL from the stack, or EDIT-NXT-NXT-
PICT from the editor.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT (typing aid)
PICTURE displays PICT with cursor and menu. In stack mode, the left cursor is PICTURE and
displays the graphic in PICT.
To obtain the grob, use left-cursor-EDIT-NXT-NXT-PICT or use PICT RCL from the stack (or in a
program).
PICTURE is often used at the end of a graphics program to keep PICT on the screen.
To display PICT without menu or cursor, use { } PVIEW.
To display PICT with a custom menu, use the format in the program below:
<< { list of vars } TMENU
{ # 0h # 0h } PVIEW 3 FREEZE >>
Access: left cursor, CAT
PINIT
Initializes active ports. From the HP48 command set, where it was used to initialize external RAM
cards on the 48GX.
INDEX
On the 49/50 series, it can be used to remove corrupted objects from ports 0 to 2 - this might depend on
the OS version. If you get "Invalid Card Data", it's worth a try. Note that there's always the possibility
of data loss.
n

where n is the port number from 0 to 2.
Access: 110 MENU
PIX series
PIXON and PIXOFF turn PICT pixels on or off. PIX? returns 1 or 0 if pixel is on or off.
(x,y)
OR
{#m #n}
In the graphics editor, PIXON is DOT+ and PIXOFF is DOT-.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT
PKT
Sends command "packets" to (and receives requested data from) a Kermit server.
"datatype" "response"
Access: 104 MENU-SRVR
Plots
(See the next entry for the PLOT command.)
See also Graphics menu for plot editing commands, and LS+2D/3D.
The plotter draws the object in the var EQ (see EQ, STEQ, RCEQ). There are no error messages. The
object type depends on the type of plot selected - usually it's an algebraic expression.
EQ is the reserved name for the var that's plotted. There can be one in each dir.
To see the variety of plots available, press LS+2D/3D. High- light the Type field and press CHOOS.
Each of these has its own entry.
See also RES for controlling the plot resolution and speed. For plotting vectors, see Arrays/vectors.
INDEX
Plotter Reserved Variables
The plotter creates variables containing values for the current setup - see PPAR, VPAR, ZPAR. If
these exist from a previous plot, they can affect the current plot - if you get unexpected results, check
these and delete if necessary.
If your plot type has zooming, you can press ZOOM-ZDFLT to set the three control vars to their
default values.
Function Plots
The Function plot is used as an example below:
The Function mode plots Y=f(X), where the Independent variable (typ. X) is the horizontal axis and the
Dependent (typ. Y) is the vertical axis.
In Function mode, you can plot:
- An expression in one variable, eg, 'X^2-2', which has no equals sign. The plotter solves this as
'Y=X^2-2' to find the vertical (Y) values. This is the preferred method.
- An equation in one variable, eg, 'X^2=2'. It draws the left side, then the right - 'X^2=2' will
plot as a parabola and a horizontal line.
- A program using the specified var, eg, << 'X^2-2' >>. It must return only one value when
evaluated by the plotter. See IFTE for another example.
Saving Your Plots
If you have special conditions set up, you can enter PPAR to put it on the stack and save it with a new
name ('PPAR1' or similar). To reproduce your plot later, put the contents of this var on the stack and
STOre it into 'PPAR'. Store your expression back into EQ, or use a different name.

To save a picture of the plot, press EDIT-NXT-NXT-PICT from the plotter. Store the stack grob with
a new name. To see it, put it on the stack and press the down cursor. To put it in the plotter, STOre it as
PICT. It will use the existing PPAR unless you replace it as described above.
Resetting PPAR
If a previous plot has changed the parameters, you can delete PPAR. An easier way is to store the
program below in the HOME dir as NP (for Normal Plot). Typing NP from any dir resets the existing
PPAR to default values.
Note that this is for the 49G+ or 50G. For the 49G, change -3.9 to -3.1 and 4. to 3.2.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< { (-6.5,-3.9) (6.5,4.) X 0.
(0.,0.) FUNCTION Y } 'PPAR'
STO
\>>
INDEX
All-purpose Sine Wave
The sine below can be controlled in plotting by changing any of its coefficients.
A*SIN(B*XC)D
- X is the independent variable.
- A sets the peak amplitude.
- B sets the period inversely; eg, 10 gives one-tenth the period or ten times the frequency.
- C is the phase shift in radians or degrees.
- D controls the offset above or below the X-axis.
Obviously A and B cannot be equal to zero.
No Plot or Unexpected Results:
- Check PPAR, VPAR and ZPAR; purge them if necessary, or press ZOOM-ZDFLT if your plot
type supports zooming.
- Check the plot size - it may be too big for the screen's default 6.5 horizontal units. Use
AUTO from LS+WIN to scale the axes, or set them manually.
- Check that the expression's var and the Indep var listed in 2D/3D are the same.
- Check for radians versus degrees - their plot parameters are widely different.
- Check that the plot type and expression agree; eg, 'X^2+Y^2-5' is a conic, not a function
(other vars can be included in a function if they have stored values).
- For gaps in the plot, see RES.

- If only half a curve plots, clear flag -1 for General solutions.
Adding text: see GROB, LABEL.
Related Commands: ANIMATE, ATICK, AXES, DRAW, DRAX, ERASE, LABEL.
PLOT command
Given an object on Level 1, creates EQ, PPAR and opens the LS+2D/3D plot setup screen. The plot
type depends on the type of object and must be set manually in 2D/3D.
obj same; obj stored in EQ
The plot type and independent var will be the one previously set if PPAR exists; if not, the default is
Function in X.
See Plots above for more on object types. Press LS+2D/3D to change the plot type. See also the entry
for the specific plot type.
INDEX
Note that PLOT erases before plotting, even if you don't press the Erase key.
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for free downloading by searching hpcalc.org.
Access: CAT
PMAX/PMIN
Set the upper right (PMAX) and lower left (PMIN) corners of the display; ie, they modify the first two
elements of PPAR (and will create it if necessary).
(x,y)
To reset the default plot size without changing anything else (49G+/50G only - Y values for the 49G
are 3.2 and -3.1):
(6.5,4.) PMAX
(-6.5, -3.9) PMIN
To reset the default plot size completely from the graphics screen, press ZOOM-ZDFLT (assuming that
the plot type supports zooming).
Access: CAT
POLAR
Sets the plot type to Polar and modifies or creates PPAR. The independent variable is the angle and the
dependent is the radius.
For polar angle mode, see CYLIN. See also Plots for more on general plotting.
The textbook formula for a polar plot is usually r = f(). In this case r is Y and f() is some function of
X. Y is implicit and isn't needed.
COS(X) plots a circle around the X axis and SIN(X) plots a circle around the Y axis. X plots a spiral.
The following example will plot a rose-like figure:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< '4*COS(4*X)' STEQ POLAR ERASE
DRAX DRAW PICTURE \>>
If a previous plot has set the wrong parameters, either purge PPAR using the stack or press ZOOM-
ZDFLT from the graphics
menu.
Access: LS+2D/3D,
82 MENU
INDEX
POS
Returns:
- start position of substring
- position of char within string
- position of object within list.
"string" "substr" n
"string" "char" n
{list} obj n
POS returns 0 if it errors. See also SREPL, SUB, REPL.
Access: PRG-NXT-CHAR,
PRG-LIST-ELEM,
RS+CHARS
PPAR
The list of plotting parameters created by various plot commands. There can be one in each dir. If an
existing PPAR is deleted, the plotter rewrites it using the default settings or the user values set in
LS+2D/3D and LS+WIN.
If a previous plot's PPAR causes unwanted views, it can be deleted - the plotter will then generate a
default PPAR. See Plots for the NP method of resetting PPAR to the defaults. You can save copies of
PPAR - see Saving Your Plots in the entry for Plots.
The default settings for Function are below; the commands in brackets can change the parameter(s)
from the stack. Other plot types may add more elements.
{
(-6.5,-3.9) upper left corner
(6.5,4) lower right corner (49G is (-6.5,3.2),(6.5,-3.1)
In the above, the X values (1st no.) can be set with XRNG. Y values (2nd no.) are set
with YRNG.

X independent var (INDEP)
0. resolution (RES)
(0.,0.) origin (AXES)
# n see note below (ATICK)
FUNCTION plot type (varies)
Y dependent var (DEPND)
}
The number # n appears if the tick spacing has been changed. It may also be two numbers in a list if X
and Y ticks are different values.
INDEX
PREDV,X,Y
Predicts values using current statistics variable DAT, which should contain a 2-column matrix of the
form [[ X Y ]]. You can use the Matrix Writer, STAT single-variable, or + (see Sigma stats).
PREDV is the same as PREDY
PREDX: y x
PREDY: x y
Access: 96 MENU-FIT
RS-5-Fit Data-PRED
(PREDV is CAT only)
PRINT series
All commands create the variable PRTPAR in the Home dir. This was originally meant for use with an
HP accessory printer for the calculator.
PR1 prints the object on level 1. The object is not dropped.
PRVAR prints a named variable.
'name'
PRST prints the contents of the stack. The objects are not dropped. PRSTC prints in
compact form (one line each).
PRLCD prints the display as a grob.
CR prints buffer contents, if any; sends a newline command.
Access: 104 MENU-PRINT
Programming basics
The "native" programming language is UserRPL, which is common to the HP48/49/50 series. It's
limited, but it's easy to use and can't cause any damage from crashes. There is also SysRPL, more
difficult but more versatile, and assembly language (machine code). These last two are not covered in
HLP49.
Programs are enclosed in double angle brackets (RS-plus key):
<< 5 6 7 + + >>
The program is then stored with your choice of name in single quotes:
'MYPROG' STO
The program will run when you press the MYPROG key. You can also put the program itself on the
INDEX
stack with RS-MYPROG. It can then be edited by pressing the down cursor, or run with EVAL if
desired.
To save it back again, press LS-MYPROG.
When run, anything other than operators or commands will be placed on the stack. In the above, 5, 6,
and 7 go on the stack and are then added by the two + operators.
If the program delimiters are nested, the internal set is placed on the stack without evaluation:
<< 1 2 << 3 4 + >> >> EVAL 1 2 << 3 4 + >>
EVAL can be inserted later in the program to run the secondary program at the appropriate time.
Simple Example
Programs are useful when you have to do the same calculations repeatedly. For example, if you often
multiply a number by 20 times its log, you could store the program below as 'LOG20':
<< LOG 20 * >>
To enter a keyboard command while you're inside the angle brackets, just press its key.
Var Assigning
Most simple programs are made up of the same keystrokes that you'd normally use for stack
calculations.
However, they become even more useful when you assign variables and use algebraic solving. (See the
entry for Assign, and FOR-NEXT for another example.)
Var assignments take one of two forms:
<< A B << program >> >>
OR
<< A B 'algebraic expr' >>
In both cases vars A and B, which are called local variables, are cleared when the internal program or
expression completes (see the entry for LOCAL for permanent local vars).
You can assign as many vars as you want. If there are more than a few, you can use names instead of
characters (in the example below, I could be replace with current, and so on).
Example: power=I^2*R. The two forms would be:
<< I R << I SQ R * >> >>
OR
<< I R 'I^2*R' >>
Store either with a name such as 'PWR'. Place the value of I on the stack, then the value of R.
INDEX
Example: 3 amps, 2 ohms:
3 2 PWR 18
The first version is more flexible since you can put anything into the internal program. The second
version is better suited to short calculations.
If you want, you can also store the values I and R in the current dir with STO. These are global
variables and the program can be reduced to:
<< 'I^2*R' >>
STO the program, then press its name and EVAL to solve it for the stored values. The disadvantage to
this simple version is having to store global variables that you'll have to delete later. Also, it's not a
good idea to use a single character as a varname - there will almost certainly be future conflicts.
Getting Input
You can prompt for input in various ways. The program below shows the user the required arguments
(see INPUT for more detail). The single-character varnames are now full names.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< "Pwr=Amps^2*Ohms"
{ ":Amps:
:Ohms:"
{ 1 7 } }
INPUT OBJ\-> SWAP SQ SWAP *
"Watts" \->TAG
\>>
Type the values and press ENTER (you can leave in extra spaces - they'll be removed), or press ON
twice to exit. Some objects will be left on the stack after a cancel unless you use IFERR and DROP
(see Error Handling below).
See Helptext (in pgms) for other ways of reminding the user. See also Error Handling in this entry.
The program below uses the 30 MENU softkey solver (see SOLVING basics). Enter the numbers and
press the related keys. To solve for the unknown, press LS-var. To exit, press VAR. You can change
the vars to full names if you prefer.
<< 'Watts=I^2*R' STEQ 30 MENU >>
The entered vars will be stored in the current dir.
INDEX
Key Assignments
Often-used programs are most useful when assigned to a user key - see also ASN.
Hint: if you store the program in the Home dir and just assign its name, you can then easily
make changes without changing the keylist. Assign names like this:
'MYPROG' keynumber ASN
OR
<< MYPROG >> keynumber ASN
MYPROG will now run when you press LS-ALPHA and the assigned key (USER mode).
Programs are more flexible if you use decision commands like IF-THEN and loop commands such as
FOR-NEXT. See the related entries.
PUSH/POP
You can set and clear flags in a program without affecting the current settings. PUSH stores the flags
and paths in the ENVSTACK var (in CASDIR), and POP will restore them:
<< PUSH <your pgm> POP >>
Error Handling
You can correct usage errors with the IFERR command. A simple typical use:
<< IFERR LOG 20 * THEN "Number" END >>
If this is run without input, it puts "Number" on the stack to remind you. You can also use DROP,
DROP2, etc (see Stack Commands), to remove unwanted objects after a cancel if needed. See IFERR
for more examples.
Debugging
If a program errors and you can't find the mistake, DBUG (41 MENU or PRG-NXT-NXT-RUN - see
its entry) lets you single-step it for tracing. Put HALT after each IFERR or DBUG will treat the entire
IFERR section as a single step. Remove the HALT when done.
Conditionals, tests
For conditional loops, see the entries for DO-UNTIL, FOR-NEXT, START and WHILE. For tests,
see CASE, IF-THEN, IFT, and IFTE.
PROMPT
Used in program to display string in header. Halts the program. CONT continues. Maximum chars
with Font 8 is 21 (although there's room for 22).
"string"
The need to use CONT is annoying. For alternatives, see MSGBOX.
Access: PRG-NXT-IN-NXT
INDEX
PROOT
Given polynomial in coefficient-array form, returns roots. Its inverse is PCOEF.
[coeffs] [roots]
[ 1. 2. 1. ] [ -1. -1. ]
To change coefficients to a symbolic polynomial, see PEVAL.
Access: ARITH-POLY-NXT-NXT,
RS+7-POLY (77 MENU)
PARSURFACE (Pr-Surface)
Sets the plot type to Pr-Surface and modifies or creates PPAR. Note that the command is called
PARSURFACE, but the plot type is called Pr-Surface.
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
From the HP48 Series User's Guide: the Pr-Surface plot type draws an oblique-view, perspective, 3D
plot of a wire-frame model of a surface determined by:
F(u,v)=x(u,v)i+y(u,v)j+z(u,v)k
where u and v are drawn from the sampling grid (XX- and YY-) ranges. Pr-Surface combines the
coordinate-mapping approach of Gridmap with the 3D perspective plotting of Wireframe.
The following plots an example. Plot time is about 2 minutes.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< RAD { PICT PPAR VPAR } PURGE
PARSURFACE { 'X*COS(Y)' 'X*SIN(Y
)' X } STEQ 16. NUMX 16. NUMY
-3.14159 3.14159 DUP2 DUP2 4.
DUPN XVOL YVOL ZVOL XXRNG YYRNG
0. -4.2 0. EYEPT DRAW PICTURE \>>
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for free downloading by searching www.hpcalc.org.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
85 MENU
INDEX
PRTPAR
Print parameters variable created in the Home dir by print commands. This was originally meant for
use with an HP accessory printer for the calculator.
The format and defaults are:
{ 0. "" 80. "" }
0. is the delay in seconds between lines
"" is any special remapping
80. is chars per line
"" is the end-of line character, in this case CR-LF
PSDEV
Population standard deviation from DAT.
n or [array]
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR
PURGE
Deletes a named variable or a list of named variables. Will not delete directories unless they're empty
(use FILES/FILER or PGDIR).
Stack mode has no confirm and no undo. The Filer has Confirm if flag -76 is clear.
'name'
{ name1 name2 ...}
If a name does not exist, there is no error message - you can use PURGE just to make sure of deletions.
You can do mass purging of vars in a dir by starting an empty list with the LS-Plus key and then
pressing the softkey for each var to be purged. When done, press PURGE.
For the HP49G+/50G SD card, use
:3:name
{ :3:name1 :3:name2 ...}
Purge cannot delete SD card directories made with a card reader. In the Filer, these are labelled DIR
instead of HPDIR.
It can still delete vars:
:3:{dirname varname}
OR
:3:"dirname/varname"
Access: TOOL (stack mode),
LS-PRG-MEM
INDEX
PUT/PUTI
Overwrites position or {row col} in list, array, or matrix. PUTI also returns index of next obj. See also
GET/GETI.
For strings, see REPL, SREPL.
list,array pos obj result (plus index if PUTI)
[ 11 22 33 44 ] 3 99 [ 11 22 99 44 ] (and 4. if PUTI)
[matrix] {row col} obj result (plus index if PUTI)
[[ 1 2 3 ]
[ 4 5 6 ]
[ 7 8 9 ]] {3 1} 99 [[ 1 2 3 ]
[ 4 5 6 ]
[ 99 8 9 ]] (and {3. 2.} if PUTI)
Access: PRG-LIST-ELEM
PVAR
Population variance from statistics variable DAT.
n (single column)
OR
[array] (multiple columns)
For sample variance, see VAR.
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR
PVARS
Returns list of port objects and port free memory. Works only with ports 0, 1, or 2. Note that the Home
dir does not show in the port 0 list, although it's in port 0.
For port 3 (SD card), use FILES/FILER.
port# {list} portmem
An empty port returns an empty list; eg:
0 { } 125649.
Access: 110 MENU
INDEX
PVIEW
{#0h #0h} PVIEW in a graphics program displays PICT during execution. {} PVIEW at end of
program displays PICT without cursor or menu. To display with them, use PICTURE. To display with
a custom menu, see the program below.
(X,Y) or {#m #n} PVIEW displays the upper left of PICT at the specified coordinates, but PICT must
be large enough to fill the display. In this case PVIEW should be followed by 0 FREEZE.
With older ROMs such as v1.23, the screen is 131 by 64. With newer ROMs such as v2.09, the screen
is 131 by 80. The 49G is fixed at 131 by 64.
To display PICT with a custom menu, use the format in the program below. See TMENU.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< { list of vars } TMENU { # 0h # 0h } PVIEW 3 FREEZE \>>
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT-NXT
PWRFIT
Stores PWRFIT into

PAR so that LR uses power curve fitting. Creates PAR as required.

Access: 96 MENU-PAR-MODL
PX C
Pixel to coordinates - inverse of CPX. Default upper left corner is {# 0d # 0d}. Bottom right is
{#130d #63d} with older ROM versions and {#130d #79d} with newer ones.
{#m #n} (x,y)
Note that with older ROMs, the header is separate from the graphics screen. The user area is the same
as the HP48/49G.
The conversion value depends on the settings in PPAR - coords can be anything you want, but
pixel values are absolute and based on the display size. Setting the BASE to DEC simplifies pixel
values.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT-NXT
Q/ Q
Returns the rational form of argument (Q also factors out ). See also XQ, XNUM in CAT.
Q: .5 '1/2'
Q: 1.5707963268 '(1/2)*'
Access: LS-CONVERT-REWRI-NXT
93 MENU (old SYMB)
INDEX
QR/qr
QR factoring of matrix:
[[matrix]]A [[matrix]]Q
[[matrix]]R
[[matrix]]P
Q is m m orthogonal matrix
R is m n upper-trapezoidal m.
P is n n permutation matrix
The QR matrices can be converted to rational form with XQ from CAT. This sets the calculator to
Exact mode.
Access: MATRICES-FACT,
MTH-MATRX-FACTR
qr factoring of matrix:
[[sq. matrix]] [[matrix]]Q
[[matrix]]R
Q is m m orthogonal matrix
R is n n triangular matrix
The outputs of qr are rational in form. They can be converted to reals if desired with NUM.
Access: MATRICES-FACT
QUAD
Solves an expression for zeros or solves an eq. Identical to SOLVE except that it follows flag -1 in
returning either principal or general solutions.
expr var result
'X^2-5' X 'X=5' (principal)
'X^2-5=0' X { 'X=5*-1' 'X=5' } (general)
See also the entries for n1, n2 and s1,s2.
Access: 93 MENU (old SYMB)
INDEX
QUOTE
See also Backquotes (left quotes).
1. A name for the single-quote function, ( ' ). It allows program and variable names to be placed on the
stack ("quoted") without evaluation; eg, if a var is named X, then entering X will recall its contents or
run a program, while 'X' will be placed on Lev 1.
2. Double quotes (RS-times) denote a string of characters. Strings are not evaluated when placed on the
stack. To embed double quotes in a string, precede each with a backslash, alpha-RS-5.
3. The QUOTE command returns unevaluated arguments.
'QUOTE(ABC)' QUOTE(ABC)
Access: 93 MENU
4. Embedded Quotes: if you write a string like this:
"This is an "embedded" quote."
it will cause a syntax error because the calculator sees it as two strings and an unknown word
(embedded). To prevent this, precede each embedded quote mark with a left backslash (\, alpha-RS-5).
"This is an \"embedded\" quote."
RAND
Returns pseudo-random number between 0 and 1; updates seed.
n
.298877175677
For shorter numbers, follow with n RND, where n is the desired number of digits. (Formats such as
FIX shorten only the display, not the number itself.)
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB
RANK
Returns rank of rectangular matrix.
[[matrix]] n
Access: MATRICES-OPER-NXT
INDEX
RANM
Creates matrix using random numbers from -9 to 9.
{rows cols} [[matrix]]
{2 3} [[6 -7 -5]
[5 -8 6]]
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-NXT-NXT
RATIO
Algebraic version of divide.
x y x/y
Access: CAT
R B
Real (or integer) to user binary integer. See also Binary Integers.
5. # 5h (HEX)
5. # 5d (DEC)
5. # 5o (OCT)
5. # 101b (BIN)
Access: BASE
R C
Two reals or integers to a complex number.
1 2 (1.,2.)
For symbolics to complex, see the entry for i.
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT,
MTH-NXT-CMPLX
RCEQ
Same as 'EQ' RCL - returns contents of var EQ if it exists in the current dir. See also STEQ.
contents of EQ

Returns "No current equation" if EQ doesn't exist in the current dir.
Access: CAT or 2050.42 MENU
INDEX
RCI/RCIJ
RCI:
Multiplies row n of a matrix or element n of a vector by a constant x.

matrix/vector x n newmatrix/vector
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-ROW
RCIJ:
Multiplies row i by a constant x and adds this to row j.
[[matrix]] x i j newmatrix
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-ROW
RCL
Recalls the contents of a stored variable to the stack. See the cautions at the end of the entry.
'varname' contents
If the varname is showing in the softkey menu, the contents can be recalled by pressing RS and the
name key.
If the variable is in another dir higher in the tree, its contents can be recalled, but if they're stored back,
they're stored in the current dir.
See also PATH.
CASE SENSITIVITY
Recalls from ports 0, 1, and 2 are case-sensitive, but not from port 3 (the SD card).
PORT RECALLS
It can also recall from a port:
:portnum:varname

Example: :3:MYVAR RCL recalls 'MYVAR' from the SD card. Note that single quote marks are not
required after port numbers.
RECALL FROM PORT DIR
If the var is to be recalled from an existing port dir, there are two ways:
:portnum: {dirname varname}
OR
:portnum: "dirname/varname"
INDEX
WILDCARD:
The ampersand & (char 38, alpha-LS-ENTER) can be used to search all ports if you know the varname:
:&: MYVAR searches ports 0-3
Note that it will not search inside directories.
LIBRARIES:
Because HP names can't begin with a number, libnums will have an L added - eg, 1758 becomes
L1758. You don't need the L when recalling from ports 1 or 2, but it's required for port 3 (the SD card).
:3: L1758 RCL library

CAUTIONS WITH RCL:
If you enter the name of a port var (such as :3:varname) or any varname from a subdir and it doesn't
exist, there is no error message.
Instead, it drops the tag and searches the path. It can be misleading if it finds and recalls a var of the
same name in another dir. This applies to all HP49/50s, and also the HP48.
Second, RCL drops the name of a non-existent file if LASTARG is off (flag -55 set), but not if it's on
(flag -55 clear). See the entry for LASTARG/LAST or Mode-Misc menu.
Access: LS-STO
RCLALARM
Returns a list of parameters for a specified alarm (numbered from 1 upwards). Alarm numbers can be
obtained from RS-TIME-Browse Alarms. This command and STOALARM are meant for program-
ming.
The alarm list is stored in the Hidden dir by STOALARM.
n {date time action repeat}
The action is usually a reminder string to be placed on the stack or a program to be executed. If no
action is specified, this will be an empty string.
Repeat is the time between repeats in ticks (see TICKS) - one tick is 1/8192 second. For example, if
the repeat is once per 24hr day, the value is:

8192*24*60*60 = 707788800.
Access: RS+TIME-ALRM,
95 MENU
INDEX
RCLF
Recalls list of system flags (negative 1-128) and user flags (positive 1-128). The list is stored with
STOF. The format is
{ # system 1-64
# user 1-64
# system 65-128
# user 65-128 }
The binary integer format depends on the setting of BASE.
The flaglist can be recalled by a program to determine if the program is running on an HP48 series or
the 49/50 series. The 48 list has 2 elements, the 49/50 has 4 (use SIZE on the list).
For more flag information, see the entries for Mode-Flag menu and FLAGS - list of flags.
Note that flag settings are not stored by ARCHIVE. You can store the RCLF list in a variable for use
by STOF after a RESTORE, or you can use HP's Conn4x program.
If you use the Conn4x restore feature, flag settings are in a separate program ('fLaG') that will appear in
the Home dir. It's self-purging.
Access: LS+MODE-FLAG-NXT,
PRG-NXT-MODES-FLAG-NXT
RCLKEYS
Recalls the list of user key assignments. This can be stored in a variable as a backup or as a way to have
multiple key assignments with STOKEYS.
This command can be slow if a lot of keys are assigned.
{ keylist }
The list has the format
{ S function1 keynum function2 keynum ... }
The S indicates that unassigned keys retain their normal function in User mode.
See also ASN, DELKEYS, Key Numbers, USER.
Access: LS+MODE-KEYS,
PRG-NXT-MODES-KEYS
INDEX
RCLMENU
Returns current menu number. User menus such as VAR return 2.01 or similar; ".01" is the menu page
number. See also MENU.
nn.nn
Some menus, especially CAS menus, return only .01. See MENUXY for more on CAS menus.
Access: LS+MODE-MENU,
PRG-MODES-MENU
RCL
Recalls the contents of the statistics data variable DAT if it exists in the current dir.
[[matrix]]
Access: CAT
RCWS
Returns binary integer wordsize; default 64 bits. See also STWS.
n
Access: BASE-NXT
R D
Radians to degrees.
The formula is radians (180/).
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
RDM
Redimension - changes size of vector or redimensions matrix.
[vector] {size} new
[ 1 2 3 4 ] {2} [ 1 2 ]
[[matrix]] {rows cols} new
[[1 2 3][4 5 6]] {2 2} [[1 2][3 4]]
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-NXT-NXT
INDEX
RDZ
Specifies seed for random numbers.
n
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB
RE
Returns real part of complex argument.
(x,y) x
[(x,y)(a,b)] [x a]
For the imaginary part, see IM.
Access: MTH-NXT-CMPLX,
CMPLX-NXT
REAL Mode
The 49/50 has two basic modes for numbers, Real and COMPLEX. Real is the most-used mode (the
annunciator in the header is ).
Simple calculations with complex numbers can be done on the stack, but complex calculations using
CAS commands often require Complex mode. The annunciator is .
Modes can be toggled with LS+TOOL, or you can check/uncheck the Complex field in MODE-CAS.
If you're solving a symbolic expression that requires a different mode, the calc will usually switch
automatically - it will ask first, and saying no will cancel the operation. If flag -123 is set, auto mode
switching is prevented.
Access: MODE-CAS-Complex,
LS+TOOL
Real numbers
The 49/50 series has three basic types of numbers: reals, integers and user Binary Integers.
A real always has a decimal point: 5., 5.123, etc.
Integers have no decimal point (unless you enter a decimal fraction, which makes it a real).
The calc should be in Approximate mode for entering reals. (Exact's annunciator in the header is = and
Approx's is ~.)
In general, reals and integers can be mixed without problems. To convert reals to integers or vice versa,
INDEX
use RI and IR from LS-CONVERT-REWRITE. Note that reals that have decimal fractions (such
as 5.123) cannot be converted to integers.
You can also convert an integer to a real by multiplying it by 1. or any other real number.
However, there are some integer manipulations that will unexpectedly convert integers to reals. If this
happens, the easiest fix is to run the XQ command (from CAT) on the results. This converts reals back
to integers (assuming that there's no decimal part - fractions become rationals).
Access: MODE-CAS-Approx,
RS+ENTER
RECN
Receives a file from a Kermit source and stores it with the name on Level 1. Similar to RECV, but send
and receive names can be different.
'name' file stored in 'name'
Access: 104 MENU
Recovery
See also ON+ Codes for info on multiple-key combinations. See also Reset for more detail about
ON+C.
Stack Errors:
Press ANS to retrieve the arguments or press UNDO to replace the stack with a previous copy.
You can also retrieve certain arguments from CMD.
All three must be enabled with LS+MODE-MENU - see the entry for Mode-Misc menu.
Overwrites:
If you act before running any other command, you can correct for accidental use of STO by pressing
ANS.
Assume that VAR1 containing "Original" was overwritten with "Overwrite":
ANS "Original" 'VAR1'
STO ANS "Overwrite" 'VAR1'
Drop the unneeded 'VAR1' name and you're back where you began.
You may also retrieve objects from the CMD buffer. Note that ARG and CMD must be enabled in
LS+MODE-MISC.
INDEX
Repeating Alarm:
It's possible to specify an alarm repeat time short enough that you can't cancel it. Press and hold ON
and then press 9 to break out of the loop.
Low Memory:
If you get low memory errors (eg, when trying to save a file), press LS+MODE-MISC and press STK,
ARG and CMD to remove the white square showing that they're active. This frees at least some
memory - reset them when done.

Another way is an ON+C warmstart, which clears all the temporary buffers. See Reset.
You can also try using the Filer to move unneeded files from the Home dir to another port.
Worst case: if you really need lots of memory, make sure you have a backup (see ARCHIVE), and
then press ON+A+F-NO to clear the Port 0/Home memory. Restore the backup when done.
Program Freezes:
If pulsing ON repeatedly doesn't work, ON+C will terminate the program and reboot. The stack and
undo buffers will be cleared. If this doesn't work, see below.
Lockup:
Sometimes the calc will lock up and ignore the keyboard. Try a mechanical reset: insert a paperclip into
the small hole in the back and press for several seconds, then try ON (you might have to do this
multiple times).
It may return to normal, or it may likely reboot or say Try to Recovery Memory? Press Yes - see
Memory Clear below.
It may restart in Algebraic mode (use MODE to return it to RPN) and require a RESTORE (keep a
backup - see ARCHIVE). Be sure to change back to RPN before restoring.
(Contrary to a statement in an HP manual, holding the reset contact for an extra length of time has no
effect on the type of reset.)
Note: after crashes, you'll need to check:
1. Time and date
2. Alarms, esp. dates
3. Flags (keep an RCLF backup)
4. User keys (keep a RCLKEYS backup)
5. Contrast setting (it's often too dark - hold ON and press the + or keys).
Reboots Repeatedly:
This is usually caused by a defective library. Do an ON+C reboot and then quickly hold down the
Backspace key. This prevents the libraries from attaching -delete the offending library with
the Filer. This is a matter oftiming - you might have to try it a number of times. See Reset.
INDEX
Memory Clear:
A last resort, since it clears port 0 (though not the others). Press ON+A+F (3 keys at the same time). It
will say Try to Recover Memory? - press Yes. Chances are not good; parts of your data will likely be in
dirs called D.01, D.02, etc. Doing frequent backups using ARCHIVE is essential.
If you answer NO, port 0 (and the Home dir) will be cleared. Flags will be default settings (algebraic
mode, etc).
OS Failure:
It's possible, if very rare, for a program fault to corrupt the operating system, which then has to be
replaced. Follow the instructions about reflashing the system for your particular model. Full
instructions are available at hpcalc.org.
The 49G+/50G can be reflashed using the SD card if it was formatted to FAT16 (called FAT in
Windows); see Reflashing ROM.
RECT
Sets rectangular angular mode. The annunciator is XYZ. For polar mode, use either the MODE window
(where it's called Polar) or the CYLIN command. (The POLAR command is a plot type.) See also
SPHERE.
Values are entered as a vector (see Arrays/vectors for more about vector entry): [x y] or [x y]. In the
case of [x y], it will be converted to [x y] notation if rectangular mode is set.
The angle symbol is alpha-RS-6 (chr 128).
If you're using the MODE-Coord System field, the +/- key will step through the choices faster than the
CHOOS box.
The program below toggles between rectangular and polar mode and is more convenient than the many
keystrokes required by MODE. Store it as RP or similar, and/or assign it to a key (see ASN):
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -16 FS? IF THEN -16 CF
ELSE -16 SF END \>>
[3. 4.] [5. .92729521]
If spherical mode is set, this program toggles between rectangular and spherical.
Access: MODE-Coord System,
LS+MODE-ANGLE,
PRG-NXT-MODES-ANGLE,
LS-MTH-VECTR-NXT,
65 MENU
INDEX
Rect/Polar
Note that the polar conversion command is called CYLIN, but the MODE menu uses Polar (the actual
POLAR command is for plotting).
MODE-Coord-System or flag -16 can be used to change modes. Values are entered as a vector:
[3 4] [5. 53.1301]
Vectors are entered in one of several ways:
x y V2 [x y]
[ ] x By ENTER [x y]
Where x,y are numbers and the angle symbol is alpha-RS-6. The above are in polar mode with flag -19
clear. (The second example works only when typed, not pasted in.)
To automate vectors with a key assignment (and other useful utilities), see RECT and Arrays/vectors.
Access: MODE menu
RECV
Receives a file sent by a device using Kermit, such as a computer or calculator. The file name is not
required at the receiving end. To receive and rename a Kermit file, see RECN. For Xmodem, see
XRECV.
Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU
REF
Reduces a matrix to row echelon form.
[[matrix1]] [[matrix2]]
Access: MATRICES-LIN S
Reflashing ROM
Note that an OS update can be lengthy and uses high-current pulses to write to flash memory. Be sure
the batteries are in good condition (the HP50G is powered from the USB cable).
HP49G+/50G
When new ROM editions become available, the easiest way to reflash the ROM is to use the Conn4x
computer program (see the entry for Conn4x basics). The ROM download contains an extra file
holding only the version number (update.scp). This should be in the same dir as the ROM file.
Note that the ROM menu item is only active if you start Conn4x with "Connect using USB
calculator". Click on ROM and follow the onscreen instructions.
INDEX
OLDER HP49G
The early HP49G did not have the Xmodem server built in, so Conn4x can't be used. In this case, use
the older HPComm program on the PC. This program, newer ROMs, and reflashing information are
available from www.hpcalc.org.
SD CARD
You can also reflash from the SD card if the card has been formatted to FAT16 (not FAT32). Cards
formatted with the Filer will be FAT16 for cards smaller than 32K and FAT32 for those above. For
large cards, use a cardreader and a computer (FAT16 is just called FAT in Windows).
Be sure both the ROM file and update.scp are in the root of the card (ie, not in a folder).
1. With the SD card out, press and hold the plus and minus keys.
2. Press the Reset with a paperclip or similar.
3. Release the Reset, wait 2 seconds, then release the plus and minus keys. The update screen
should appear.
4. Insert the SD card with the ROM and .scp files.
5. Press 1 (Update ROM code).
6. Press 2 (Update from SD).
7. When the update is finished, press the Reset.
RENAME
Renames a variable or directory in the Home dir and subdirs. It will not rename objects stored in a
port.
'newname' 'oldname'
If 'newname' already exists, the error message is "Name Conflict".
The Filer (FILES key) is easier to use, but it also only works in the Home dir.
There is no easy way to rename an object in a port, other than to recall it, store it with the new
name, and purge the old. See RCL, PURGE, SD card basics.
Objects on an SD card cannot be renamed with this command or the FILER.
Access: CAT
INDEX
REPL
Note that REPL is available from many different menus - they're all the same command.
See also SUB, SREPL for strings. See also PUT/PUTI for a list, array, or matrix. See also
AUGMENT in CAT.
1. Replaces part of a matrix with a new one, starting at {row col}.
[matrix] {row,col} [new] [newmatrix]
[[ 7 -8 0 ]
[ 2 -9 6 ]
[ 0 1 6 ]] { 2 1 } [ 11 22 33 ] [[7 -8 0]
[11 22 33]
[0 1 6]]
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-NXT-NXT,
MTH-MATRX-MAKE-NXT
2. Replaces element(s) in a list, starting at the position on Lev2.
{list} position element/list
{ 1 2 3 4 } 2 { 5 6 } {1 5 6 4}
Access: PRG-LIST,
PRG-NXT-CHARS,
RS+CHARS
3. In graphics mode, inserts a grob from stack Level 1 with upper left at cursor.
Access: EDIT-NXT-NXT
4. Replaces text in string with character or substrings starting at the position on Level 2.
string pos char/string
"ABCDE" 2 "XX" "AXXDE"
Access: PRG-LIST,
PRG-NXT-CHARS,
RS+CHARS
5. In stack graphics, superimposes Level 1 grob into Level 3 grob with upper left corner at pixel/coord
location on Level 2. Level 1 grob overwrites Level 3 pixels.
grob1 {#m #n} grob2 grob3
OR
grob1 (x,y) grob2 grob3
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
INDEX
RES
Sets plot resolution; default in LS+WIN-Step (which is the same thing) is 0, which is a point every two
pixels. Can use either binary hex integers or reals - the table below gives the number of plotted points.
n
OR
# n
You can also type the value into LS+WIN-Step. To return to the default, enter a zero.
If you check Pixels in the LS+WIN-Step display, you can enter the resolution directly in pixels.
BINARY REAL POINTS
# 4h .4 every 4th pixel
# 3h .3 3rd
# 2h .2 2nd (default)
# 1h . 1 every pixel
# 0h . 4 4th
# 2h 0. 2nd (default)
Note that #2h and 0 are the same thing - #2h speeds up the HP48, with its default of one point per pixel,
but has no effect on the HP49/50, which uses a default of every second pixel. #3h or .3 give better
speed without too much loss of image quality.
.05 or smaller can be used to close gaps in certain plots (but it will be much slower).
Access: LS+WIN-Step
81 MENU-PPAR
Reset
See also Recovery for other methods. More about ON+C is below.
1. A rogue program or glitch can sometimes make the calculator freeze. Try an ON+C warmstart first.
If the keyboard is locked out, you can do a system restart by inserting a straightened paperclip or pin
into the small hole in the back. This will cancel any running program and reload the OS. It usually
does not affect memory unless it was corrupted to begin with.
2. The RESET key from MODE-NXT resets the flags to their default state (see FLAGS - list of flags).
3. Many of the built-in solvers have RESET in the softkey menu (press NXT if necessary). This allows
you to reset any or all of the field values.
ON+C Warmstart
Also called reboot, reset, restart. To run it, press and hold ON and then press and release the C key. The
screen will blank, a splash screen will go by too fast to read ("Powered by Metakernel"), and you'll be
in the Home dir with the Tool menu showing.
INDEX
It has no effect on stored memory and is safe to use. (It does clear the stack and some buffers.)
It does the following:
1. Cancels any program and reloads the operating system commands - sometimes they're corrupted by a
program or glitch.
This resets system defaults such as fonts, binary wordsize, etc (flag settings are not changed).
2. Runs the program in STARTUP if it exists. This sets defaults to your preferences.
3. Attaches all libraries and completes the installation of new ones. Libnames now appear in the RS-
LIB softkey menu.
4. Clears buffers such as Undo, ANS (LastArg), Find/Replace, etc. Clears the stack.
5. Cancels a program that freezes. If this doesn't work, see Recovery.
When to use it:
- After installing a new library
- If commands fail for no reason
- To reset conditions as listed in STARTUP
- If a program freezes or won't stop
Starting Without Libraries
If a lib causes startup problems, such as repeated reboots, do an ON+C - as soon as you release them,
press and hold Backspace during the reboot. It's a matter of key timing. Libs will not be attached
(nothing in RS-LIB).
Remove the offending lib with :portnum: libnum PURGE or use the FILER. Finally, restore
RS-LIB with a normal ON+C.
RESTORE
Overwrites Home dir and subdirs with backup object created by ARCHIVE; causes warmstart
(reboot). Note that RPN mode is required - if the calculator is in algebraic, use MODE to return it to
RPN.
:portnumber: name
eg: :2: BAK49
Note that the name does not require quotes. Only the right-hand colon appears on the stack, although
both appear in edit mode.
If you use this in a program, the warmstart means that RESTORE must be the last command in the
program.
INDEX
Note that flag settings are not archived by the calculator and the flaglist from RCLF (see Mode-Flag
menu) should be stored in a variable before ARCHIVE is used; flags can later be restored with STOF .
The user keylist and alarms are automatically stored in the backup object by ARCHIVE.
The Conn4x program for the PC has both backup and restore, but it's not compatible with backup
objects made with ARCHIVE (you can get your files back, but they'll be in a dir named $$$t and there's
no flag restore).
If you use the Conn4x restore feature, flag settings are in a separate program ('fLaG') that will appear in
the Home dir. It's self-purging.
If you're transferring the backup object from an external source, use binary Kermit or Xmodem. The
backup object should be stored in a port, such as 2. RESTORE can then be run.
:2: backupname
Note that if you have a daily alarm set, RESTORE will run it and advance the date of the next alarm. If
necessary, use RS-TIME to correct the alarm(s).
Access: PRG-MEM-NXT
REVLIST
Reverses list order.
{1 2 3} {3 2 1}
{A B C} {C B A}
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
R I
Real to integer conversion.
5. 5
5.1 error
'X' 'RI(X)'
XQ from CAT will also convert reals to integers. Decimal fractions become rationals. It will also work
with entire expressions and equations.
Access: CONVERT-REWRITE-NXT-NXT
RKF series
RKF
Finds solution to IVP using Runge-Kutta-Fehlberg (4,5) method.
{list} Xtol Xtfinal {list} Xtol
INDEX
RKFERR
Finds abs. error estimate for step h for IVP.
{list} h {list} h Ydelta err
RKFSTEP
Finds next solution step (hnext) for IVP.
{list} Xtol h {list} Xtol hnext
RRK
Finds solution to IVP for DE with known partial derivatives.
{list} Xtol Xtfinal {list} Xtol
RRKSTEP
Finds next solution step for an IVP and displays method used.
{list} Xtol h last {list} Xtol hnext current
RSBERR
Returns error estimate for step h for IVP.
{list} h {list} h Ydelta err
Access: RS+7-DIFFE (76 MENU)
RL/RLB
Rotate bit/byte left.
# 101011h #0202022h
# Ah# 14h
Access: BASE-NXT-BIT/BYTE
RND
Rounds number to n places and removes extra digits.
To remove digits without rounding, use TRNC.
To round while retaining internal accuracy, use n FIX (see Mode-FMT menu).
real n real to n places
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
INDEX
RNRM
Row norm (infinity norm) of an array.
[array] n
Access: MATRICES-OPER-NXT
ROMUPLOAD
(HP49G only) Transfers the 49g calculator's operating system to another HP49G. Connect the
calculators and press ROMUPLOAD on the source HP49. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Access: CAT
ROOT
Returns value for expression that mostly nearly approximates 0. Stores result in variable 'var'. See also
PROOT.
expr 'var' guess result, also stored in 'var'
'X^2-5' 'X' 2 2.2360679775 plus this result stored in 'X'
The root solver can be steered to other roots by using a positive and then a negative guess. For
instance:
'X^2-5' 'X' -2 -2.2360679775
Access: RS+NUM.SLV-ROOT,
75 MENU
ROW
Transforms matrix into vectors; returns row count. See also ROW below.
[[matrix]] vectors count
[[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]] [ 1 2 ] [ 3 4 ] 2
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-ROW
INDEX
ROW
Transforms vectors and row count into matrix; inverse of ROW above.
vectors count [[matrix]]
[ 1 2 ] [ 3 4 ] 2 [[ 1 2 ]
[ 3 4 ]]

Access: MATRICES-CREATE-ROW
ROW+/-
Row+ inserts array into matrix at row n.
[[matrix]] [array] n [[newmatrix]]
Row- deletes matrix row n or vector element n; returns deleted obj.
matrix/vector n newobj obj
Access: MATRICES-CREATE-ROW
rpm
A typing aid for user-defined units.
1_1/min
550_ 550_rpm
Access: 117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
RR/RRB
Rotate bit/byte right
# 101011h# 8000000000080808h
# A00hh Ah
Access: BASE-NXT-BIT/BYTE
INDEX
RREF series
rref reduces matrix to row-reduced echelon form plus pivot points.
RREF reduces matrix to row-reduced echelon form.
[[matrix]] result
RREFMOD reduces matrix to row-reduced echelon form modulo the current modulo (CAT only).
[[matrix]] result
Access: MATRICES-LIN S
RSBERR
Error estimate at step h when solving an IVP DE. See also RKF series.
{list} h {list} h y err
Access: 76 MENU
RSD
Residual B-AZ of matrices B, A, and Z.
[[B]] [[A]] [[Z]] [[B-AZ]]
Access: MATRICES-OPER-NXT,
RS+7-SYS (78 MENU)
RSWP
Swaps rows i and j of matrix.
[[matrix]] i j [[newmatrix]]
[[ 1 2 3 ]
[ 4 5 6 ]
[ 7 8 9 ]] 2 3 [[ 1 2 3 ]
[ 7 8 9 ]
[ 4 5 6 ]]

Access: MATRICES-CREAT-ROW-NXT
INDEX
s1,s2
In results from the ISOL and QUAD commands, the variable s1 represents an arbitrary + or - sign.
Additional arbitrary signs are represented by s2, s3, etc.
If flag -1 is set, then ISOL and QUAD return principal solutions, in which case the arbitrary sign is
always +. See also n1, n2.
SAME
Tests if two objects (any type) are identical.
obj1 obj2 0/1
SAME and == (two equals) are not the same thing:
'X=5+5' 'X=10' SAME 0.
'X=5+5' 'X=10' == '1=1'
That is, the expressions are not the same, but they're equal algebraically.
Access: PRG-TEST-NXT
SBRK
Interrupts Kermit serial transmission or reception.
Access: 104 MENU-SERIAL
SCALE series
These are the programmable versions of some of the plotter's zoom functions. A SCALE of 8 and 8, for
example, multiplies both X and Y by 8.
SCALE adjusts first two PPAR objects to control hor. and vert. scale.
Xscale Yscale
SCALEH adjusts height (vertical or Y).
Yscale
SCALEW adjusts width (horizontal or X).
Xscale
Access: 83 MENU-PPAR
INDEX
SCATTER/SCATR
SCATTER:
Sets the plot type to Scatter and modifies or creates PPAR,

PAR. DAT should contain a 2-column

matrix of ordered pairs (col 1 is X; col 2 is Y). See also LR, SCL.
See also Plots/PLOT for more on general plotting.
SCATRPLOT:
Plots the data in DAT as a scatterplot and returns to the stack. Press the left cursor to see it.
To plot an example, store the following matrix in DAT (you can use STO from CAT):
[[ 7.6 3.2 ]
[ 2.7 2.2 ]
[ .7 .9 ]
[ -1.3 .3 ]
[ -3.5 -.5 ]
[ -6. -1.4 ]]
You can then run SCATRPLOT. To see the plot, press the left cursor. To redraw with axes, select them
in LS+2D/3D and press DRAW.
If you press STATL in the graphic mode, it draws the regression line, stores its eqn in EQ, and
resets the plot type to Function.
Full Scatter Method:
Store the matrix as above. Press LS+2D/3D and select Scatter as the Type. Optional: turn off Axes.
Press LS+WIN and press Auto, Erase, and Draw. (The Auto key modifies PPAR so that the plot fills
the screen.)
Optional: after plotting, press STATL to draw the linear regression line. The line's equation will be in
EQ and the plot type will be Function.
STAT-Fit_data (RS-5) will also give the equation, plus the correlation and covariance. The LINE
command (96 MENU FIT) returns the equation as well.
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for freedownloading by searching www.hpcalc.org.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
88 MENU,
(SCATRPLOT is CAT only)
INDEX
SCHUR
Schur decomposition of a square matrix.
[[matrix]]A [[matrix]]Q
[[matrix]]T
If A is complex, Q is unitary and T is upper-triangular.
If A is real, Q is orthogonal and T is upper quasi-triangular.
In both cases, A is equal to (or approximately equal to) Q T TRN(Q).
Decimal fractions can be converted to rational form with XQ from CAT.
Access: MATRICES-FACT,
MTH-MATRX-FACTR
SCL
Adjusts (xmin,ymin) and (xmax,ymax) in PPAR so scatterplots fill PICT. The statistics variable DAT
must exist. No input is required.
The Auto command in the Plot Window (LS+WIN) does the same thing.
Access: CAT
SCONJ
Conjugates complex number contents of a var.
'name'
If 'test1' contains (1.,2.), SCONJ changes it to (1.,-2.). This does not appear on the stack.
Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH-NXT
SCROLL
Full-screen scrollable display of the object on Lev 1. Maximum text width is 33 char; 9 lines display
vertically. Grobs in Text mode are displayed as one continuous line of ASCII.
obj

Note that SCROLL drops the obj after displaying it. To retain the object, either duplicate it first with
ENTER or press UNDO immediately after exiting SCROLL.
INDEX
Text to be displayed can be one long line, or you can insert linebreaks (RS-period) as desired.
Embedded double quotes should be preceded by a backslash (\, alpha-RS-5). Styles from the TOOL
menu work only in SCROLL's Graphic mode - in text mode the style codes show as black squares.
Access: CAT
SD card basics
Valid up to OS v2.09. See also MEMORY basics and FILES/FILER.
The SD card is flash memory that occupies port 3. HP is not clear on the maximum size, but 512MB
cards will work. Large cards tend to slow down the calc turn-on time, as do large numbers of files.
FILE STRUCTURE:
The file structure is based on DOS. Filenames should be no more than 8 characters plus a 3-character
extension. Longer filenames will work but will be truncated.
Filenames are not case-sensitive, unlike the other ports.
The Filer can be very slow at displaying the SD card listings if you have a lot of files. You can speed it
up considerably by using a cardreader to move files into a few folders.
PROGRAMS:
The card is mainly for storage, but you can run programs with EVAL:
:3: pgmname EVAL
DIRS, HPDIRS
Dirs made with a cardreader cannot be deleted on the calculator.
On the SD card, the Filer can look into dirs made with a cardreader (labelled DIR) if you press the right
cursor, but cannot open the calc's own dirs (labelled HPDIR).
LIBRARY NAMES:
Libraries stored by their numbers in ports 0-2 will have an L added because HP filenames can't begin
with a number. For example, library 1010 will become L1010.
STO, RCL, PURGE:
The syntax for storing, recalling or purging is
:portnum: {dirname varname}
eg, :3: {HLPSD H16}. If there is no dir, it can be :3: H16.
INDEX
Another format for accessing dirs is
:portnum: "dirname/varname"
such as :3: "HLPSD/H02".
Dirs made with a cardreader cannot be purged by the calculator.
All files are stored in binary form. To keep text files readable on a computer, use ASCII transfers (see
TRANSFERRING).
Strings are usually readable on the PC, but calculator symbols (such as chars 128-255) will not display
correctly (see the entry for Translations).
RENAME:
The Filer's RENAME and the RENAME command don't work with port objects. A cardreader is
required for renaming files on the SD card.
FORMATTING:
Cards can be formatted on the calc with the Filer. Cards smaller than 32K will be FAT16; others will be
FAT32. If in doubt, cards can be formatted on the PC (FAT16 is just called FAT in Windows).
SD cards used for reflashing the ROM should be formatted to FAT16. See the entry for Reflashing
ROM for details.
SDEV
Returns sample standard deviation using DAT, which must exist in the current dir.
n or [array]
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR
SEND
Sends a named file using Kermit to another Kermit device.
'name'
For Xmodem, use XSEND.
Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU
INDEX
SEQ
Repeatedly executes using var between start and end in steps of incr.
obj var start end incr {list}
Works well for multiple solving of symbolics. Example: solve X^2+X for values of X from 2 to 5:
'X^2+X' 'X' 2 5 1 { 6 12 20 30 }
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC-NXT
SERVER
Starts Kermit server mode (CAT or typed in).
From keypad:
Kermit: RS+right cursor
104 MENU SRVR
APPS-I/O-Start server
Xmodem: RS-right cursor,
XSERV (CAT)
See also Conn4x basics, TRANSFERRING.
Shortcut keys
(Shifthold) The + sign means hold shift while pressing the other key.
LS+MODE Mode softkeys
LS+TOOL Real/Complex toggle
LS+NXT Previous menu
LS+VAR Home dir
LS+Down See note below
RS+ENTER Exact/Approx toggle
RS+9 Time softkeys
RS+right Kermit server
RS+SPC Semicolon
RS+CAT (49G) CHARS softkeys
RS+EVAL (G+/50G) CHARS softkeys
RS+' Left quotes (`` chr 96) (see Backquotes entry)
RS+7 Root/Diff/Poly/Sys/TVM softkey menu
INDEX
LS+Down is similar to Down (which is EDITB), but can act as VISITB (from the HP48SX command
set) in that it edits the contents of a named var rather than the varname:
Down LS+Down

name edits name edits content
obj edits obj edits obj
Holding LS while pressing keys A-F gives six plotting functions; these have their own entries.
See also ON+ Codes, Recovery.
SHOW
1. Implicit references to the variable 'name' are made explicit.
symb 'name'
If 'Y' contains 'Z=5', then 'X+Y=10' 'Z' 'X+(Z=5)=10'
2. Prevents specified vars from being evaluated.
symb {varlist} evaluation except listed vars
Assume 'A' contains 'X=1'
'B' contains 'Y=2'
'C' contains 'Z=3'
Then 'A+B+C' {A} 'A+Y+Z=A+2+3'

Access: 93 MENU (old SYMB)
SIDENS
Returns the intrinsic density of silicon versus temp Xt.
Xt Xdensity
Access: 117 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
INDEX
Sigma ()
(Not to be confused with SIGMA or SIGMAVX, which are CAS commands. For stats commands +,
-, etc, see Sigma stats.)
Summation function. Easiest to use in the Equation Writer, but the stack syntax is:
var start end function
eg: the sum of the squares of the numbers from 1 to 10:
Stack:
'X' 1 10 'X^2' 385
Eq Writer:
( is rt curs, ^ is Y^X key)
X 1 10 X ^ 2 Enter NUM 385
ASCII algebraic:
'(X=1,10,X^2)' NUM or EVAL 385
If flags -2 and -3 are clear, it can be used in symbolic mode:
'(A=1,X,A^2)' EVAL '(2*X^3+3*X^2+X)/6'
The result will give the sum of the squares from 1 to X when solved for the desired value of X. (See the
entry for WHERE ( | ).)
Access: RS-SIN
SigmaDAT (DAT)
The variable that holds the matrix (one or two columns) required by the stats functions. There are 3
ways to create it:
1. Press RS-STAT and then any of the first four options. Press LS-MTRW to open the Matrix Writer.
Enter the data (one or two columns). Press ENTER twice to exit. The matrix will be in DAT.
OR
2. Enter the data using the Matrix Writer and store the matrix with STO from CAT.
OR
3. Use + from CAT or 96 MENU DATA to enter values - it creates DAT in the current dir (to start a
2-col matrix, make the first entry an array:
[X Y] (following pairs can be on the stack). Use - to correct wrong entries.
INDEX
LINE
Returns the eqn of the regression line based on the data in DAT, which must exist in the current dir.
See LR, Sigma stats, SCATTER/SCATR.
eqn
Access: 96-MENU-FIT
SigmaPAR (PAR)
PAR is the variable that holds stats plot data. It's created by stat plot commands. The default is:
{ 1. 2. 0. 0. LINFIT }
The format of PAR is:
{ independent column
dependent column
y-intercept
slope
type of LR fit }
To change the default columns, see COL, or XCOL and YCOL. To change the type of regression
line, see the entries for LINFIT, LOGFIT, EXPFIT, PWRFIT, or BESTFIT.
For the regression line, see LR or SCATTER/SCATR.
Sigma stats
The following are for stack processing of statistics rather than the dialog boxes of RS-STAT.
+ adds element(s) to the matrix DAT, which it creates. For a 2-col matrix, make the first entry an
array, [X Y]. The following entries can then be on the stack:
X Y stored in DAT
- removes last + entry from DAT, puts it on the stack - used for checking or correcting entries.
Access: 96 MENU-DATA
X sums X column
Y sums Y column
X2 sum of squares in X
Y2 sum of squares in Y
XY sums products of X,Y pairs
N number of rows in DAT
Access: 96-MENU-SUMS,
STAT-SUMMARY
INDEX
LINE returns the linear regression line equation in the form 'mX + b' from the data in DAT, where
m = slope and b = y-intercept.
Access: 96-MENU-FIT
SIGN
1. Returns sign of number using 1.
-5 -1.
5.1 1.
2. SIGN(f(X)) is the signum function - it outputs 1 or -1 as a periodic function changes sign. Plot
'SIGN(SIN(X))' or similar as a function to see the effect.
Be sure flag -119 is clear (Rigorous on). If Rigorous is off, SIGN may not return negative
values, especially when plotting.
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT,
CMPLX-NXT
SINV
Replaces content of var with its inverse. Var may contain numerics or symbolics (if symbolics, flags -2
and -3 should be clear).
'name'
Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH-NXT
SIZE
For the size in bytes, see BYTES.
SIZE returns:
- number of chars in a string
- number of elements in a list or array
- matrix dimensions {row col}
- width (Lev2) and height (Lev1) of a grob in pixels
- number of digits in an integer number (reals return 1.).
- number of elements in an algebraic object
With algebraic objects, operators are included, so that X^2+1 would return 5.
obj n
Access: PRG-NXT-CHARS,
PRG-LIST-ELEM,
RS+CHARS
INDEX
SL/SLB
Shift bit/byte left.
# 101010h # 202020h
# Ah # A00h
Access: BASE-NXT-BIT/BYTE
SLOPEFIELD
Sets the plot type to Slopefield and modifies or creates PPAR and VPAR.
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
The Slopefield plot draws a series of line segments whose slopes represent the slope of F(X,Y) at their
midpoints. It's plotting segments of the anti-derivative of the entered function so you can see the family
of curves resulting from integration. Single-var F(X) will also work.
Note that it does not use all the elements of PPAR, so changes should be made using LS+2D/3D first to
set Slopefield and then LS+WIN to set view values.
The following simple example shows the family of segment curves resulting from plotting the slopes of
'X', which has the antiderivative 'X^2/2+C', where C is the arbitrary constant. Different values of C
result in the curve set.
A possible drawback to Slopefield is that it sets the four view values to +/-1 in LS-WIN. The example
edits LS+WIN to allow a larger view.
If a previous plot has changed PPAR, delete it first to ensure default values.
- Press LS+2D/3D and change the plot type to SLOPEFIELD and to Rad.
- Highlight EQ, type X as the variable. ENTER sends it to to EQ.
- Press LS+WIN and enter
H-left: -2 H-right: 2
V-left: -2 V-right: 2
- Press ERASE and DRAW.
The result is segments showing a family of parabolic curves as determined by the Step setting in
LS+WIN (try changing the steps to 15 and 12 for more curves).
If you want to see an exact curve, press LS+2D/3D and change the Type to FUNCTION. Change EQ's
'X' to its antiderivative 'X^2/2'.
Without pressing Erase, press DRAW.
INDEX
Some functions, such as e^-X^2, do not have a closed-form integral. However, a slopefield plot shows
that it can be handled with numeric methods.
The example below uses F(X,Y) to show an ellipse's anti-derivative set.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -1. CF 'VPAR' PURGE
'1.2*X^2+1.5*Y^2-.55' STEQ
ERASE SLOPEFIELD DRAX DRAW
PICTURE
\>>
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
82 MENU
SNEG
Negates contents of var. Var may contain numerics or symbolics. Flag -3 should be clear for
symbolics to avoid "Undefined name" errors.
'name'
Example: if 'X^2' is in 'var1', then 'var1' SNEG makes it '-X^2'
Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH-NXT
SNRM
Spectral norm of array - the root of the sum of the squares of the elements.
[array] n
Access: MATRICES-OPER-NXT-NXT
SOLVEQN
Extracts and solves any equation from the EQLIB Equation Library using solvers similar to the
Multiple Equation Solver (MES).
The Equation Library was dropped with the HP49G and reintroduced as separate libraries (226 and
227), starting with ROM v2.09, Build 92.
SOLVEQN requires 3 numbered arguments: the main Subject (such as Electricity), the Title (such as
Ohm's Law and Power) and the Picture number. If the Picture# is 1, then any pic is stored in PICT
(view it with the left cursor key). If Picture# is zero, the pic is ignored (use zero if there's none).
Equations are stored in EQ.
INDEX
Level3: Subject#
Level2: Title#
Level1: Picture# (0/1)
Units are controlled by user flags 60 and 61 (positive numbers):
60s: English units
60C: SI units
61s: no units
61C: units
If you use the same equation a second time and want to change units, be sure to delete any existing
EqLib variables - once created, these determine the units regardless of flag settings.
A table of the EqLib numbers is available on p. 5-2 of the HP49G+ Advanced User Reference, or you
can count down manually.

As of Aug/09, SOLVEQN is not in the HP50G manuals. The two 49G+ PDF manuals can be
downloaded from the HP site or hpcalc.org.
Example: the Voltage Divider from Electricity. Electricity is the 2nd subject and the divider is the 3rd
title. There is a pic.
2 3 1 runs solver, stores pic in PICT, stores eqn(s) in EQ
Press the left cursor to see the pic. The solver works the same way as the MES: enter a value and press
the associated softkey. Press LS-softkey of any unknown to solve for that value. VAR exits.
Note: be sure there are no stored vars with the same name as the EqLib vars in the path, or errors such
as Bad Guess(es) or Inconsistent Units can result.
Access: APPS-Equation_Lib-EQLIB
114 MENU
SOLVING basics
In solving, expressions are always equated to zero: 'X-5' is the same as 'X-5=0'.
VX:
If you solve for the same var repeatedly, you can store it in the VX var in the Home dir using STOVX.
Your var will be used by CAS commands such as SOLVEVX and INTVX. The default var is X.
You can also use compound vars, such as 'Xt'.
Contrary to some of the manuals, the var VX is in the Home dir, not CASDIR.
STACK SOLVING:
Uses commands such as SOLVE, SOLVEVX, QUAD, ISOL, etc. The equation or expression is placed
on the stack with the desired var and solving command, such as:
INDEX
The result of 2 3 1 SOLVEQN.
'X^3-27' X SOLVE 'X=3'
OR
'X^3-27' SOLVEVX 'X=3'
The calc will switch to required modes, such as symbolic. It should be in Real mode for non-complex
inputs.
If solving returns "Undefined Name", clear flags -2,-3 (ie, remove checkmarks) for symbolic instead of
numeric mode, or use MODE-CAS-Numeric and uncheck this field.
With any type of solving, results may not be in the desired form. SIMPLIFY (CAT) will be useful, as
will COLLECT, EXPAN/EXPAND, and FACTOR from RS-ALG.
EXCO:
HP's EXCO is a simple program for reducing and simplifying:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
DO DUP EXPAN
UNTIL DUP ROT SAME
END
DO DUP COLCT
UNTIL DUP ROT SAME
END
\>>
SOLVING COMMANDS:
For some of the many solving commands, see ISOL, MATCH, QUAD, ROOT, SHOW, WHERE ( | )
and ZEROS. See also RS+NUM.SLV below.
RS-NUM.SLV:
A number of useful solver types. NUM.SLV has its own entry with more detail.
Some solver dialog boxes require an expression or equation. You can entire it directly into the field, or
you can store it in EQ first.
Coefficient arrays should be entered into the field, or you can have them on the stack and press NXT-
CALC-OK. There may be a syntax error message that you can ignore.
You can also cursor to the input field(s) and press LS-MTRW for the Matrix Writer. When you exit this,
the array will be in the solver's selected field.
If you need to calculate, press NXT CALC to return to the stack. Press OK to return.
INTEGRALS:
See Integral ( ) and EQW-INTEGRALS. See also INTVX, INT, and RISCH in CAT.
INDEX
See also the DESOLVE section of Derivative (). DESOLVE is a powerful integrator for solving
ODEs. It has the added advantage of inserting the arbitrary constant.
DERIVATIVES, ODEs:
See Derivative (), DIFFEQ, EQW.
FINANCIAL:
For more on financial, see the entry for FINANCE Solver.
MULTIPLE-EQUATION SOLVER:
A powerful solver for any number of equations or vars. EQ must contain a list with a minimum of two
equations. MINIT must be run first to initialize it. For details, see the entry for MSOLVR.
CUSTOM SINGLE-EQUATION SOLVER:
30 MENU starts a simple solver for one equation, which must be be stored manually in EQ. The
program below demonstrates Ohm's Law.
<< 'V=IR' STEQ 30 MENU >>
Enter the two known values and press the associated varkeys. To solve for the third, press LS-varkey.
To exit, press VAR. The stored vars must be deleted manually.
CLEAN SOLVER:
In the upgraded version below, adapted from a program written by Peter Karp of comp.sys.hp48,
"CLR" appears in the softkeys. This will purge all the variables when pressed and the program will
exit.
eqn result
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR PUSH -105. SF LNAME AXL
{ { "CLR"
\<< RCEQ EVAL DROP LNAME AXL
PURGE 0. MENU DROP -105. CF POP
\>> } } + 2. \->LIST STEQ 30. MENU
THEN POP "Equation"
END
\>>
Operation is the same as 30 MENU (see CUSTOM SINGLE-EQUATION SOLVER, above), except
that you can purge leftover vars with CLR.
INDEX
UNITS:
Units can sometimes cause problems in solvers. If so, remove them with UVAL.
SAME-NAME VARS:
Variables with the same name as the EQ vars anywhere in the path can cause error messages. If so,
change to unique names or do deletions.
SORT
Sorts list in ascending order. Cannot mix numbers and alphabetics.
{ 3 2 1 } {1 2 3}
{ C B A } {A B C}
{"C" "B" "A"} {"A" "B" "C"}
For descending order, follow with REVLIST (LS-MTH-LIST). Useful for alphabetic ordering of dirs
or similar - see ORDER.
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC-NXT
SPHERE
Sets spherical angular mode. Annunciator is R. See also CYLIN, RECT.
Note that if you're using the MODE-Coord System field, the +/- key will step through the choices faster
than the CHOOS box.
Entering a 3D vector is easiest using V3 (in LS-MTH-VECTR):
5 10 6 [ 5 10 6 ]
The above is in DEG mode. You can also enter it directly from the command line (the angle symbol is
alpha-RS-6, chr 128).
If you enter a spherical vector while another angular mode is set, values will be converted according to
the mode in use.
If spherical mode is set, the program below toggles between rectangular and spherical mode and is
more convenient than the many keystrokes required by the 49/50. (If polar mode is set, it will toggle
between rectangular and polar.)
Store it as RP or similar, and/or assign it to a key (see ANS):
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< -16 FS? IF THEN -16 CF ELSE -16 SF END \>>
Access: MODE-Coord System,
LS+MODE-ANGLE,
PRG-MODES-ANGLE,
INDEX
LS-MTH-VECTR-NXT,
65 MENU
SR/SRB
Shift bit/byte right.
# 101011h # 80808h
# Ah # 0h
Access: BASE-NXT-BIT/BYTE
SRAD
Spectral radius of square matrix.
[[matrix]] n
Access: MATRICES-OPER-NXT-NXT
SRECV
Receives up to n chars from the serial input buffer with error digit.
n "string" 0/1
Timeout is 10 seconds, or it can be set by STIME:
n
where n is a real from 0 to 24.5. If n=0, it waits indefinitely.
Access: 104 MENU-SERIAL
SREPL
Finds and replaces substring in text and returns number of occurrences replaced, including 0 for none.
textstr findstr replstr newstr n
OR textstr 0
"ABC DE FGH"
"DE F"
"XY Z" "ABC XY ZGH" 1.
See also REPL, SUB.
Access: PRG-NXT-CHARS-NXT,
RS+CHARS-NXT
INDEX
SREV
Reverses string order.
"abc" "cba"
Access: 256 MENU-NXT-NXT
Stack Commands
TOOL-STACK or PGM-STACK
Shortcut keys are in brackets.
DUP duplicates Lev 1 onto Lev 2 (ENTER)
SWAP interchanges Lev 1, Lev 2 (Right-curs)
DROP deletes Lev 1 (Backspace)
OVER dupes Lev 2 to Lev 1
ROT Lev 3 to Lev 1
UNROT Lev 1 to Lev 3
n ROLL Lev n to Lev 1
n ROLLD Lev 1 to n
n PICK Lev n duped to Lev 1
n UNPICK replaces n+1 with Lev 1
PICK3 dupes Lev 3 to Lev 1
DEPTH # of objects on stack. Doesn't drop any stack objects
DUP2 dupes Lev 1, Lev 2
n DUPN dupes n levels
DROP2 deletes Lev 1, Lev 2
n DROPN deletes n levels
DUPDUP dupes Lev 1 twice
NIP same as SWAP DROP
n NDUPN dupes Lev 1 n times; returns n

INDEX
INTERACTIVE STACK (Up-curs)
(Note that some of the listed commands are not available with earier ROM versions.)
BACKSPACE deletes selected level
ECHO select level, press Echo, then ENTER or ON to copy to the command line
VIEW displays selected level using SCROLL
EDIT edits selected object with text editor
PICK copies selected lev to Lev1
ROLL selected level to Lev1
ROLLD Lev1 to selected level
LIST list from Lev 1 to selection
DUPN dupes selected level and everything below it
DROPN drops selected level and everything below it
KEEP deletes all above selection
GOTO prompts for level, jumps
INFO size and CRC
LEVEL copies the number of the level to Lev 1
To undo changes: press ON to exit, then UNDO.
COPYING TO CLIPBOARD
Press the up-arrow for the interactive stack, choose the desired level, and press RS-COPY. Does not
append - the copy overwrites. ON or ENTER exits.
START
Definite loop like FOR-NEXT, but with no index counter, which makes it faster for the same
procedure.
start end START <proc> NEXT
OR
start end START <proc> stepsize STEP
The numerical value for STEP can be replaced with the name of a stored value, providing external
control.
Typing aids: when the START dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-START START
NEXT
RS-START START
STEP
INDEX
The following do-nothing program can be used for delays, since the WAIT command sometimes fails
in programming - see Helptext for an example. The 800 value gives a delay of about one second on the
49G+/50G.
<< 1 800 START NEXT >>
Access: PRG-BRCH
STARTED
If this variable contains a program in the Home dir, it will automatically configure the edit mode as
desired whenever the editor is opened. A typical usage:
<< 0 HEADER -73 SF >>
This removes the header (49G) or blanks it (49G+/50G) and selects the minifont. To undo these
changes on exit, see EXITED.
To start the editor with an empty stack, see NOT.
Access: type in
STARTEQW
If this variable exists in the Home dir, it can run a program after the Equation Writer opens when the
user presses CUSTOM. This allows commands to be run on highlighted parts of an expression.
Example: store the following program as 'STARTEQW' in the Home dir. Open the EQW with any
expression. Highlight any section and press LS-CUSTOM. A Choose box will open with various
commands (your choice - the ones shown in the list are only examples).
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< ""
{ SHOW SIMPLIFY COLLECT DERVX }
1 CHOOSE
IF
THEN EVAL
END
\>>
Access: type in
STARTERR
If this variable contains a program in the Home dir, it will run after any error occurs.
The following STARTERR changes error messages from messageboxes to the header (HP48 style):
<< 2 DISP 1 DISP 7 FREEZE >>
INDEX
To display for a fixed number of seconds, replace 7 FREEZE with s WAIT, where s = seconds.
Some error messages, such as "Interrupted", remain in messagebox form.
Anything in this variable other than a program will suppress error messages.
Access: type in
STARTOFF
To change the time until auto-shutoff, see TOFF.
If the STARTOFF var contains a program in the Home or current dir, it will be evaluated after auto-off
(see TOFF). If turnoff is desired, it must contain the OFF command.
The implementation varies from one ROM version to another. Use only with patience...
Access: type in
STARTUP
If this variable contains a program in the Home dir, it will configure the system as desired after an
ON+C warmstart (see Reset), or it can be run manually. A typical usage:
<< 250 KEYTIME MYFONT FONT >>
This sets the key delay to 250. It then recalls a custom font from MYFONT and makes it the current
font. Any other commands can be entered as desired - these are only examples. If STARTUP doesn't
exist, default values are used.
Access: type in
STAT
For statistics tests in softkey format, see the entries for Sigma stats and

PAR, DAT.
Single-variable
Entering values:
Values are stored in DAT. If it exists, you can edit or continue. If not, highlight the DAT field and
press EDIT or LS-MTRW to open the Matrix Writer.
Enter the values as a single vertical column. You can have multiple columns, but only one can be
processed at a time.
When done, press ENTER to store the values in DAT and return to STAT.
INDEX
Choose the column (for multiple columns), then Sample or Population. Checkmark the desired
parameter fields and press OK. Tagged values are placed on the stack. It will also create

PAR, DAT
in the current dir.
Frequencies
If necessary, see Single Variable above for creating DAT.
Select the column of DAT to be divided into bins (classes) according to size. The params and
defaults are number of bins (13), bin width (1), and minimum X value (-6.5).
Output is two arrays. Level 2 has the number of values that fall into each bin, and Level 1 has values
that fall outside this range.
Fit Data
If necessary, see Single Variable above for creating DAT.
DAT should contain data in 2 columns. The values in Col1 become X values for prediction or plotting
and the values in Col2 become Y.
Predicting: press PRED and enter any X value to predict Y or vice versa; press PRED again.
Plotting: exit STAT and press LS+2D/3D. Change the plot Type to Scatter. Press LS+WIN and press
AUTO, ERASE (optional), and DRAW. (x,y) points will be plotted from values in cols 1 and 2 of
DAT.
To draw the regression line for the above points, press STATL in the graphics editor menu. The default
fit is linear. For others, see the entry for LR.
To plot columns other than 1 and 2, see COL.
Summary Stats
If necessary, see Single Variable above for creating DAT.
DAT should have two columns. Checkmark the desired parameters, which are:
X sum of X col
Y sum of Y col
X2 sum of squares of X
Y2 sum of squares of Y
XY sum of the XY products
N number of entries
Values are tagged and placed on the stack. It will also create DAT in the current dir.
INDEX
Hypothesis Tests
Confidence Intervals
Six tests are available for each. Change defaults as required - definitions of each parameter appear at
the bottom of the window as you change fields. The Help key provides both help text and examples.
Output can be toggled between text and graph modes; pressing OK places tagged values on the stack.
Access: RS-STAT
STEQ
Stores an object (usually an expression, an equation, or a list of them) in the variable EQ in the current
dir; creates EQ if it doesn't exist. Same as 'EQ' STO.
EQ is a reserved variable used by the plotter and solvers. There can be a different EQ in each dir. See
also RCEQ.
obj obj stored in EQ
Access: CAT or 2050.42 MENU
STO
Global vars
The STO key stores an object with your choice of name in a global variable in the current dir or in a
specified port. Names are case-sensitive (except for the SD card) and should not start with a number
(see below). The name appears in the softkey menu.
obj 'name'
Local vars
In a program, the STO cmd stores a value in a local var (one created inside the program and cleared on
exit - see LOCAL). Local names do not appear in the menus. Example:
<< x << program using x >> >>
The above creates var x, which is used by the program. The x var is cleared when the program ends.
Limitations
The name must be in single quotes ('varname').
You can't begin a name with a number, since the HP49/50 then thinks it's an algebraic (for a
way around this, see S~N in the entry for 256 MENU).
The name can't include any math operators ('X^2' is an algebraic, not a name).
The object and name must be different - you can't store 'X' in 'X'.
INDEX
Using Leftshift
If a stored object is on Level 1, it can be stored back into its varname by pressing LS, then the name
softkey.
obj LS-varkey = obj 'varname' STO
Storing in a Port
To store an object in a port, use the FILER to copy it if it's already a stored var, or put it on the stack,
enter
:portnum: name
Example: :2: BAK49 and press STO. Names after a portnum don't need quote marks. Note that
names on the SD card are not case sensitive.
If the object already exists in the port, the error message is "Object in use". The Filer will
overwrite it or you can first purge the original:
:portnum: name PURGE
If the var is to be stored in an existing port dir, there are two ways:
:portnum: {dirname varname}
OR
:portnum: "dirname/varname"
Libraries
If if the object is a library, it provides its own filename, so you can store it by just entering the portnum
without the colon - for example, for port 2:
library 2
If the library is already stored in a port, use the Filer to copy or move it. See also LIBRARY basics.
Because HP names can't begin with a number, library numbers will have an L added - eg, 1758
becomes L1758. You don't need the L for commands with ports 1 and 2, but it's required for port 3 (SD
card).
Undoing a STO
To undo an accidental STO, assuming that you haven't entered any other commands, see ANS or
Recovery.
Low Battery
Writing to flash memory (port 2) or the SD card (port 3) requires high-current pulses. If the low-batt
indicator is on or about to come on, you will probably be limited to saving to the Home dir (port 0) or
SRAM (port 1). If you can't save at all, power down and replace the batteries (see Batteries). Your stack
data should be safe - a capacitor protects the stack memory for one or two minutes while batteries are
out. If the calculator is turned off, the backup battery will protect it. See also Batteries.
Access: STO key
INDEX
STOALARM
Stores the list of alarms (from RCLALARM) in the hidden dir. For a description of the list, see
RCLALARM.
{list}

Access: RS+TIME-ALRM,
95 MENU
STO arithmetic
(Note that there is no RCL arithmetic as there was on some previous HP calculators.)
STO+ STO- STO* STO/
These perform the operation on the var contents named on Lev 1, using the Lev 2 obj.
obj 'name'
Example: 55 'myvar' STO+

This adds 55 to the value stored in 'myvar', which should contain a number or algebraic.
Access: PRG-MEM-ARITH
STOF
Stores flaglist in memory (not in a variable) and resets the flags to these values. Use RCLF (see Mode-
Flag menu) to obtain the current list (see RCLF for the list structure).
Note that flag settings are not stored by ARCHIVE. You can store the RCLF list in a variable for use
by STOF after a RESTORE, or you can use HP's Conn4x program.

If you use the Conn4x restore feature, flag settings are in a separate program ('fLaG') that will appear in
the Home dir. It's self-purging after it resets the flags.
{list of settings}
Access: LS+MODE-FLAG-NXT,
PRG-NXT-MODES-FLAG-NXT
STOKEYS
Stores list of assigned keys, format {S obj key# obj key# ...}, in the hidden dir. See also ASN,
RCLKEYS (which provides the list) and Key Numbers. The user keylist is automatically stored in the
backup object by ARCHIVE.
{ S list}
INDEX
The S in the list means that unassigned keys retain their normal function.
If you turn on user keys with flag -62 and unassigned keys are locked out, be sure to assign
<< -62 CF >> to a key or you'll be stuck in user mode (although ON+C will get you out).
It's also a good idea to save the keylist from RCLKEYS in a variable just in case.
Access: PRG-NXT-MODES-KEYS,
LS+MODE-KEYS
STO
Stores object (the matrix with stats data) in the statistics var DAT. Note that this overwrites any
existing DAT. Storing is usually done by the stat functions, but this command can be used for manual
editing.
obj
Note that STO will store any object - it's up to the user to ensure that the proper matrix is on Level 1.
Access: CAT
STOVX
STOVX stores one or more characters in the VX variable in the Home dir and displays it (them) in the
header. This becomes the default var for commands such as SOLVEVX or INTVX. The default is 'X'.
Contrary to some of the manuals, the var VX is in the Home dir, not CASDIR.
Example:
'Xt' 'Xt' stored in VX
CASCFG restores this to 'X'. Note that the DESOLVE cmd will overwrite VX with one of the
variables that it's using.
Access: CAT
STREAM
The first two elements of a list are placed on the stack and obj is executed. The next element is placed
with the result and obj executed again. This continues to the end of the list.
{list} obj result
INDEX
The obj is meant to be a program that takes two arguments and returns one result.
{A B C D} << + >> A+B+C+D
{1 2 3 4 5} << + >> 15
If the obj takes only one argument, the first element is unchanged:
{2 3 4} << SQ >> 2 9 16
Access: PRG-LIST-PROC
STR series
STR removes quotes from string and evaluates result. Same as OBJ. Included for older programs
and available only from CAT.
"ABC" 'ABC'
Access: CAT
STR encloses obj in double quotes to make its type a string.
'2*X' "'2*X'"
Access: PRG-TYPE,
PRG-NXT-CHARS-NXT
STWS
Sets binary wordsize in bits from 1 to 64; default is 64.
n
Access: BASE-NXT
SUB
1. Returns part of string, array, or list:
obj start end newobj
"ABCDEF" 3 5 "CDE"
[1 2 3 4 5] 3 5 [3 4 5]
{A B C D E} 3 5 {C D E}
INDEX
2. Returns section of matrix using start/end of opposite corners.
[[matrix]] start end [[newmatrix]]
[[ 5 4 8 ]
[ 9 6 0 ]
[ 3 3 1 ]] 4 9 [[ 9 6 0 ]
[ 3 3 1 ]]
3. In graphics mode, saves (to stack) grob with opposite corners at mark and cursor.
4. In stack graphics, returns section of grob on Lev 3 with opposite corners on Lev 2 and Lev 1 (can be
pixels or coords).
grob {m1 n1} {m2 n2} newgrob
OR
grob (x1,y1) (x2,y2) newgrob
Access: PRG-LIST,
PRG-NXT-GROB,
RS+CHARS
SVD/SVL
Singular value decomposition, singular values of a matrix.
SVD: [[matrix]]a [[matrix]]u
[[matrix]]v
[[matrix]]s
SVL: [[matrix]] [array]
Access: MATRICES-FACT
SYSEVAL
A binary integer with SYSEVAL calls routines at that address:
# 3714Ah displays hidden dir (HP49/50 only)
Since a wrong integer can corrupt memory, doublecheck before using SYSEVAL. The integers are not
the same for the 48 and 49 - cross-references are available from the Entry Points section of
www.hpcalc.org.
Access: CAT
INDEX
%T
Percentage of total on Level 2 represented by Level 1.
x y 100y/x
50 5 10. (Flag -3 set)
50 5 '1/10*100'(Flag -3 clr)
Access: MTH-REAL
TABLE
Displays calculated values of X and Y from the last plot, or allows user-supplied values for X (Build
Your Own mode - see TBLSET). The variable EQ must exist in the current dir.
The TABLE feature is not well documented and appears to work only with single-variable
expressions (eg, Conic plots produce an error message). The DEFN key supplies X/Y labels for the
selected values, or the current expression.
The table is look-only; there doesn't seem to be a way to export the values (except to enter them
manually in the Build mode).
Access: LS+F6.
TAG
Attaches a label to an object.
obj "string" :string:obj
OR
obj 'name' :name:obj
Only the right-hand colon appears on the stack; both appear in the editor.
When tagging a port number onto a varname, the colons are not required inside the string:
"3" 'varname' 3:varname
Tags are removed by DTAG and most operations, including STO. One way to preserve a tag is to
make the object into a string with PGM-TYPE-STR. Remove the string afterwards with OBJ.
An empty tag can be used in programming to put a name or command on the stack without evaluating
it:
::pgmname or ::command
This method saves a few bytes compared to quotes or a list. See also EVAL.
Access: PRG-TYPE
INDEX
TAIL
Returns all but the first element of a list or string. See also HEAD.
obj newobj
{ a b c d } { b c d }
Access: PRG-LIST-ELEM-NXT,
PRG-NXT-CHARS-NXT,
RS+CHARS-NXT
TakeOver
If you want assigned keys to have their functions appear in the text editor, the key assignment must
have the SysRPL command TakeOver added to it.
The easiest way is to use one of many toolkit programs from hpcalc.org. Keyman is a good one - its
TO? command adds TakeOver to any assignment on the stack. For example:
<< DATE TIME TSTR MSGBOX >>
This displays the time and date when the assigned key is pressed. There is no visible difference when
you run TO?, but if you set flag -85 for SysRPL, you'll see:
:: TakeOver x<< xDATE xTIME xTSTR xMSGBOX x>> ;
Assign this to a key and it will insert a message box with the time and date into the editor.
Note that TakeOver does not work in items such as MTRW or EQW.
TAYLR
Taylor approximation of expr at zero. For non-zero, use SERIES with <expr 'var=n' order>.
expr var order newexpr
'SIN(X)' 'X' 3 '-1/6*X^3+X'
The TAYLOR0 cmd from CAT gives a fourth-order approximation at zero:
'SIN(X)' '1/120*X^5+-1/6*X^3+X'
SIMPLIFY '(X^5-20*X^3+120*X)/120'
For non-zero, see SERIES in CAT.
Access: CALC-LIMIT
INDEX
TBLSET
The table setup screen. Allows entering start, step, zoom, etc. Calculated values of X and Y for the next
plot can be viewed with the TABLE command.
The TABLE feature is not well documented and appears to work only with single-variable expressions
(eg, Conic plots produce an error message).
For Type: Build Your Own, the TABLE screen allows entryof user-supplied X values; Yvalues are
automatically calculated and stored as an array in the variable TAB (or your choice of name).
Settings in TBLSET are stored in a list in the variable TPAR.
Access: LS+F5
TDELTA
Temperature change - can mix any of the temp units. Result takes the unit type of the level 2 object.
x y y-x
'50_C' '10_F' 62.2222_C
Access: CAT,
117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
TETRIS
There are two Tetris games, at least in OS versions 1.23 and later. Earlier versions might only have the
first:
Type "HpMad" (including the quote marks) in any new input form command line (such as the BEEP
item in the MODE window). The cursors control left-right and rotation. ON+C exits - on the
HP49G+/50G, you might have to try ON+C repeatedly.
Note: the HpMad version doesn't seem to work reliably on the 49/50 series with modern ROM
versions.
The other Tetris (versions later than version 1.18 only): in the Equation Writer (EQW), type
MINEISBETTER and highlight it with the right arrow, then press SIMP. The 4 and 6 keys are left/right
and 5 is rotation. The 2 key steps the falling object a little faster. The Backspace key exits.
INDEX
TEXT
Displays the stack during program execution. The demo program below (thanks to John H Meyers) will
switch three times between the image in PICT and the stack. (If there's nothing in PICT, all you'll see
is a blank screen.)
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< 1 3 START 1 WAIT
{ # 0h # 0h } PVIEW
1 WAIT TEXT NEXT \>>
Access: PRG-NXT-OUT
Text Editors
There are two almost identical text editors.
(Note that there is a text editor listed when you press APPS. This is actually the command line for
entry of new material, although it does certain editing - unless you press a command key, which will be
acted on directly in this mode.)
EDITB is called by the down cursor when there's a string, a list, program, algebraic, on the stack. It
does not display codes such as the backslash or the string's double quotes. (For other objects, such as a
matrix or grob, it loads the appropriate viewer for these.)
EDIT is from LS-down cursor, and it will load whatever's on the stack into the ASCII plain-text editor.
It displays backslashes, quotes, etc.
The EDIT from the TOOL menu is actually EDITB.
For more information, see the TOOL/EDIT menu, EDIT/EDITB entries. Note that the TOOL menu's
editor commands appear only when you're in the editor. See also STARTED, EXITED, NOT.
Text to Grob
You can insert text strings or algebraic expressions into a graphic with GROB. (GROB = graphics
object.)
obj n grob
where n=1 for the minifont or 2 for the current font.
With the new grob on the stack, load the main graphic into the graphics editor and put the cursor where
you want the upper left of the added grob from Lev1. Press EDIT-NXT-NXT-REPL.
It's not an precise system and some guesswork about placement is needed.
For more detail, see the entry for GROB.
Access: PRG-NXT-GROB
INDEX
TICK
1. One tick of the real-time clock is 1/8192 sec. See TICKS.
2. Another name for the single- quote key, RS-EQW (49G) or the ' key (49G+/50G), also spelled "tic".
It allows names of vars or algebraic expressions to be placed on the stack without evaluation.
For example, if the dir has the stored program MYPROG, the following keystrokes place the name on
the stack:

' <MYPROG key> ENTER 'MYPROG'
3. The name for the marks along the X and Y axes of a plot. For changing the spacing, see ATICK.
TICKS
Returns system time as a binary integer - 8192 ticks/sec.
Example:
# 1D7BB75D4BB73h
Use the BR command in BASE to convert this to a real.
For elapsed time in seconds:
TICKS and then TICKS SWAP - BR 8192 /
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME
TIME/ TIME
TIME returns time in 24hr hh.mmss format. Not affected by flag -41 (12/24 hr).
hh.mmss
TIME sets system time using 24hr format (not affected by flag -41 (12/24 hr):
hh.mmss
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME
INDEX
TINC
Temperature increment - can use any temp units. Result uses the unit type on level 2. Note in the
example that 5_F is an increment in degrees, not a temperature.
initial delta initial delta
'20_C' '5_F' '22.7777_C'
Access: CAT,
117.02 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
TLINE
(Toggle line) Draws a line in PICT using XOR (coincident pixels are turned off). From stack:
(x1,y1) (x2,y2)
OR
{#m1 #n1} {#m2 #n2}
In graphics mode, draws a tline from a mark (times key) to the cursor. Coincident pixels are turned off.
To keep coincident pixels on, use LINE.
Access: PRG-NXT-PICT
Graphics-EDIT
TMENU
Displays temporary softkey menu - built-in, user-defined, or library. The menu stays in place until
another menu is selected. See also CUSTOM for more about menus. See also WAIT for displaying
any menu in a program.
n or list
Useful Menu Numbers:
0 Last menu
1 CST menu
2 Same as pressing VAR
93 Old HP48 SYMB menu
145, 1792 All branching program commands
To display PICT with a custom menu, use the format in the program below:
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< { list of vars } TMENU
{ # 0h # 0h } PVIEW 3 FREEZE \>>
Access: PRG-NXT-MODES-MENU,
LS+MODE-MENU
INDEX
TOFF
If the variable 'TOFF' exists in the Home (or current) dir and contains clock ticks as a binary integer, it
controls the time (with no keystrokes) until auto-shutoff. The default is 5 minutes.
There are 8192 ticks/second. The stored value should be converted to a binary integer.
Example: For 1 minute, 8192 * 60 = 491520, or as a binary integer using RB (BASE menu) #
491520d, or # 78000h in hex. Store it as 'TOFF'. (See the BASE entry for more on binaries.)
The following simple program takes the number of minutes until off and writes it to TOFF as a binary
integer. With no input, it puts a reminder on the stack.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<<
IFERR # 78000h * 'TOFF' STO
THEN DROP "Min. to Off"
END \>>
Example for 9 minutes: 9 # 438000h stored in TOFF The value will differ in
different bases.
The default auto-off without TOFF is 5 minutes. TOFF will not begin timing until any running user
program completes. For more control with auto-off, see STARTOFF.
Access: type in
TOOL/EDIT menu
Note that the TOOL key has two sets of commands, one for stack mode and another for the editor.
STACK MODE:
EDIT - this is actually EDITB, same as the down-cursor
VIEW - uses SCROLL to display stack objects
STACK - see Stack Commands
RCL - 'name' obj recalled to stack
PURGE - 'name' obj deleted
CLEAR - clears entire stack
CASCMD - two CAS help programs HELP that seem to be identical, though CASCMD will
accept a string as a search key:
"TAN" help for TAN2CS2 (Available only in stack mode.)
INDEX
EDIT/EDITB MODE:
Cursor keys:
RS+ means holding the shift key while pressing the other key. Note that there is no undo for
deletions.
RS-left to left of line
RS-right to right of line
LS-left to left of screen
LS-right to right of screen
RS-up to top of file
RS-down to end of file
LS-up to top of screen
LS-down to bottom of screen
Edit Menu Keys:
SKIP skip word left
RS+SKIP skip to left of line
SKIP skip word right
RS+SKIP skip to right of line
DEL delete word left
RS+DEL delete line left of cursor
DEL delete word right
RS+DEL delete line to right of cursor
DEL L delete line
INS insert mode on/off (insert is on when a white square is in the softkey label)
SEARCH/REPL menu:

FIND find string
REPL find and replace string - to delete, leave the Repl field empty
NEXT next occurrence
R replace, wait
R/N replace, go to next
ALL replace all
FAST REPLACE (Choose boxes only, flag -117 clear) replace all while freezing display
IFIND incremental search (finds characters as they're entered)
INDEX
GOTO menu:
(Use INFO to find line number, cursor position, etc.)
GOTOLINE jumps to desired line
GOTOPOS jumps to desired position (characters from beginning)
LABEL jumps to line starting with asterisk (*, times key). A scroll window
displays any number of choices and can do alphabetic searches, same as
CAT.
EDIT: edits highlighted choice using EDITB
BEG to beginning of highlight
END to end of highlight
Stack:
See entry for Stack Commands.
EXEC: Runs highlighted command, deletes command name
HALT: Suspends edit, displays stack - CONT resumes edit
STYLE menu:
Changes highlighted text to various styles. To remove the style, highlight and press the same style
twice. Codes are embedded in the text - they show as black squares in the Graph mode of SCROLL,
but don't show in the other editors.
You can see the codes if you do an ASCII (text) transfer to a PC. See TRANSFERRING.
The FONT key has no apparent purpose since it won't change anything.
INFO:
Displays page of statistics relating to the current file:
#lines: total in file
Xposition: chars from left
Yposition: chars from top
Position: total chars from beginning
Line size: chars per line
Text size: size of file, bytes
Stk size: size of file if on stack
Mem(KB): total free memory (Home dir)
Clip size: size of clipboard
Sel. size: size of object in clipboard
SLOW: Toggles slow/fast scrolling
INDEX
TOT
Sum of column(s) in statistics variable DAT.
n or [array]
Access: 96 MENU-1VAR
TPAR
Variable for settings of the Table feature, created by TBLSET. The default is:
{ 0. .1 0. 4. 0. TAB }
These are Start, Step, Auto, Zoom, small font, and the filename used by the Build feature.
TRACE
1. Stack: returns trace of square matrix.
[[matrix]] n
Access: MTH-MATRX-NORM-NXT
MATRICES-OPER-NXT-NXT
2. Graphics menu key: l-r cursor moves along function; up-dn cursors select other functions, if any.
TRAN
Transpose of a matrix. See also TRN, which is the same but adds conjugation of complex numbers.
[[matrix]] [[newmatrix]]
[[ 11 12 13 ]
[ 14 15 16 ]
[ 17 18 19 ]]
[[ 11 14 17 ]
[ 12 15 18 ]
[ 13 16 19 ]]
Access: MTH-MATRX-NORM-NXT,
MATRICES-OPER-NXT-NXT
INDEX
TRANSFERRING
See Translations for ASCII/Symbol translations. See also Conn4x basics.
The 49G has only a serial port. The 49G+ has USB and infrared (IR). The 50G has all three.
IO METHOD
This is set by flags:
-33s: Transfer via IR port
-33C: Transfer via wire
Leave cleared on HP49G.
-78s: HP50G only - Serial I/O if flag -34 is set
-78C: HP50G only - USB I/O if flag -34 is set
The USB port requires the use of the Conn4x communication program, included with the calc, or from
hpcalc.org.
HP50G Serial Port: there is currently insufficient information available.
Infrared
Note that the HP49G does not have infrared. There is very little documentation on using the infrared
port. Transfers between calculators is straightforward: press APPS, select I/O Functions, and choose
the desired method (Transfer is the most flexible). The two calculators should be very close together
(the range is measured in inches) with the triangular arrows at the top aligned.
The manuals claim that transfers to and from a PC with infrared are possible, but there isn't a
word on how to do it, and no one seems to have done it. The only information available is that the IR
port is IrDA-compliant.
There are three methods of transferring: ASCII Kermit, binary Kermit, and binary Xmodem. Settings
can be selected with APPS-I/O-Transfer or 104 MENU IOPAR.
The IR port is IrDA compliant and can be used between two HP49G+/HP50G calculators. The distance
between units is limited to a few inches (<5cm).
49G Wire Transfer
Xmodem gives the best speed, but its binaries may not be readable in a PC editor. There is no
translation of symbols unless you can use Conn4x.
Binary transfers will have a 13 char header added: "HPHP49... These are compatible with the HP50G,
but not the HP48 series. There are object fixers to remove this header, such as OT49's ObFx
(www.hpcalc. org).
ASCII Kermit is slow but gives the best readability on the PC. Special symbols are translated to ASCII
equivalents: program delimiters << become \<< and so on. See also TRANSIO/XLAT.
INDEX
ASCII Header
ASCII transfers have a header added:
%%HP: T(3)A(R)F(.);
This is Translate All, Angle=radians and Fraction Mark=Decimal Point .
USB
This requires HP's Conn4x program on the computer as noted above.
It uses binary Xmodem, but also does translations of HP symbols. There is also a text mode, best for
program, string, and text readability on the PC. It's the most versatile method (though it can't access the
SD card or other ports).
If Conn4x can't recognize your calculator when you click on File-Connect, try unplugging and
reconnecting the USB cable at either end. Try exiting and restarting. The calculator
must be in the Xmodem Server mode (RS-right cursor). Be sure you're not in the Kermit server
(RS+right cursor).
48 to 49 Transfers
UserRPL programs will usually run on the 49/50 series (see below for common problems).
HP48 libraries will not run on the 49/50 series.
For best results when importing an HP48 program, the 49/50 should be in Approximate mode. For
49/50 programs it should be in Exact mode.

Binary transfers from the older HP48 to the HP49 will have the header "HPHP48... and will be
unreadable. There are object fixers to remove this header, such as OT49's ObFx (www.hpcalc. org).
48 program Slow on the 49/50:
The 48 had only integers, while the 49/50 has both real and integer math - integers are noticeably
slower. To convert the integers to faster reals on the 49/50:
- Put the 49/50 into Real mode (RS+ENTER toggles this)
- Put the program on the stack and press the Down cursor to put it in the editor
- Press ENTER to return the program to the stack; this converts integers to reals
- Save the program back to its var

Another cause of 4849/50 slowness is EVAL, especially with large expressions and/or loops (EVAL
is more complex on the 49/50). You can convert evaluations to stack opeations, or you can try putting
the expr in a list (1 LST EVAL), since this will use the simpler version of EVAL.
Strings
ASCII is the best for transferring strings, but Xmodem can be used. Strings sent to the PC in binary are
readable, but there's no symbol translation unless you use Conn4x.
Xmodem strings from the PC and strings transferred with the SD card will have a carriage return (CR,
chr 13) added, resulting in black squares at the end of each line. Find and Replace will remove these
(Use CHARS to enter chr 13 into Find; leave Replace blank), and so will the IN program in the
Translations entry.
INDEX
Objects transferred in binary from the HP48 will often appear as uneditable strings beginning with
"HPHP48... The ObFx program in OT49 (www.hpcalc.org) can convert these to HP49 objects.
ARCHIVE
ARCHIVE uses binary Kermit regardless of settings. Use the filename format:
:IO: name
for infrared or wire transfers. For Conn4x, use the File-Backup command. Note that backups from the
calc's ARCHIVE command are not compatible with Conn4x's backups.
Pinouts
The four pins at the lower left of the HP49G connector are Shield, Transmit, Receive, and Signal
Ground (common). This is the same order as the HP48.
If the PC serial connector is the usual 9-pin (DB9), the pins are:
2 - Receive (Rx)
3 - Transmit (Tx)
5 - Signal ground
HP49G Cable
If you make your own cable, interchange pins 2 and 3 (ie, Transmit goes to Receive and vice versa).
Also, you can omit the Shield connection for short cables (2m or less). The little 4-pin connector for
CD-ROM audio will fit the HP48, and even the HP49G if you carefully fit it over the four pins at the
lower left of the 49's 10-pin connector. The same connector can often be found inside older mouse
models.
TRANSIO/XLAT
TRANSIO is the softkey version; XLAT is on the dialog box from APPS-I/O-Transfer. Both select
Kermit character translation of HP49 special symbols to ASCII during I/O. See TRANSFERRING.
Use 3 with TRANSIO and 255 with XLAT to translate all. Zero (or NONE) prevents translation. 1
and 2 provide less translation if that's required.
Xmodem will not do character translation unless you use HP's Conn4x comm program.
Translated symbols are preceded by a backslash: becomes \d. and so on. See the entry for
Translations for more detail.
n where n is 1-3
On the PC, ASCII Kermit files will have a header: %%HP: T(3)A(R)F(.); This is translate level,
Angle (Radians or Degrees), and Fraction mark (period or comma).
Access: 104 MENU-IOPAR,
APPS-I/O-Transfer
INDEX
Translations ASCII Symbols
The translation of HP special symbols into ASCII or vice versa in strings and programs is usually
handled by normal transfers using Kermit or Conn4x with XModem. However, some situations (such
as emulators) might require manual translation. See also TRANSFERRING, Conn4x basics.
IN/OUT programs
The IN/OUT programs below were posted to comp.sys.hp48 by John H Meyers. They will convert
ASCII to symbols or vice versa in strings and UsrRPL programs.
They will also remove carriage returns (chr 13), which show in text files as black squares at
the end of lines. They work with all of the HP48, 49, and 50 series.
IN program
"ASCII string" "HP49 symbols"
"\<< \=/ \>>"
If there's a header similar to:
%%HP: T(3)A(R)F(.);
it should be deleted before running the program.
Symbols can be included in strings using the 3-digit ASCII number from CHARS and a backslash; eg:
"angle \128" "angle "
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< IFERR \->STR 3 TRANSIO RCLF
SIZE 3 > # 2F34Dh # 3016Bh IFTE
SYSEVAL + STR\->
THEN \"ASCII string\"
END \>>
OUT program
Can be used for translation if you're not using a normal transfer (such as Conn4x).
"HP49 symbols" "ASCII string"
"\<< \=/ \>>"
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< IFERR STD 64 STWS \->STR 3
TRANSIO RCLF SIZE 3 > # 2F34Fh
# 2FEC9h IFTE SYSEVAL
THEN \"HP symbols\"
END \>>
INDEX
ASCII/Symbol List 128-255
Chars below 128 don't require translation. Their ASCII numbers can be obtained from the CHARS
map (RS-EVAL). Special thanks to the creator of the HP48 TrueType font, who signs himself only as
Spiros on hpcalc.org. Not all of the characters are in it, so I've taken some liberties to approximate
several of them.
The chart shows the ASCII number, the calculator symbol, and the ASCII conversion symbol.
128 \<) 171 \<< 214 \214
129 \x- 172 \172 215 \.x
130 7 \.V 173 - \173 216 \O/
131 1 \v/ 174 \174 217 \217
132 J \.S 175 \175 218 \218
133 Z \GS 176 \^o 219 \219
134 \|> 177 \177 220 \220
135 H \pi 178 \178 221 \221
136 \.d 179

\179 222 \222

137 \<= 180 \180 223 \Gb
138 \>= 181 \Gm 224 \224
139 \ =/ 182 \182 225 \225
140 o \Ga 183 \183 226 \226
141 \-> 184 \184 227 \227
142 \<- 185 \185 228 \228
143 \|v 186 \186 229 \229
144 T \|^ 187 \>> 230 \230 230 actually looks like a
145 \Gg 188 \188 231 \231 backwards swastika
146 o \Gd 189 \189 232 \232
147 \ Ge 190 \190 233 \233
148 | \Gn 191 \191 234 \234
149 d \Gh 192 \ 192 235 \235
150 \Gl 193 \193 236 \236
151 f \Gr 194 \194 237 \237
152 J \Gs 195 \195 238 \238
153 I \Gt 196 \196 239 \239
154 \Gw 197 \197 240 \240
155 = \GD 198 \198 241 \241
156 \PI 199 \199 242 \242
157 U \GW 200 \200 243 243
158 \[] 201 \201 244 \244
159 \oo 202 \202 245 \245
160 \160 203 \203 246 \246
161 i \161 204 \204 247 \:-
162 \162 205 \205 248 \248
163 \163 206 \206 249 \249
164 \164 207 \207 250 \250
165 \165 208 \208 251 \251
INDEX
166 \166 209 \209 252 \252
167 \167 210 \210 253 \253
168 I \168 211 \211 254 \254
169 \169 212 \212 255 \255
170 \170 213 \213
TRIG keys
SIN, COS, TAN
These three work the same way. In stack mode, they directly return the value for an integer or real, in
the current angle measure:
n value
In an expression, they return funct( ) and wait for you to enter the desired var. Example:
'X+Y+SIN( )'
Flags 2 and 3 should be clear for symbolic mode.
If the var is already on the stack, they form an expression:
'X' COS 'COS(X)'
INVERSE FUNCTIONS
ASIN, ACOS, ATAN are also called arcsine or SIN^-1, etc. These return the angle for a given
numerical trig value:
n angle
.707106781187 ACOS 45.
The above means that 45 degrees is the angle whose cosine is .707106781187.
For an algebraic expression, they work the same way as SIN, COS, TAN.
RECIPROCAL FUNCTIONS
There are no direct keys for these, but simple programs can be stored if needed for secant, cosecant and
cotangent:
<< SIN INV >> 'SEC' STO
<< COS INV >> 'CSC' STO
<< TAN INV >> 'COT' STO
INDEX
HYPERBOLIC FUNCTIONS
SINH returns the hyperbolic sine of a numeric angle:
n value
The formula is (e^x-e^-x)/2. In algebraics, it works the same way as other trig keys:
'X' 'SINH(X)'
COSH returns the hyperbolic cosine of a numeric angle:
n value
The formula is (e^x+e^-x)/2. In algebraics, it works the same way as SINH.
TANH returns the hyperbolic tangent of a numeric angle:
n value
The formula is sinh(x)/cosh(x). In algebraics, it works the same way as SINH.
ASINH, ACOSH and ATANH return the angle in the same way as ASIN, etc:
hyperbolic_n angle

'ASINH( )'

'X' ASINH 'ASINH(X)'
Access: MTH-HYP
TRN
Conjugate transpose of a matrix. See also TRAN which is the same without the complex conjugation.
[[matrix]] [[newmatrix]]
Real number example:
[[ 1 2 3 ]
[ 4 5 6 ]] [[ 1. 4. ]
[ 2. 5. ]
[ 3. 6. ]]
INDEX
Complex number example:
[[ '(1,2)' '(2,3)' ]
[ '(3,2)' '(3,4)' ]] [[ '1+2*-i' '3+2*-i' ]
[ '2+3*-i' '3+4*-i' ]]
In Complex and Approx modes, NUM will convert this result to:
[[ (1.,-2.) (3.,-2.) ]
[ (2.,-3.) (3.,-4.) ]]
Access: MTH-MATRIX-MAKE
TRNC
Truncates number of decimal places and internal precision of a number; that is, it actually removes
digits rather than rounding off the display. Does not affect the current number format.
To round without losing the internal precision, use a format such as FIX (see Mode-FMT menu).
real n real to n places
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT-NXT
TRUTH
Sets the plot type to Truth and modifies or creates PPAR. A pixel is plotted whenever the values
supplied to the variables result in a true (non-zero) condition. Since it tests every pixel, it can be slow.
Omitting pixels can speed it up - see the entry for RES.
See also Plots/PLOT for more on general plotting.
The following example is adapted from the HP48 User's Guide.
Plot the inequalities X+Y2, 4YX+8, 2Y3X-6.
Store the program below in EQ.

%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
'X+Y\>=2 AND 4*Y\<=X+8 AND 2*Y\>=3*X-6'
Press LS+2D/3D (Plot Setup) and enter:
Type: Truth Angle Mode: any
EQ: 'X+Y2 AND etc (This will already be present)
Indep: 'X' Depend:'Y'
H-Tick:10 V-Tick:10
Check the Pixel field
The pixel method for Truth
plots.
INDEX
Press LS+WIN (Plot Window) and enter:
H-View: -1 5
V-View: -1 4
Indep Low: 0 High: 4
Step: Default _Pixels
Depnd Low: Default High: Default (A zero gives Default)

Press Erase, Draw. Note that this type of plot is very slow (about 5
minutes), even with the default Step value of every second pixel.
A much faster method is to replace all the inequality signs with equals
signs, make a list of the equations for EQ, and plot it as a CONIC. Plot
time is ~10s.
{'X+Y=2' '4*Y=X+8' '2*Y=3*X-6'}
The triangle enclosed by the lines is the solution set for the inequalities (not the set of equalities, which
was only for plotting convenience).
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
82 MENU
TSTR
Readable string from DATE and TIME keys.

(flag -42 clear)
DATE TIME "day mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ssA/P"
(flag -42 set)
DATE TIME "day dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ssA/P"
Access: RS-TIME-TOOLS,
RS+TIME,
LS-PRG-NXT-NXT-TIME
TVARS
Returns list of vars in the current dir with contents that match a specified type. See also TYPE.
typenumber {list}
OR
{typenumbers} {list}
Returns { } if there are no matches.
Access: PRG-MEM-DIR-NXT
The Conic method for truth
plots.
INDEX
TVM
Time Value of Money solver. This uses the SOLVR format rather than the INFORM window of LS-
FINANCE. See FINANCE Solver for more details.
The variables are:
N I%YR PV PMT PYR FV

These are:

N # of monthly payments
I%YR interest in %/year (ie, 4.5% is 4.5, not .045)
PV present value; principal
PMT monthly payment
PYR payments/year (typ. 12)
FV future value
PMTs are negative for withdrawals or pmts against a loan; a positive value indicates extra money being
deposited per period.
By default the interest is calculated at the end of the period. To change this, use either flag 14 or
TVMBEG/TVMEND, below.

Enter the known values and press the associated key. Solve for the desired value with LS-key. Exit with
VAR; vars must be deleted manually.
See also AMORT/AMOR.
Access: 79 MENU-SOLVR
TVMBEG
Sets the Time Value of Money solver calculations to the beginning of the payment period (see TVM
above for more information ). Called BEG (a toggle) in 79 MENU (the solver); a white square in the
key label means 'beginning'.
Flag -14 also controls this.
Access: 79 MENU
TVMEND
Sets the Time Value of Money solver calculations to the end of the payment period (see TVM above
for more information). Called BEG (a toggle) in 79 MENU (the solver); a white square in the key label
means 'beginning', and no square means 'end'. Flag -14 also controls this.
Access: RS+7-TVM (79 MENU),BEG
INDEX
TVMROOT
Solves for a Time Value of Money variable using the other TVM variables. See TVM for entering
required values.
'TVMvarname' result
The variables are:
N I%YR PV PMT PYR FV
Access: RS+7-TVM (79 MENU)
2D/3D
The plot setup screen. Creates vars EQ, PPAR as required. Can be
used instead of Y=. If you make any changes and decide not to plot,
ENTER saves and exits - ON discards the changes. See also WIN,
Plots for more. (Hold LS while pressing 2D/3D.)
Type: sets a wide variety of plot types, which must have a
compatible expression in EQ. Use the CHOOS key, or cycle through
the choices with the +/- key.
Angle symbol: sets degrees, radians, or grads, the same as MODE-Angle Measure.
EQ: displays the expr in the var EQ. Pressing EDIT displays this in the Equation Writer. Pressing
EDIT again allows an ASCII edit. Press ENTER as required to return to LS+2D/3D, or ON to cancel.
Multiple eqs must be in a list. Edits will be ASCII.
Indep: the independent var, which must agree with the var in the EQ expr. The default is X.
Depnd: dependent var - appears for plot types with two vars, such as Conic.
Simult: if checked, plots multiple expressions simultaneously. They must be in a list in EQ. This is the
same as flag -28.
Connect: if checked, joins the plotted pixels into a smooth line. If not, the plot shows as dots according
to the Step setting in LS+WIN (see also RES).
H-tick,V-tick: these set the axis tick mark spacing. The default is ten pixels apart. If Pixels is
unchecked, the spacing is 10 times the entered value between ticks. See also ATICK.
Access: LS+F4,
CALC-GRAPH-2D/3D
INDEX
256 MENU
Thanks to Joe Horn, who collected these for the comp.sys.hp48 newsgroup. There has been some
editing for HLP49.
NOTE: some of these tools have no error-checking and can crash the calculator if used without the
proper arguments. A basic knowledge of SysRPL programming is essential.
Also note that there is much confusion about starting menu 256. It would seem that with newer ROMs
such as v2.09, the menu attaches automatically. Try this: press APPS and look for "Development lib". If
it's there, 256 is ready to use by pressing it or running 256 MENU.
If not, follow the instructions below.
To have its commands available from anywhere, type 256 ATTACH from the Home dir first. To make
this permanent, put the Attach statement in STARTUP in the Home dir (see the entry for STARTUP).
Some programs, such as OT49, attach it automatically on startup. Once it's attached, run it with
APPS-Development_lib or 256 MENU.
256 MENU
H To Hex
Same as ASC in the 48. Converts object to hex string:
"ABC" "C2A20B0000142434"
H From Hex
Converts a hex string to an object.
"C2A20B0000142434" "ABC"
A To Address
Finds the address of an object, typically a global name or string.
obj #address
A From Address
Gets the object at the specified address.
#address obj
AH Address to Hex
Converts #12345h to "54321".
HA Hex to Address
Converts "54321" to #12345h.
CD To Code
Turns a string of hex digits into a Code object.
"C2A20B0000142434" Code
CD Code Out
Turns a Code object into a string of hex digits.
Code "C2A20B0000142434"
INDEX
SH String to Hex
Changes "Hi!" into "849612".
HS Hex to String
Changes "849612" into "Hi!".
In the next four, n = number of elements.
LST Make List
Composite or meta-obj n list
ALG Make Algebraic
Composite or meta-obj n algebraic
PRG Make Program
Composite or meta-ob n program
COMP Composite Out
Composite meta-object n
Similar to OBJ for algebraics, but separates more elements.
RAM To RAM
Dumps any ROM object into RAM.
SREV String Reverse
Turns strings backwards.
"ABC" "CBA"
POKE
Pokes raw hex into RAM. Use with caution.
PEEK
Extracts the raw hex as a string at any address. (Address on level 2, bytes to get as binary integer on
level 1.)
APEEK
Extracts 5 bytes of raw hex as a binary number at any address.
R~SB
Real System Binary.
Converts reals to bints & back.
SB~B
System Binary Binary.
Bints to user binaries & back.
LR~R
Long Real Real.
INDEX
S~N
String Name. Change "ABC" to 'ABC' & back. Use this to create "illegal" global names:
"45ABC" '45ABC'
The Filer will delete variables with names like this - PURGE won't work because you can't put the
name on the stack.
LC~C Complex type
Long Complex Complex
ASM Assembly Out
Disassembles code objects into source code.
BetaTesting - names of testers
CRLIB
Create Library. When dir is ready, run. Puts lib on stack. See the CRLIB entry for details.
CRC
Returns CRC of string as bint. Use SB~B to convert to user binary.
MAKESTR
Makes string n chars long, with newline after every 7.
10 "ABCDEFG
AB"
SERIAL
Returns internal serial number, which is not the same as the external.
ASM
Compiles a source code string into object code. The last char in the string must be @ (AT symbol) on a
line by itself.
ER
Error handler for ASM. It provides error messages if ASM errors. ASM2 from menu 257 is similar to:
<< IFERR ASM THEN ER END >>
S2
Disassembles a binary object into source code in hex. Makes SysRPL code into a string for editing.
XLIB~
Libnum cmdnum XLIB nums
eg: XLIB 1759 3 1759 3
or: 1759 3 XLIB 1759 3
INDEX
Note on the next three: see Chapter Six of the 49G+ Advanced User Reference for information on
ARM programming. Available for download from hpcalc.org.
ARM
The ARM disassembler converts ARM assembly to a source string.
Level 2
Binary integer (start address of the memory area to disassemble)
Level 1
Binary integer end address
PEEKARM
Memory read: reads nibbles from a specified address in memory in the ARM address space.
Level 2
Binary integer (address)
Level 1
Binary Integer (number of bytes to read)
POKEARM
Memory write command. Writes bytes in ARM memory address space.
Note: You cannot write data in the Flash ROM using this command.
Level 2
String (Data to write in hex)
Level 1
Binary integer (Address where to write)
TYPE
Returns type number of object on Level 1.
obj typenumber
OBJECT User SysRPL
any -- 0
real number 0 1
complex 1 2
string 2 3
real array, matrix 3 4
complex array 4 4
list 5 5
global name 6 6
local name 7 7
program/seco 8 8
algebraic/sym 9 9
class (usr 6,7,9) -- A
INDEX
user binary (hxs) 10 B
grob 11 C
tagged obj 12 D
unit obj 13 E
XLIB name 14 F
ROMPTR 14 F
directory 15 2F
library 16 8F
backup obj 17 9F
function 18 8
command 19 8
sys binary (bint) 20 1F
long real 21 3F
long complex 22 4F
linked array 23 5F
char 24 6F
code 25 7F
library data 26 AF
minifont 27 DF
integer 28 FF
sym/int arry,matrix 29 4
font 30 CF
extended obj 31 EF
The SysRPL values above when used with Dispatch commands should be in the form of a bint (eg,
BINT9) if it exists, or a hex number (eg, #B, without the usual "h").
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT-NXT,
PRG-TEST-NXT
UBASE
Converts unit object to SI base units.
unit_obj SI base units
'1_dyn' '.00001_kg*m/s^2'
You can convert the returned SI value to English units using UFACT by typing in the equivalent
English compound unit:
'1_lbf' UBASE '4.4482_kg*m/s^2'
'4.4482_kg*m/s^2' '1_lb*ft'
UFACT '32.1740_lb*ft/s^2'
Access: UNITS-TOOLS
INDEX
UFACT
Factors Lev 1 unit out of Lev 2 unit obj.
A_unit1 B_unit2 C_unit1unit2

'.762_m/s' '1_ft' '2.5_ft/s'
'6.6726E-11_m^3/(s^2*kg)' '1_N' '6.6726E-11_N*m^2/kg^2'
See also UBASE for a way to convert SI base values to English using UFACT.
Access: UNITS-TOOLS
UNBIND
A CAT command that clears local variables created in memory by LOCAL. Local vars should have
their values in the form:

'A=55' same
OR
{'A=55' 'B=65'} {'B=65' 'A=55'}
It often didn't work consistently on the 49G, but the 49G+/50G seems stable, though you might have to
turn off UNDO with LS+MODE-MISC-STK.
An ON+C reboot will also clear the local vars.
If there are no local variables, a "cannot unbind" error msg will appear.

Access: CAT (not typed in)
UNDO
Replaces the currrent stack with a copy of the stack from before the last operation.
Does not undo operations such as PURGE, settings, etc. Not a programmable command. The last-
stack option must be enabled (MODE or LS+MODE-MISC-STK).
The Undo buffer can sometimes contain large objects that take up a lot of memory. You can empty the
buffer by pressing LS+MODE-MISC. Press STK twice to turn Undo off and then on again. STK is also
available from MODE and PRG-MODES-MISC.
Access: UNDO key (RS-M)
INDEX
UNIT
Creates unit object from real or integer and unit expression.
x y_unit x_unit
5.1 1_m 5.1_m
Any y value is discarded.
You can also use the times key, but y values are not discarded:
5.1 3.5_mm 17.85_mm
Access: UNITS-TOOLS
Unit basics
You can attach any SI unit to a number with the UNITS menu. Enter the number and press the desired
unit key.
To convert one unit to another, put the first unit on the stack and press the left-shifted new unit. For
example, to convert inches to centimetres:
'5.1_in' LS-cm '12.954_cm'
You can also type in any unit with the underscore (RS-minus), even if the unit is not in the menus.
5.5_anyunit
Units will accept any SI prefix, even if it isn't listed in the menus. For example, megohms:
1_
Add an M for 1_M
Convert back to ohms: 1000000_
A list of SI prefixes is in the HP49G+ User's Guide, p. 3-24, or the HP50G User's Guide, p. 3-10.
Units can be removed with UVAL. (Units can cause unexpected results in calculating, especially with
solvers and physical constants.)
The Equation Writer does not support units.
The unit tools from RS-UNITS have their own entries. See CONVERT, UBASE, UFACT, UNIT.
Access: RS-UNITS
INDEX
USER
Changes the keyboard to User mode, allowing user-defined commands that have been assigned to keys.
Unassigned keys retain their normal function (see DELKEYS for locking out unassigned keys).
In the one-time User mode, the annunciator 1US appears. The mode can be locked on - see flags -61
and -62. The annunciator is then USR.
See also ASN, Custom Enter, DELKEYS, Key Numbers, RCLKEYS, STOKEYS.
Example: assign the PURGE command to the DEL key (LS-Bksp) (before making any changes to an
existing keylist, store the keylist from RCLKEYS in a var - if necessary you can then restore the
original assignments with this list and STOKEYS).
The key number for DEL is 45.2.
Enter: << PURGE >> 45.2
and press ASN (PRG-MODES-KEYS).
To use, type LS-USER-DEL.
To delete this key assignment, enter 45.2 and press DELKEYS.
Note that key assignments do not work in the editor or other programs unless the assignment has the
SysRpl command TakeOver. An easy way to do this is the TO? function from the Keyman library
(www.hpcalc.org):
<< pgmname >> TO? keynum ASN
Access: LS-ALPHA, flag -62
UTPC
Probability that a chi-squared random variable is > x given n degrees of freedom.
n x utpc(n,x)
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB-NXT
UTPF
Probability that a Snedecor's random variable is > x. n1 and n2 are the numerator and denominator
degrees of freedom of the F distribution.
n1 n2 x utpf(n1,n2,x)
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB-NXT
INDEX
UTPN
Probability that a normal random variable is > x. m and v are the MEAN and variance (see VAR) of the
normal distribution.
m v x utpn(m,v,x)
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB-NXT
UTPT
Probability that a Student's random variable is > x, given n degrees of freedom.
n x utpt(n,x)
Access: MTH-NXT-PROB-NXT
UVAL
Returns numerical part of unit object.
x_unit x
Units can sometimes cause errors in user programs, especially with constants in the equation solvers.
Units can be removed from constants with UVAL:
UVAL(CONST(var))
They can be prevented by setting user flag 61 (positive flag number - see the CONST entry).
Access: UNITS-TOOLS
V , V2, V3
See also Arrays/vectors.
V
Separates a vector or complex number. Also works with arrays.
[1. 2.] 1. 2.
[10 45] 10. 45.
(1.,2.) 1. 2.
Note that vectors are always in rectangular mode internally - the polar mode is only on the display:
[5. 53.1301] OBJ 3. 4. {2.}
However, polar coords can be kept by using V in polar mode:
[5. 53.1301] V 5. 53.1301
INDEX
V2
Creates a 2D vector from two reals if flag -19 is clear. If set, it creates a complex number.
1. 2. [1. 2.] (-19 clear)
1. 2. (1.,2.) (-19 set)
Vectors change in the display between rectangular and polar mode, while arrays stay the same.
Rectangular mode:
1. 2. [1. 2.]
Polar mode:
1. 2. [2.2360 63.4349]
See CYLIN for an example of using V2.
V3
Creates 3D vectors.
Rectangular mode:
1. 2. 3. [1. 2. 3.]
Polar mode:
1. 2. 3. [2.2360 63.4349 3.]
Access: MTH-VECTR
VAR
1. The VAR key displays the current softkey menu. It's also used to exit from the single or multiple
equation solvers. In programming, 2 MENU is the same as pressing VAR.
Access: VAR key
2. Returns sample variance using the column(s) in the statistics variable DAT. For the population
variance, see PVAR.
n or [array]
Access: STAT-Single-var,
96 MENU-1VAR
3. HP's term for both the variables in algebraics (A,B, X, Y, etc) and the named, stored object using
the STO command.
obj 'varname' STO stored var
Note that varnames are case-sensitive - 'x' and 'X' are two different variables.
The stored object is the same as a file in computers. It's called a global variable. A point of
confusion: the single-quote format is used for both varnames ('MYVAR') and for algebraics ('X^2+5').
For this reason, names can't begin with a number (but see S~N in 256 MENU).
INDEX
Another type is the local variable, which is created by programs and cleared when the program exits.
See also LOCAL, Assign for more detail.
VARS
Returns list of variables in current dir, which can be used to reorder the dir with the ORDER
command.
{ list of vars }
Use Cut and Paste to move varnames to the desired positions in the list. Note that ORDER will delete
vars with missing names.
Access: PRG-MEM-DIR-NXT
VER/VERSION
VER: CAS version number.
VERSION: system version number.
The ON+D diagnostic screen will return a more complete system number than VERSION and includes
the build number. Use ON+C to exit. See also ON+ Codes.
Access: CAT
VISIT/VISITB
Similar to EDIT/EDITB, included for compatibility with HP48SX programs.
'name'
The object referenced by 'name' must be stored in a variable in the current dir (not on the stack as with
EDIT).
If ENTER is pressed, changes will be written to the 'name' variable, which never appears on the stack.
On the 49/50 series, the LS+Down cursor is similar to the Down cursor (which is EDITB), but can act
as VISITB in that it edits the contents of a named var rather than the varname:
Down LS+Down

name edits name edits content
obj edits obj edits obj
Access: 2269 MENU, CAT
INDEX
VPAR
Variable containing the view parameters for 3D plots and special-purpose plots such as
SLOPEFIELD. It's created automatically in the current dir. Since VPAR is erased and rewritten each
time, it appears at the beginning of the varnames in the current dir.
In the parameters list below, numbers in brackets are the default values. These are taken from
HP49G+ v2.09 and may not agree with HP docs. All parameters may not appear in the plot window
(LS+WIN).
{
1-2
(Xleft, Xright) (XVOL) width of the view volume. (-1, 1)
3-4
(Yfar, Ynear) (YVOL) depth of the view volume. (-1, 1)
5-6
(Zlow, Zhigh) (ZVOL) height of the view volume. (-1, 1)
7-8
(XXleft, XXright) (XXRNG) the width of the input plane (domain). Used by GRIDMAP and
PARSURFACE (Pr-Surface). (-1, 1)
9-10
(YYfar, YYnear) (YYRNG) the depth of the input plane (domain). Used by GRIDMAP and
PARSURFACE. (-1, 1)
11-12-13
(XE, YE, ZE) (EYEPT) the point from which the plot is viewed. (0, -2, 0) (Pressing Reset in
LS+WIN may show 0,0,0)
14-15
(Xstep (Indep), Ystep (Depnd)) (NUMX/NUMY) the increments between X-coordinates and
Y-coordinates. (10, 8)
Used instead of (or with) RES.
}
VTYPE
Returns the object type in a specified variable. See also TYPE.
'varname' n
Access: PRG-TYPE-NXT-NXT
INDEX
WAIT
Suspends operation for n seconds. If n=0, waits for keypress and returns keynumber (except alpha and
shift keys).
If n=-1, waits for keypress and displays the current menu. MENU (or TMENU) and WAIT can be
used in a program to display any menu (menus are usually not updated until the program ends).
Follow with DROP if the keynumber isn't needed.
Example: 41 MENU -1 WAIT DROP in a program displays the DBUG menu when a key is pressed.
n
0 keynumber
-1 keynumber,displays menu
See also the Key Numbers entry.
Error messages can be displayed for a specified time in seconds using WAIT - see STARTERR.
The WAIT command sometimes fails in programming - see Helptext for an example and START for a
substitute.
Access: PRG-NXT-IN
WHERE ( | )
WHERE substitutes value(s) for symbol(s) in an expression.
expr {symb val ...} newexpr
'x+y' {x 2} '2+y'
'A+B' { A 2 B 3 } '2+3'
'X^2+5' {X 3} 3^2+5
EVAL or NUM will simplify the numerical expressions.
It can also be used in algebraics in the textbook sense:
'X^3|(X=2)'
The above reads "X to the third where X equals 2". The EVAL/NUM commands will evaluate it.
Access: RS-TOOL
INDEX
WHILE
Starts conditional repeat loop.
WHILE <condition> REPEAT <procedure> END
Repeats the procedure as long as the condition returns a non-zero value. It terminates when the
condition returns zero.
If the condition never returns zero, you can stop the loop with ON (sometimes repeatedly).
Typing aid: when the WHILE dir is displayed (LS-PRG-BRCH), these are available:
LS-WHILE WHILE
REPEAT
END
The example below drops all stack objects but the last.
<< WHILE DEPTH 1 > REPEAT DROP END >>
Access: PRG-BRCH
WIN
A screen for entering vertical and horizontal display and plot ranges (the range plotted can be larger or
smaller than the displayed range).
The default plot type is a FUNCTION, which is described below. Other plot types are similar.
H-View:
This is the plot width. The Default plot range is not shown in numbers - it's -6.5 to 6.5. The
programmable version is XRNG.
V-View:
This is the plot height. The default is 4 (top) to -3.9. The programmable version is YRNG.
Indep Low,High:
This is the plot range. The default values are the same as the values in H-View. The programmable
version is INDEP. For example, to plot only from the origin to the right side, change Indep Low to
zero.
Step:
This sets the resolution - how many pixels will be plotted. The default is every 2nd pixel. The
programmable version is RES.
Pixels:
If this is checked, the number in Step is the number of pixels plotted. A value of 3 (every 3rd pixel)
INDEX
gives rapid plots with acceptable resolution.
If gaps appear in some plots, uncheck this and enter .05 or smaller. Plots will be slower.
Defaults can be restored to fields Step and Indep by entering a zero.
The NXT key shows a softkey menu with RESET (restores defaults) and CALC (returns to stack for
calculating). The STS (status?) key allows full 7-line stack mode on the next entry. Pressing it again
gives a brief description of which field the results will be passed to when OK is pressed.
Access: LS+F2
WIREFRAME
Sets the plot type to Wireframe and modifies or creates PPAR. See also Plots for more on general
plotting.
Wireframe draws an oblique-view 3D model of the surface of Z=F(x,y). The sampling grid is
determined by the base of the View Volume (Xleft,Xright,Ynear, Yfar).
Example: Plot 'X^3.*Y-X*Y^3.' as a wireframe.
Press LS+2D/3D and enter:
EQ: X^3.*Y-X*Y^3. RAD
Indep: 'X' Depnd:'Y'
Press LS+WIN and enter:
X-left: -1. X-Right: 1.
Y-Near: -1. Y-Far: 1.
Z-Low: -.4 Z-High: .4
XE: 0. YE: -2. ZE: 1.
Step Indep: 12. Depnd: 12.
Press Erase and Draw.
A much better discussion of plotting than in the HP49 manual is in the HP48 Series User's Guide,
available for free downloading by searching www.hpcalc.org.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type,
85 MENU
INDEX
WSLOG
Returns four strings giving the time and date of the last four warmstarts (reboots) caused by anything
other than ON+C.
The meaning of the first number or letter is (from a post on comp.sys.hp48, and may not be up to date):
0 - coma exit (HP48)
1 - low battery shutdown
2 - I/O timeout error
3 - run through addr 0
4 - corrupt time
5 - port data corrupt
6 - not used
7 - corrupt word in RAM
8 - not used
9 - alarm list corrupt
A - RPL jump to addr 0
B - card removed (HP48)
C - hardware reset
D - RPL ERRTRAP not found
E - corrupt config table
F - RAM card pulled (HP48)
Access: CAT
XCOL
Sets the independent-var column for the matrix in

PAR (the default for X is column 1). The values are

used by the plotter - see the entry for LR. See also COL, YCOL.
n
The format of PAR is: { indep depen y-int slope }.
Access: 96 MENU-PAR
XGET
Retrieves a file from a remote Xmodem server.
'name'
Access: CAT
XLAT
See the entry for TRANSIO/XLAT.
INDEX
XMIT
Transmits through selected I/O without using Kermit; returns error digit.
"string" 0/1
Timeout is 10 seconds, or can be set by STIME:
n
where n is a real from 0 to 24.5. If n=0, it waits indefinitely.
Access: 104 MENU-SERIAL
XOR
Logical exclusive OR of 2 arguments. The ones on the left side below can be any non-zero value. The
result is 1 if either input is 1, but not both.
1 1 0
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
Reals or integers are taken as zero or non-zero:
5 0 1.
5 3 0.
0 0 0.
In bitwise calculations with user binary integers, processing is done bit by corresponding bit, so that
# 110001b # 101001b # 11000b
is the same as
110001
101001
------
011000
BASE should be in the BIN mode. Leading zeros are not displayed on the stack.
It can be used in an algebraic:
'X>2 XOR Y<4'
This will return 1 or 0 when evaluated, depending on the values stored in X and Y.
INDEX
It can be used in programming to accept one or the other of two conditions, but not both:
IF <test1> <test2> XOR THEN...

The THEN command proceeds only if one of the tests is non-zero.
Access: PRG-TEST-NXT,
BASE-NXT-LOGIC
XPON
Returns exponent part of argument using E notation.
2.E15 15.
For other exponent notation, returns the E equivalent exponent:
'13^16' 17.
since 13^16 = 6.65416609183E17. See also MANT.
Access: MTH-REAL-NXT
XPUT
Sends a file by Xmodem to a remote Xmodem server.
'name'
Access: CAT
XRECV
Receives a file from a remote server using Xmodem.
'name'
Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
104 MENU
XRNG
Sets X-axis display range for plots. Default is -6.5 to 6.5. See also PPAR, YRNG.
Xmin Xmax
-5 5
This is the programmable version of H-View in LS+WIN. To set the plot range separately, see INDEP .
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
INDEX
XROOT
X root of Y. Program/algebraic version:
'XROOT(X,Y)'
y x
x
y
Access: RS-X
XSEND
Sends file via Xmodem.
'name'
Access: APPS-I/O-Transfer,
Filer,
104 MENU
XSERV
Starts Xmodem server mode. The command can be entered with the shortcut below, typed in, or
selected from CAT.
For the Kermit server, press RS+right cursor.
Access: RS-right cursor
XVOL
Sets width of view volume in 3D - called X-Left, X-Right in LS+WIN 3D plots.
See also the entry for VPAR, where it appears as variables 1 and 2.
X-Left X-Right
Access: LS+WIN
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
XXRNG
Sets X range of input plane (domain) for GRIDMAP and PARSURFACE (Pr-Surface). Called
XLeft, XRight in LS+WIN.
Xmin Xmax
INDEX
See also the entry for VPAR.
Access: LS+WIN
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
YCOL
Sets the dependent-var column for the matrix in

PAR (the default for Y is column 2). The values are

used by the plotter - see the entry for LR. See also COL, XCOL.
n
The format of PAR is: { indep depen y-int slope }.
Access: 96 MENU-PAR
Y=
Allows creation, selection, editing of the function(s) in EQ and Y(n)
variables, used for plotting. Creates EQ, PPAR, and the Y(n) vars as
needed.
Only functions can be plotted. For other plot types, use LS+2D/3D. See
also the entry for Plots for more about functions.
If EQ already exists and contains functions, they will also display and plot, but are not stored using the
Y system unless they were previously made with Y=.
If the equation list EQ doesn't exist, it will say No Equation. Press ADD. Pressing ADD will start
the Equation Writer with the left side Y1(X)=. Enter the first one, for example SIN(X), and press
ENTER to return to Y=.
Plotting this will create EQ, which will contain {Y1(X)}, and var Y1, which will contain the program
<< X 'SIN(X)' >>.
Repeat as required to create Y2, Y3, and so on. Each Yn(X) is added to the list in EQ.
Note that DRAW plots all the equations showing in Y=. To plot only certain ones, delete the unwanted
ones with DEL (see below). Restore with CHOOSE.
Note also that Y= has no control over plot parameters - use LS+2D/3D or the plot screen for this.
DEL removes the highlighted equation from the list and from EQ. It does not delete the Y var from the
dir.
CHOOSE displays all the dir's Y equations that are not in EQ. Use it to restore equations removed by
DEL.
INDEX
ERASE clears the plot screen.
DRAW plots all the listed eqs.
MOVE, MOVE let you set the order of the eqs.
CLEAR removes all equations. You can restore any or all with CHOOSE.
Access: LS+F1
YRNG
Sets Y-axis display range for plots. Default is 4 to -3.9. See also PPAR, XRNG. This is the
programmable version of V-view in LS+WIN. See also DEPND.
Ymin Ymax
2 -2
Access: 81 MENU-PPAR
LS+WIN-V-View
YSLICE
Sets the plot type to Yslice and modifies or creates VPAR, PPAR.
LS+2D/3D is normally used to store an expression in EQ and LS+WIN is used to set the view. YSLICE
is mainly for programming.
When run with DRAW, Yslice creates eight different samples (the default - change this with LS+WIN-
Depnd, or NUMY) and then animates them.
The Save Animation feature in LS+2D/3D doesn't seem to do anything - if you use the program
version, the 8 grobs will be on the stack, or you can exit 2D/3D and run DRAW (CAT, 81 MENU)
instead of 2D/3D's DRAW.
The program syntax is:
YSLICE 'expr' STEQ DRAW
STEQ can be followed by -n n ZVOL to change the plot size (these are Z-Low and Z-High in
LS+WIN) - small numbers give larger plots. See the example below.
The demo program below runs YSLICE without 2D/3D - just paste it to the stack and press EVAL.
Exit with ON - it often requires multiple presses. The grobs will be on the stack with the number of
grobs on Lev1.
%%HP: T(3)A(D)F(.);
\<< RAD ERASE YSLICE 'X^3*Y-X*Y^3'
STEQ -.5 .5 ZVOL DRAW \>>
INDEX
To see graphically what Yslice is doing, run the above and then LS+2D/3D. Change the plot type to
FAST3D and press DRAW. Yslice is drawing sample slices as it moves through this figure, which you
can rotate with the cursor keys.
See also Plots for more on general plotting.
Access: LS+2D/3D-Type
85 MENU
YVOL
Sets depth of view volume in VPAR, variables 3 and 4. Called Y-Near, Y-Far in LS+WIN 3D plots.
Y-Near Y-Far
Access: LS+WIN
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
YYRNG
Sets X range of input plane (domain) for GRIDMAP and PARSURFACE (Pr-Surface). Called
YYNear, YYFar in LS+WIN. See also the entry for VPAR.
YYNear YYFar
Access: LS+WIN,
81 MENU-3D-VPAR
ZFACT
1. Sets the zoom factor in the Function plot ZOOM menu and other plot types that support zooms. The
default is 2. See the entry for Graphics menu for more detail.
Access: LeftCursor-ZOOM-ZFACT
2. Returns gas compressibility correction factor for non-ideal hydrocarbon gas.
Xtr YPr Zfactor
Access: 117 MENU,
APPS-EqnLib-UTILS
INDEX
ZPAR
Variable containing zoom factors and a copy of the PPAR before the zoom. Created in the current dir
by any zoom. Zoomfactors are set with ZOOM-ZFACT.
Numbers below are default values.
{
h-zoomfactor 4
v-zoomfactor 4
recenter 0
{} empty or copy of last PPAR
}
ZVOL
Sets height of 3D view volume in VPAR (elements 5 and 6). Called Z-Low, Z-High in LS+WIN 3D
plots.
Z-Low Z-High
Access: LS+WIN,
81 MENU-3D-VPAR

Equal to or greater than; compares y to x and returns 1 (yes) or 0 (no).

30 50 0

Inserts into program.
Access: LS-1/X,
PRG-TEST

Equal to or less than; compares y to x and returns 1 (yes) or 0 (no).

30 50 1

Inserts into program.
Access: LS-X
PRG-TEST
INDEX
>
Greater than; compares y to x and returns 1 (yes) or 0 (no).
30 50 0

Inserts > into program.
Access: RS-1/X
PRG-TEST
\
Used in text to replace a symbol with an ASCII equivalent; eg, the right arrow becomes \->.

During transmission of the file in ASCII (or Conn4x Xmodem), the ASCII is replaced with the proper
HP symbol. See the entries for TRANSFERRING and Translations.
To embed double quotes in a string (ie, one string inside another), precede each double quote of the
inside string with a backslash.
Access: Alpha-RS-5
CHARS, CHR 92
<
Less than; compares y to x and returns 1 (yes) or 0 (no).
30 50 1

Inserts < into program.
Access: RS-X,
PRG-TEST
(not eq.)
Not equal to; compares y to x and returns 1 (yes) or 0 (no).
30 50 1

Inserts into program.
Access: LS-+/-
PRG-TEST
INDEX
(pi)
Places or numeric value on Lev1:
Flags -2 and -3 clear:

Flags -2 and -3 set:
3.14159265359
Note that it performs an ENTER - it doesn't appear on the command line as numbers do. It does not do
an ENTER during algebraic entry: '2*+X'.
Access: LS-SPC
::
Inserts a double colon to indicate a user-specified tag or a port number. Only the right-hand colon
shows on the stack. See TAG.
In alpha mode (alpha-LS-::), inserts a single colon.
Tag example:
"result" 3.141 result:3.141

An empty tag can be used to put a cmd or programname on the stack without evaluating it:
::COS ::HLP49
See also LIST series for another way of doing this.
Port example (var in flash ROM):
:2:MATHDOC.TXT
Port example (var in SYSRPL dir):
:2:{ SYSRPL RPLMAN.DOC }
Access: LS-period
INDEX
+/-
Plus or minus. Changes the sign of the value on Lev1 from plus to minus and back again.
Inserts NEG into program.
Toggles highlighted values in menus.
Access: +/- key
MTH-NXT-CMPLX-NXT (NEG)
CMPLX (NEG)
_
The underscore links a value to its unit:
237_mm

The calculator accepts any unit you want to enter:
237_foo

It will handle these in the usual algebraic way:
(237_foo)^2 56169_foo^2

To remove the underscore and its unit, use UVAL (in RS-UNITS-TOOLS).
Currently (ROM v2.09), units cannot be used in the Equation Writer.
Access: RS-minus key
End of main entries - see below for the Appendix
INDEX
APPENDIX
Cross-references to programs and utilities that are in other entries. Pressing the calculator SPC key will
make the index jump to it.
SUBJECT ENTRY
(in program) Assign
Algebraicscomplex i
All-purpose sine Plots
Auto-binaries Custom Enter
Backups ARCHIVE, Conn4x basics
BASIC arrays ARRAY-LIST
Better beep BEEP
Black square removal NEWLINE, TRANSFERRING
Clean exits IFERR
Clean Solver SOLVING basics
Clock set program CLKADJ
Clock adjust alarm Alarms
CNFIG program A Few Basics
Coefficients algebraic DOSUBS, PEVAL
Connectivity Conn4x basics
Create library CRLIB
CST CUSTOM
Custom EQW STARTEQW
Degrees, using DMS (degrees, minutes, seconds)
Delay, adding START
LIST LIST series
DESOLVE Derivative ()
Diffeq numerical DIFFEQ - part 2
Diffeq plots DIFFEQ - part 1
Doubleclick Helptext (in pgms)
Editor start NOT, STARTED
Ellipse plot CONIC
Error messages DOERR, ERRM
Error message, header STARTERR
EXCO SOLVING basics
Fast truth plot TRUTH
Flag toggle FLAGS - list of flags
GC, forced Garbage Collection
Global vars VAR, LOCAL
Help in programs Helptext (in pgms)
HP48 program slow TRANSFERRING
IN/OUT programs Translations ASCII - Symbols
Left quotes (``) Backquotes (left quotes)
Lissajous plot PARAMETRIC
Local vars VAR, Assign, LOCAL
Mode toggle Numerical/Symbolic modes
Mode switching REAL Mode, APPROX. mode
INDEX
SUBJECT ENTRY
MODIF font editor CHARS
Names, naming STO
ODEs (DESOLVE) Derivative ()
ODEs (plots) DIFFEQ (Plots, Numerical)
ODETYPE Derivative ()
LIST LIST series
PICT with menu PICT, PVIEW, TMENU
Plot program DRAW
Polar notation, easy CYLIN
Polar/rect toggle CYLIN, RECT
Power program Programming basics
PUSH/POP Programming basics
Reboot Recovery, Reset
Repeating alarm Alarms, Recovery
Root finder program INPUT
Rose-like plot POLAR
LIST LIST series
S~N str name 256 MENU
STIME XMIT
Sum of sqrs program Sigma ()
Symbols ASCII Translations ASCII ? Symbols
Symbolic sequence solve SEQ
Terminating FOR FOR-NEXT
Time to auto-off TOFF
30 MENU solver SOLVING basics
TYPE test program CASE
"Undefined variable" Numerical/Symbolic modes
UNINSTALL program A Few Basics
User Flags FLAGS - list of flags
Vector plot program Arrays/vectors
Vector rotate Arrays/vectors
VX SOLVING basics, STOVX
Warmstart Reset
Wildcard (&) A Few Basics, MATCH, RCL
END OF HLP49 TEXT
INDEX